Arch. & Struc. Specifications

UPTOWN CAIRO
Village Z3 - Phase 01

BUILDINGS SPECIFICATIONS
Structural and Architectural
Building 02
IFC
November 2019
Rev. 00

Prepared By:

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING

REQUIREMENTS
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 Procurement and contracting requirements

IFC - Rev.00 Page 1 of 2 November 2019
INDEX
SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
END OF INDEX
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 Procurement and contracting requirements

FOR
SECTION 00 0110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 0110 Table of contents

INDEX
DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 03: CONCRETE
SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03 4500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
SECTION 03 5400 CAST UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04: MASONRY
SECTION 04 2100 CLAY MASONRY UNITS
SECTION 04 2200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 4200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
DIVISION 05: METALS
SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATION
SECTION 05 5133 METAL LADDERS
SECTION 05 5200 METAL RAILINGS
DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
SECTION 06 4000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 1300 SHEET DAMP PROOFING - POLYETHILENE SHEET
SECTION 07 1416 COLD FLUID- APPLIED WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 3200 ROOF TILES
SECTION 07 5200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 07 7233 ROOF HATCHES
SECTION 07 9500 EXPANTION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 08: OPENINGS
SECTION 08 1300 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 1400 WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 3513 FOLDING DOORS
SECTION 08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 08 6200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING
SECTION 08 4400 CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 08 8300 MIRRORS
DIVISION 09: FINISHES
SECTION 09 2400 CEMENT PLASTER
SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLE
SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING
SECTION 09 6340 STONE FLOORING
SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09 7500 STONE FACING
SECTION 09 6616 TERRAZZO FLOOR TILES
SECTION 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATINGS
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 2100 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
SECTION 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10 2819 TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES
SECTION 10 7316 CANOPIES AND TRILLIES
DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12 3640 STONE COUNTERTOPS
SECTION 12 5000 FURNITURE
DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 14 9182 TRASH CHUTES
DIVISION 31: EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILL
DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 1613.13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS
SECTION 32 1713 PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS
SECTION 32 1716 SPEED BUMPS
SECTION 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SECTION 32 3100 FENCES AND GATES
END OF INDEX

FOR
DIVISION 03: CONCRETE
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 Concrete

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this Section consists of providing all plant, labor and materials
and performing all operations in connection with plain and reinforced Cast-In-Place
Concrete.
These requirements shall apply but not be limited to furnishing concrete for the
following:
1. Foundations
2. Isolated footings
3. Retaining walls
4. Slabs on grade
5. Suspended floor and roof slabs
6. Walls
7. Columns and beams
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 117 (2010) Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials and Commentary
2. ACI 121R (2008) Guide for Concrete Construction Quality Systems in
Conformance with ISO 9001
3. ACI 211.1 (2009) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
4. ACI 211.2 (2004) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural
Lightweight Concrete
5. ACI 213R (2003) Guide for Structural Lightweight-Aggregate Concrete
6. ACI 301 (2011) Specifications for Structural Concrete
7. ACI 302.1R (2007) Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
8. ACI 304.2R (2008) Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
9. ACI 304R (2009) Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete
10. ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
11. ACI 306.1 (2002) Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
12. ACI 306R (2010) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
13. ACI 308.1 (2011) Specification for Curing Concrete
14. ACI 318 (2013) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary
15. ACI 347 (2012) Guide to Formwork for Concrete
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete
16. ACI SP-15(10): Field Reference Manual: Specifications for Structural
Concrete
17. ACI SP-2 (2007) ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection
18. ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
B. American hardboard association (AHA)
1. AHA A135.4 (2004) Basic Hardboard
C. American welding society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.4/D1.4m (2011) structural welding code - reinforcing steel
D. American society for testing and materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A780 / A780M - 09(2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged
and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
2. ASTM A934 / A934M - 16 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
3. ASTM C31 / C31M - 15ae1 Standard Practice for Making and Curing
Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
4. ASTM C33 / C33M - 16 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
5. ASTM C39 / C39M - 16 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
6. ASTM C42 / C42M - 13 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
7. ASTM C78 / C78M - 15b Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of
Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
8. ASTM C94 / C94M - 16 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
9. ASTM C138 / C138M - 16 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),
Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
10. ASTM C143 / C143M - 15a Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete
11. ASTM C150 / C150M - 16 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
12. ASTM C172 / C172M - 14a Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete
13. ASTM C173 / C173M - 16 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly
Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
14. ASTM C192 / C192M - 16 Standard Practice for Making and Curing
Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
16. ASTM C260 / C260M - 10a Standard Specification for Air-Entraining
Admixtures for Concrete
17. ASTM C295 / C295M - 12 Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of
Aggregates for Concrete

18. ASTM C311 / C311M - 13 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing
Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolan for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete
19. ASTM C330 / C330M - 14 Standard Specification for Lightweight
Aggregates for Structural Concrete
20. ASTM C494 / C494M - 15a Standard Specification for Chemical
Admixtures for Concrete
21. ASTM C552 - 16 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal
Insulation
22. ASTM C567 / C567M - 14 Standard Test Method for Determining Density
of Structural Lightweight Concrete
23. ASTM C578 - 15b Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation
24. ASTM C591 - 16 Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid
Cellular Poly-isocyanurate Thermal Insulation
25. ASTM C595 / C595M - 16 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic
Cements
26. ASTM C618 - 15 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
27. ASTM C989 / C989M - 14 Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use
in Concrete and Mortars
28. ASTM C1077 - 16 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and
Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing
Agency Evaluation
29. ASTM C1107 / C1107M - 14a Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
30. ASTM C1116 / C1116M - 10a(2015) Standard Specification for Fiber-
Reinforced Concrete
31. ASTM C1157 / C1157M - 11 Standard Performance Specification for
Hydraulic Cement
32. ASTM C1218 / C1218M - 15 Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble
Chloride in Mortar and Concrete
33. ASTM C1260 - 14 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of
Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
34. ASTM C1567 - 13 Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential
Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementatious Materials and
Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
35. ASTM C1602 / C1602M - 12 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used
in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
36. ASTM D412 - 15a Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension
37. ASTM D471 - 16 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Effect of
Liquids

38. ASTM D1751 - 04(2013)e1 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion
Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding
and Resilient Bituminous Types)
39. ASTM D1752 - 04a(2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge
Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction
40. ASTM D2628 - 91(2011) Standard Specification for Preformed
Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
41. ASTM D2835 - 89(2012) Standard Specification for Lubricant for
Installation of Preformed Compression Seals in Concrete Pavements
42. ASTM D5759 - 12 Standard Guide for Characterization of Coal Fly Ash and
Clean Coal Combustion Fly Ash for Potential Uses
43. ASTM D6690 - 15 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot
Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
44. ASTM E96 / E96M - 16 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor
Transmission of Materials
45. ASTM E329 - 14a Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection
46. ASTM E1155 - 14 Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness
and FL Floor Levelness Numbers
47. ASTM E1643 - 11 Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and
Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular
Fill Under Concrete Slabs
48. ASTM E1993 / E1993M - 98(2013)e1 Standard Specification for Bituminous
Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under
Concrete Slabs
E. CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)
1. CRSI 10MSP (2009; 28th Ed) Manual of Standard Practice
F. NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
1. NIST PS 1 (2009) DOC Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-07, Structural
Plywood
G. U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
1. COE CRD-C 513 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications for Rubber
Water stops
H. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. AASHTO T 26 (2008) Quality of Water to be used in Concrete
2. AASHTO T 260-97 (2011) Standard Method of Test for Sampling and
Testing for Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Cementitious material as used herein must include all Portland cement.

Chemical admixtures are materials in the form of powder or fluids that are added to
the concrete to give it certain characteristics not obtainable with plain concrete mixes.
Design strength (f'c) is the specified compressive strength of concrete at time
specified in this section to meet structural design criteria.
Mixture proportioning is the process of designing concrete mixture proportions to
enable it to meet the strength, service life and constructability requirements of the
project while minimizing the initial and life-cycle cost.
Mixture proportions are the masses or volumes of individual ingredients used to
make a unit measure (cubic meter or cubic yard) of concrete.
Workability (or consistence) is the ability of a fresh plastic concrete mix to fill the
form/mould properly with the desired work vibration and without reducing the
concrete's quality. Workability depends on water content, chemical admixtures,
aggregate (shape and size distribution), cementatious content and level of hydration.
MSDS material safety data sheet is an important component of product
and occupational safety and health. It is intended to provide workers and emergency
personnel with procedures for handling or working with that substance in a safe
manner, and includes information such as physical data (melting point, boiling
point, flash point, etc.), toxicity, health effects, first aid, reactivity, storage, disposal,
protective equipment, and spill-handling procedures.
HRWR High-range Water Reducers
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Package: Submit product data for design mix (es) and materials for
concrete specified below at the same time as a package.
B. Product Data:
1. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete design mix(es) together with name
and location of batching plant at least 28 days prior to the start of concrete
work.
a. Include test results of proposed concrete proportions based on
previous field experience or laboratory trial batches in
accordance with ACI 301.
b. Pumped Concrete: Include test results of proposed design mix
tested under actual field conditions with the maximum
horizontal run and vertical lift required for this project.
2. Portland cement: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
3. Water-reducing Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
4. High Range Water-reducing Admixture (Super plasticizer): Brand and
manufacturer’s name.
5. Accelerating Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
6. Aggregates: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers.
7. Chemical Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Brand and manufacturer’s
name, and application instructions.

8. Bonding Agent (Adhesive): Brand and manufacturer’s name, and
preparation and application instructions.
9. Expansion Joint Fillers: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
10. Water stop: Brand and manufacturer’s name, and installation instructions.
11. Integral Water-Repellent Admixture: Brand, manufacturer name,
specifications, and application instructions.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Batching Plant Records: At the end of each day of placing concrete, furnish
the Engineer with a legible copy of all batch records for the concrete placed.
2. Concrete Pumping Equipment Data: Include manufacturer’s name and
model of principal components, type of pump, and type and diameter of
pipe/hose.
3. Minutes of the previous pre-installation conference.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Follow ACI 301, ACI 304R and ASTM A934/A934M requirements and
recommendations.
B. Do not deliver concrete until vapor retarder, vapor barrier, forms, reinforcement,
embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement.
C. Do not store concrete curing compounds or sealers in occupied spaces.
D. Reinforcement
1. Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks
raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting.
2. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt.
3. Ensure bar sizes can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and
tags removed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Data
1. Formwork Calculations
a. Include design calculations indicating arrangement of forms, sizes
and grades of supports (lumber), panels, and related components.
b. Furnish drawings and calculations of shoring and re-shoring methods
proposed for floor and roof slabs, spandrel beams, and other
horizontal concrete members.
c. Calculations must indicate concrete pressure with both live and dead
loads, along with material types.
2. Concrete Mix Design
a. Sixty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix
design for each strength and type of concrete.
b. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and
amount of cement, complementary cementitious materials,

polypropylene fibres, and admixtures; and applicable reference
specifications.
c. Submit mill test and all other test for cement, complementary
cementations materials, aggregates, and admixtures.
d. Provide documentation of maximum nominal aggregate size,
gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a
graph of percentage retained verses sieve size.
e. Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water-
cementations material ratios for each type of mixture, which produce
a range of strength encompassing those required for each type of
concrete required.
f. If source material changes, resubmit mix proportion data using
revised source material. Provide only materials that have been
proven by trial mix studies to meet the requirements of this
specification, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.
Indicate clearly in the submittal where each mix design is used when
more than one mix design is submitted.
g. Resubmit data on concrete components if the qualities or source of
components changes.
h. For previously approved concrete mix designs used within the past
twelve months, the previous mix design may be re-submitted without
further trial batch testing if accompanied by material test data
conducted within the last six months.
i. Obtain mix design approval from the Engineer prior to concrete
placement.
3. Shop Drawings
a. Formwork
 Drawings showing details of formwork including, but not
limited to; joints, supports, studding and shoring, and
sequence of form and shoring removal.
 Indicate placement schedule, construction, location and
method of forming control joints.
 Include locations of inserts, conduit, sleeves and other
embedded items. Reproductions of contract drawings are
unacceptable.
 Submit form removal schedule indicating element and
minimum length of time for form removal.
 Design, fabricate, erect, support, brace, and maintain
formwork so that it is capable of supporting without failure
all vertical and lateral loads that may reasonably be
anticipated to be applied to the formwork.
b. Reinforcing Steel

 ACI SP-66. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams,
splicing and laps of bars, shapes, dimensions, and details of
bar reinforcing, accessories, and concrete cover. Do not scale
dimensions from structural drawings to determine lengths of
reinforcing bars. Reproductions of contract drawings are
unacceptable.
4. Control Submittals
a. Concrete Curing Plan
 Submit proposed materials, methods and duration for curing
concrete elements in accordance with ACI 308.1.
b. Pumping Concrete
 Submit proposed materials and methods for pumping
concrete. Submittal must include mix designs, pumping
equipment including type of pump and size and material for
pipe, and maximum length and height concrete is to be
pumped.
c. Material Safety Data Sheets
 Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all
materials that are regulated for hazardous health effects.
MSDS must be readily accessible during each work shift to
employees when they are at the construction site.
5. Test Reports
a. Aggregates
 ASTM C1260 for potential alkali-silica reactions, ASTM
C295/C295M for Petrography analysis.
b. Fibre-Reinforced Concrete
 Test to determine flexural toughness index I5 in accordance
with ASTM C1116/C1116M.
B. Quality Control Plan
1. Develop and submit for approval a concrete quality control program in
accordance with the guidelines of ACI 121R and as specified herein. The
plan must include approved laboratories. Provide direct oversight for the
concrete qualification program inclusive of associated sampling and testing.
All quality control reports must be provided to the Engineer, Quality
Manager and Concrete Supplier. Maintain a copy of ACI SP-15 and CRSI
10MSP at project site.
C. Quality Control Personnel Certifications
1. The Contractor must submit for approval the responsibilities of the various
quality control personnel, including the names and qualifications of the
individuals in those positions and a quality control organizational chart
defining the quality control hierarchy and the responsibility of the various
positions. Quality control personnel must be employed by the Contractor.
2. Submit American Concrete Institute certification for the following:

a. CQC (Concrete Quality Control) personnel responsible for
inspection of concrete operations.
b. Lead Foreman of the Concrete Placing, Finishing, and Curing Crews.
c. Field Testing Technicians.
D. Quality Manager Qualifications
1. The quality manager must hold a current license as a professional engineer
with experience on at least five (5) similar projects. Evidence of
extraordinary proven experience may be considered by the Engineer as
sufficient to act as the Quality Manager.
E. Field Testing Technician and Testing Agency
1. Submit data on qualifications of proposed testing agency and technicians for
approval by the Engineer prior to performing testing on concrete.
a. Work on concrete under this contract must be performed by a
qualified Concrete Field Testing Technician in accordance with ACI
SP-2 or equivalent.
b. Testing agencies that perform testing services on reinforcing steel
must meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
c. Testing agencies that perform testing services on concrete materials
must meet the requirements of ASTM C1077.
F. Laboratory Qualifications for Concrete Qualification Testing
1. The concrete testing laboratory must have the necessary equipment and
experience to accomplish required testing. The laboratory must meet the
requirements of ASTM C1077 or equivalent.
G. Laboratory Accreditation
1. Laboratory and testing facilities must be provided by and at the expense of
the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests must be accredited in
accordance with ASTM C1077, including ASTM C78/C78M and ASTM
C1260 or equivalent. Furthermore, the testing must comply with the
following requirements:
a. Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning: Aggregate testing and
mixture proportioning studies must be performed by an accredited
laboratory and under the direction of a registered professional
engineer competent in concrete materials who is competent in
concrete materials and must sign all reports and designs.
b. Acceptance Testing: Furnish all materials, labor, and facilities
required for moulding, curing, testing, and protecting test specimens
at the site and in the laboratory. Furnish and maintain boxes or other
facilities suitable for storing and curing the specimens at the site
while in the mould within the temperature range stipulated by ASTM
C31/C31M.
c. Contractor Quality Control: All sampling and testing must be
performed by an approved, onsite, independent, accredited
laboratory.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
A. Welding procedures must be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M or equivalent.
B. Verify that Welder qualifications are in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M or under
an equivalent qualification test approved in advance. Welders are permitted to do
only the type of welding for which each is specifically qualified.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR FORMS
A. Provide wood, plywood, plastic, carton, or steel. Use plywood or steel forms where a
smooth form finish is required.
1. Wood Forms
a. Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue-and-groove boards,
free of raised grain, knotholes, or other surface defects. Provide
plywood that complies with NIST PS 1, B-B concrete form panels or
better or AHA A135.4, hardboard for smooth form lining.[ Submit
data verifying that composite wood products contain no urea
formaldehyde resins.
b. Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Rough): Provide plywood that is
not less than 16 mm thick.
2. Steel Forms
a. Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities, dents,
or sags.
2.2 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide a form tie system that does not leave mild steel after break-off or removal
any closer than 50 mm from the exposed surface. Do not use wire alone. Form ties
and accessories must not reduce the effective cover of the reinforcement.
B. Water stops
1. Hydrophilic Water stop
a. Swell-able strip type compound of polymer modified chloroprene
rubber that swells upon contact with water must conform to ASTM
D412 as follows:
 Tensile strength 2.9 MPa minimum; ultimate elongation 600
percent minimum.
 Hardness must be 50 minimum on the type A Durometer and
the volumetric expansion ratio in distilled water at 20° C
must be 3 to 1 minimum.
C. Dovetail Anchor Slot
1. Preformed metal slot approximately 25 mm by 25 mm of not less than 22
gage galvanized steel cast in concrete. Coordinate actual size and throat
opening with dovetail anchors and provide with removable filler material.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Contractor's Option for Material Only

1. At the option of the Contractor, those applicable material sections of concrete
must govern in lieu of this specification. Do not change the selected option
during the course of the work.
B. Contractor-Furnished Mix Design
1. References ACI 211.1, ACI 301, and ACI 318 and ACI 211.2 and ACI
304.2R and ACI 213R except as otherwise specified, to be followed.
2. Indicate the compressive strength (f'c) of the concrete for each portion of the
structure(s) as specified below.
3. Where faster set time is required, use Type III cement before using calcium
chloride with approval from the Engineer.
4. For high-volume fly ash concrete mixtures, mixtures where fly ash
replacement of Portland cement is greater than 50 percent by weight, the
duration of concrete strength must be a minimum of 56 days.
C. Unless otherwise indicated; proportion normal-weight concrete mixture for:
1. Footings
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 25 MPa at 28 days, or as per
drawings.
b. Maximum Water-Cementatious Materials Ratio: 0.40.
c. Slump Limit: 125 mm or 200 mm for concrete with verified slump of
50 to 100 mm before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 25 mm.
d. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of
delivery for 38 mm nominal maximum aggregate size.
2. Foundation Walls
drawings.
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 25 mm.
d. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery
for19 mm nominal maximum aggregate size.
3. Slab-On-Grade
drawings.
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 25 mm
d. Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3
percent.

e. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 0.90 kg/ m3.
f. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 3 kg/m3.
4. Slabs
drawings.
e. Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
f. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 0.90 kg/m3.
5. Concrete Toppings
drawings.
for 19 mm nominal maximum aggregate size.
e. Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
f. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 0.90 kg/ m3.
g. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 3 kg/ m3.
6. Building Walls (shear walls)
drawings.

7. Normal Weight Concrete
a. Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing
requirements for various classes and types of concrete specified are
the responsibility of the Contractor.
b. Base mixture proportions on compressive strength as determined by
test specimens fabricated in accordance with ASTM C192/C192M
and tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M.
c. Samples of all materials used in mixture proportioning studies must
be representative of those proposed for use in the project and must be
accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test report
indicating compliance with these specifications.
d. Base trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies, and air
content suitable for the work on methodology described in ACI
211.1.
e. In the trial mixture, use at least three different water- cementatious
material ratios for each type of mixture, which must produce a range
of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of
concrete required on the project.
f. The maximum water-cementatious material ratio allowed must be
based on equivalent water-cementatious material ratio calculations as
determined by the conversion from the weight ratio of water to
cement plus Pozzolan by weight equivalency method. Design
laboratory trial mixture for maximum permitted slump and air
content.
g. Each combination of material proposed for use must have separate
trial mixture, except for accelerator or retarder use can be provided
without separate trial mixture. Report the temperature of concrete in
each trial batch.
h. For each water-cementatious material ratio, at least three test
cylinders for each test age must be made and cured in accordance
with ASTM C192/C192M and tested in accordance with ASTM
C39/C39M for 7and 28 days.
i. From these results, plot a curve showing the relationship between
water-cementatious material ratio and strength for each set of trial
mix studies. In addition, plot a curve showing the relationship
between 7 and 28 day strengths.
D. Required Average Strength of Mix Design
1. The selected mixture must produce an average compressive strength
exceeding the specified strength by the amount indicated in ACI 301, but
may not exceed the specified strength at the same age by more than 20
percent.
2. When a concrete production facility has a record of at least 15 consecutive
tests, the standard deviation must be calculated and the required average
compressive strength must be determined in accordance with ACI 301.
E. Ready-Mix Concrete

1. Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C94/C94M.
2. Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets
with each load of concrete delivered. Provide delivery tickets with the
following information in addition to that required by ASTM C94/C94M:
a. Type and brand cement
b. Cement content in 50 kilogram bags per cubic meter of concrete
c. Maximum size of aggregate
d. Amount and brand name of admixtures
e. Total water content expressed by water cementations material ratio
F. Concrete Curing Materials
1. Provide concrete curing material in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 and
ACI 308.1 Section 2.
2. Submit product data for concrete curing compounds.
3. Submit manufactures instructions for placement of curing compound.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement
1. Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C150/C150M, low Alkali with tri-
calcium aluminates (C3A) content less than 10 percent and a maximum
cement-alkali content of 0.80 percent Na2Oe (sodium oxide) equivalent..
2. Use one brand and type of cement for formed concrete having exposed-to-
view finished surfaces.
3. Supplier must certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw
materials.
B. Blended Cements
1. Blended cement must conform to ASTM C595/C595M and ASTM
C1157/C1157M, Type IP or IS, including the optional requirement for
mortar expansion and sulfate soundness and consist of a mixture of ASTM
C150/C150M Type I, or Type II cement and a complementary cementing
material.
2. The slag added to the Type IS blend must be ASTM C989/C989M ground
granulated blast-furnace slag. The Pozzolan added to the Type IP blend must
be ASTM C618 Class F and must be interground with the cement clinker.
3. The manufacturer must state in writing that the amount of Pozzolan in the
finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the
finished cement from lot-to-lot or within a lot.
4. The percentage and type of mineral admixture used in the blend must not
change from that submitted for the aggregate evaluation and mixture
proportioning.
C. Water
1. Water must comply with the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M.

2. Minimize the amount of water in the mix. Improve workability by adjusting
the grading rather than by adding water.
3. Water must be potable or from rainwater collection or from recycled water;
free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or
other substances deleterious to concrete.
4. Submit test report showing water complies with ASTM C1602/C1602M.
5. Do not use water with impurities above the following limits:
Impurity Concentration
Acidity or alkalinity calculated in terms of calcium 0.05%
carbonate
Total organic solids 0.05%
Total inorganic solids 0.05%
Sulfate (SO4) 0.05%
Chloride 0.01%
6. Conduct test methods according to the following
Quality of Water, Solids, ppm AASHTO: T26

Setting Time of Concrete Mixtures ASTM: C 403
SO4 , ppm, Alkalis, ppm ASTM D 516
Cl, ppm AASHTO T 260
D. Aggregates
1. It is not permitted to use alkali-reactive aggregates.
2. Aggregates used to comply ASTM C33/C33M, except as modified herein.
3. Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be
deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement.
4. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C33/C33M.
5. Fine and coarse aggregates must show expansions less than 0.08 percent at
28 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C1260.
6. Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to
have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with
ASTM C295/C295M.
E. Non-shrink Grout
F. Admixtures
1. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C494/C494M for:
a. Type A, water reducing
b. Type B, retarding

c. Type C, accelerating
d. Type D, water-reducing and retarding
e. Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture.
2. Do not use calcium chloride admixtures.
3. Submit product data for admixtures used in concrete.
G. Air-Entraining
H. High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Super plasticizers)
1. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C494/C494M for:
a. Type F and Type G (HRWR retarding admixture)
2. Silica fume and HRWR must come from the same manufacturer.
I. Vapor Retarder and Vapor Barrier
1. Vapor Retarder Class B polyethylene sheeting, minimum 0.38 mm thickness
or other equivalent material with a maximum permeance rating of 0.04 perms
per ASTM E96/E96M.
2. Vapor Barrier Class A polyethylene sheeting, minimum 0.38 mm thickness,
ASTM E1993/E1993M bituminous membrane or other equivalent material
with a maximum permeance rating of 0.01 perms per ASTM E96/E96M.
3. Consider plastic vapor retarders and adhesives with a high recycled content,
low toxicity low VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) levels.
J. Expansion/Contraction Joint Filler
1. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752
Type I or II.
2. Material must be 13 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Joint Sealants
1. Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.
a. For horizontal surfaces, 3 percent slope maximum, comply with
ASTM D6690 or ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Use T.
b. For vertical surfaces greater than 3 percent slope, comply with
ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T or NT.
c. Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Type, comply with ASTM
D2628.
d. Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals, comply with ASTM
D2835.
L. Biodegradable Form Release Agent
1. Provide product that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete
surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2. Provide form release agent that does not contain diesel fuel, petroleum-based
lubricating oils, waxes, or kerosene. Submit documentation indicating type of
bio-based material in product and bio-based content.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed; verify that
substrates are level.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of
unsatisfactory preparation before processing.
C. Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much
from design dimensions for proper installation, notify Engineer and wait for
instructions before beginning installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of excess
concrete.
B. Designate locations or uses for potential excess concrete before the concrete is
poured.
C. General
1. Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris, loose
material, standing water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances before
start of concrete placing.
2. Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete.
3. Divert flow of water through side drains provided for such purpose.
D. Sub-grade under Foundations and Footings
1. When sub-grade material is semi-porous and dry, sprinkle sub-grade surface
with water as required to eliminate suction at the time concrete is deposited,
or seal sub-grade surface by covering surface with specified vapor retarder.
2. When sub-grade material is porous, seal Sub-grade surface by covering
surface with specified vapor retarder.
E. Sub-grade under Slabs on Ground
1. Before construction of slabs on ground, have underground work on pipes and
conduits completed and approved.
2. Previously constructed Sub-grade or fill must be cleaned of foreign materials.
3. Finish surface of capillary water barrier under interior slabs on ground must
not show deviation in excess of 6.4 mm when tested with a 3000 mm
straightedge parallel with and at right angles to building lines.
4. Finished surface of Sub-grade or fill under exterior slabs on ground must not
be more than 6 mm above or 30 mm below elevation indicated.
F. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs
1. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain
indicated elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must be strong

enough to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if nature of
specified slab finish requires use of such equipment.
2. Align concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of strike-off
templates or approved compacting-type screeds.
G. Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items
1. Secure reinforcement, joint materials, and other embedded materials in
position, inspected, and approved before start of concrete placing.
3.3 FORMS
A. Provide forms, shoring, and scaffolding for concrete placement in accordance with
ACI 301 Section 2 and 5 and ACI 347.
B. Set forms mortar-tight and true to line and grade.
C. Chamfer above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 20 mm
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide formwork with clean-out openings to permit inspection and removal of
debris.
1. Coating: Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with
a form release agent.
2. Re-shoring: Re-shore concrete elements in accordance with ACI 301 Section
2.
3. Reuse:
a. Reuse forms providing the structural integrity of concrete and the
aesthetics of exposed concrete are not compromised.
b. Wood forms must not be clogged with paste and must be capable of
absorbing high water-cementitious material ratio paste.
4. Forms for Standard Rough Form Finish
a. Provide formwork in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 with a
surface finish, SF-1.0, for formed surfaces that are to be concealed
by other construction.
5. Forms for Standard Smooth Form Finish
a. Provide formwork in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 with a
surface finish, SF-3.0, for formed surfaces that are exposed to view.
6. Form Ties
a. Provide ties in accordance with ACI 301 section 2.
7. Forms for Concrete Pan Joist Construction
a. Pan-form units for one-way or two-way concrete joist and slab
construction must be factory-fabricated units of the approximate
section indicated.
b. Units must consist of steel or molded fiberglass concrete form pans.
c. Closure units must be furnished as required.
8. Tolerances for Form Construction

a. Construct formwork to ensure that after removal of forms and prior
to patching and finishing of formed surfaces; provide concrete
surfaces in accordance with tolerances specified in ACI 301 Section
5 and ACI 117.
9. Removal of Forms and Supports
a. After placing concrete, removal of forms must be in accordance with
ACI 301 Section 2 except as modified by approved form removal
schedule.
3.4 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE
A. Use dual action liquid super-plasticizer for the production of free flowing concrete
and as a substantial water-reducing agent for promoting high strength concrete.
B. Technical Data
1. Chemical base: Sulfonated Naphthalene based polymer
2. Density (at 25°C) Approximately 1.2 kg/lit ± 0.05 kg/lit
3. Chloride Content Nil
4. Dosage 1.0 - 2.8 % by weight of cement
C. Trial mixes must be done to establish the correct dosage of super-plasticizer.
3.5 WATER STOP INSTALLATION AND SPLICES
A. A water bar looks like a rope, which should be compressible or Swellable to one of
the different sizes in water retaining structures. They are made of different materials
like hydrocarbon-based polymers, hydrophilic rubber, bentonite-based butyl rubber
and other materials such as pigments and fillers, adhesion promoters and many
additives.
B. Provide water stops in construction joints as indicated.
C. Install water stops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint.
D. Make adequate provisions to support and protect water stops during progress of
work.
E. Protect water stops protruding from joints from damage.
1. PVC Water stop
a. Make splices by heat sealing the adjacent Water stop edges together
using a thermoplastic splicing iron utilizing a non-stick surface
specifically designed for Water stop welding.
b. Reform water stops at splices with a remolding iron with ribs or
corrugations to match the pattern of the Water stop.
c. The spliced area, when cooled, must show no signs of separation,
holes, or other imperfections when bent by hand in as sharp an angle
as possible.
2. Rubber Water stop
a. Rubber water stops must be spliced using cold bond adhesive as
recommended by the manufacturer.
a. Miter cut ends to be joined with sharp knife or shears. The ends must
be adhered with adhesive.
3.6 WATER STOP INSTALLATION AND SPLICES
A. Provide water stops in construction joints as indicated.
B. Install water stops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint.
C. Make adequate provisions to support and protect water stops during progress of
work.
D. Protect water stops protruding from joints from damage.
4. PVC Water stop
d. Make splices by heat sealing the adjacent Water stop edges together
using a thermoplastic splicing iron utilizing a non-stick surface
specifically designed for Water stop welding.
e. Reform water stops at splices with a remolding iron with ribs or
corrugations to match the pattern of the Water stop.
f. The spliced area, when cooled, must show no signs of separation,
holes, or other imperfections when bent by hand in as sharp an angle
as possible.
5. Rubber Water stop
b. Rubber water stops must be spliced using cold bond adhesive as
recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Thermoplastic Elastomeric Rubber Water stop
a. Fittings must be shop made using a machine specifically designed to
mechanically weld the Water stop.
b. A portable power saw must be used to miter or straight cut the ends
to be joined to ensure good alignment and contact between joined
surfaces. Maintain continuity of the characteristic features of the
cross section of the Water stop (for example ribs, tabular center axis,
and protrusions) across the splice.
b. Miter cut ends to be joined with sharp knife or shears. The ends must
be adhered with adhesive.
3.7 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI SP-66, Provide bars, welded wire
reinforcement, wire ties, supports, and other devices necessary to install and secure
reinforcement.
B. Reinforcement must not have rust, scale, oil, grease, clay, or foreign substances that
would reduce the bond.
C. Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the effective cross-sectional area or
the nominal weight per unit length has been reduced.
D. Remove loose rust prior to placing steel.
E. Tack welding is prohibited.

F. General: Provide details of reinforcement that are in accordance with ACI 301 and
ACI SP-66 and as specified.
1. Vapor Retarder and Vapor Barrier
a. Install in accordance with ASTM E1643.
b. Provide beneath the on-grade concrete floor slab.
c. Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable to eliminate joints
wherever possible.
d. Lap joints a minimum of 300 mm and tape.
e. Remove torn, punctured, or damaged vapor retarder and vapor
barrier material and provide with new vapor retarder and vapor
barrier prior to placing concrete.
f. Concrete placement must not damage vapor retarder and vapor
barrier material.
g. Place a 50 mm layer of clean concrete sand on vapor retarder and
vapor barrier before placing concrete.
2. Perimeter Insulation
a. Install perimeter insulation at locations indicated.
b. Adhesive must be used where insulation is applied to the interior
surface of foundation walls and may be used for exterior application.
3. Reinforcement Supports
a. Support reinforcement in accordance with ACI 301 Section 3.
b. Supports for coated or galvanized bars must also be coated with
electrically compatible material for a distance of at least 50 mm
beyond the point of contact with the bars.
4. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing: Epoxy Coated Reinforcing must meet the
requirements of ASTM A934/A934M including Appendix X2, "Guidelines
for Job Site Practices" except as otherwise specified herein.
a. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Placement and Coating Repair
 Carefully handle and install bars to minimize job site
patching.
 Do not drag bars over other bars or over abrasive surfaces.
 Keep bar free of dirt and grit.
 When possible, assemble reinforcement as tied cages prior to
final placement into the forms.
 Support assembled cages on padded supports.
 It is not expected that coated bars, when in final position
ready for concrete placement, are completely free of
damaged areas; however, excessive nicks and scrapes which
expose steel is cause for rejection. Criteria for defects which
require repair and for those that do not require repair are as
indicated. Inspect for defects and provide required repairs
prior to assembly. After assembly, re-inspect and provide
final repairs.
b. Immediately prior to application of the patching material, manually
remove any rust and de-bonded coating from the reinforcement by
suitable techniques employing devices such as wire brushes and
emery paper.
c. Exercise cars during this surface preparation so that the damaged
areas are not enlarged more than necessary to accomplish the repair.
d. Clean damaged areas of dirt, debris, oil, and similar materials prior
to application of the patching material.
e. Do repair and patching in accordance with the patching material
manufacturer's recommendations. These recommendations, including
cure times, must be available at the job site at all times.
f. Allow adequate time for the patching materials to cure in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendation prior to concrete
placement.
g. Rinse placed reinforcing bars with fresh water to remove chloride
contamination prior to placing concrete.
5. Splicing
a. As indicated.
b. For splices not indicated ACI 301.
c. Do not splice at points of maximum stress.
d. Overlap welded wire reinforcement the spacing of the cross wires,
plus 50 mm. Comply AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Approve welded splices
prior to use
e. Repair the cut ends of hot-dipped galvanized reinforcement steel to
completely coat exposed steel, ASTM A780/A780M.
6. Future Bonding
a. Plug exposed, threaded, mechanical reinforcement bar connectors
with a greased bolt.
b. Provide bolt threads that match the connector.
c. Countersink the connector in the concrete.
d. Caulk the depression after the bolt is installed.
7. Setting Miscellaneous Material
a. Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other
such items in position before concrete placement and support against
displacement.
b. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation.
c. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to
prevent the entry of concrete.
8. Fabrication

a. Provide fabrication tolerances that are in accordance with ACI 318
and ACI SP-66.
b. Provide hooks and bends that are in accordance with ACI 318 and
ACI SP-66.
c. Reinforcement must be bent cold to shapes as indicated. Bending
must be done in the shop.
d. Re-bending of a reinforcing bar that has been bent incorrectly is not
permitted.
e. Bending must be in accordance with standard approved practice and
by approved machine methods.
f. Tolerance on nominally square-cut, reinforcing bar ends must be in
accordance with ACI SP-66.
g. Deliver reinforcing bars bundled, tagged, and marked.
h. Tags must be metal with bar size, length, mark, and other
information pressed in by machine.
i. Marks must correspond with those used on the placing drawings.
j. Do not use reinforcement that has any of the following defects:
 Bar lengths, depths, and bends beyond specified fabrication
tolerances
 Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or approved shop
drawings
 Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause
k. Replace defective reinforcement with new reinforcement having
required shape, form, and cross-section area.
9. Placing Reinforcement
a. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI SP-66.
b. For slabs on grade (over earth or over capillary water barrier) and for
footing reinforcement, support bars or welded wire reinforcement on
precast concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of
reinforcement, to keep reinforcement the minimum height specified
above the underside of slab or footing.
c. For slabs other than on grade, supports for which any portion is less
than 25 mm from concrete surfaces that are exposed to view or to be
painted must be of precast concrete units, plastic-coated steel, or
stainless steel protected bar supports.
d. Precast concrete units must be wedge shaped, not larger than 90 by
90 mm, and of thickness equal to that indicated for concrete
protection of reinforcement.
e. Provide precast units that have cast-in galvanized tie wire hooked for
anchorage and blend with concrete surfaces after finishing is
completed.

f. Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to
prevent displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet
concrete, and as follows:
 Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in
number and have sufficient strength to carry the
reinforcement they support, and in accordance with ACI
318, ACI SP-66 and CRSI 10MSP.
 Do not use supports to support runways for concrete
conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
 Equip supports on ground and similar surfaces with sand-
plates.
 Support welded wire reinforcement as required for
reinforcing bars.
 Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire.
 Wire must be black, soft iron wire, not less than 1.6 mm.
 Reinforcement must be accurately placed, securely tied at
intersections, and held in position during placing of concrete
by spacers, chairs, or other approved supports.
 Point wire-tie ends away from the form.
 Unless otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of
supports must conform to ACI SP-66.
 Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete
is permitted only as specified in ACI SP-66 and ACI 318.
g. Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
 Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must
be in accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
 Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with
other reinforcement, or with conduit, pipe, or other
embedded items.
 If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar
diameter or specified placing tolerance, resulting
rearrangement of reinforcement is subject to preapproval by
the Engineer.
10. Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
a. Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI 318 and
ACI SP-66.
11. Welding
a. Welding must be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
3.8 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, conform to ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301, ACI 302.1R
and ACI 304R, except as modified herein.

B. Batching equipment must be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently
measured within the following tolerances:
1. 1 percent for cement and water
2. 2 percent for aggregate
3. 3 percent for admixtures.
C. Furnish mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.
D. Measuring
1. Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs SAMPLING and
TESTING.
E. Mixing
1. Machine mix concrete conform to ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301 and ACI
304R.
2. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the
aggregates.
3. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to
cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air
temperature is less than 29 degrees C.
4. Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes if the air
temperature is greater than 29 degrees C except as follows:
a. If set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be
met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes.
5. Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified maximum
slump and water-cementations material ratio are not exceeded and the
required concrete strength is still met.
6. When additional water is added, an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at
mixing speed is required.
7. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit, add a sufficient
quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified
limits.
8. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly
distribute the admixture throughout the batch.
F. Do not reconstitute concrete that has begun to solidify.
G. Transporting
1. Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable.
2. Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients.
3. Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch.
4. Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes.
5. Remove concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as
directed.
3.9 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.
B. Footing Placement
1. Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon
inspection and approval by the Engineer (not recommended).
2. Excavation width must be a minimum of 100 mm greater than indicated.
C. Pumping, general
1. Pumping must not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause
interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive
increments.
2. Loss of slump in pumping equipment must not exceed 50 mm at
discharge/placement.
3. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy.
4. Avoid rapid changes in pipe sizes.
5. Limit maximum size of course aggregate to 33 percent of the diameter of the
pipe.
6. Limit maximum size of well rounded aggregate to 40 percent of the pipe
diameter.
7. Take samples for testing at both the point of delivery to the pump and at the
discharge end.
D. Pumping Lightweight Concrete
1. Presoak or pre-saturate aggregates in accordance with ACI 213R.
2. Cement content must be minimum of 350 kg per cubic meter and be
sufficient to accommodate a 100 to 150 mm slump.
3. Make field trial run in accordance with ACI 213R.
E. Cold Weather
1. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 10 °C in accordance
with ACI 306.1.
2. Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is
below 4 degrees C or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing
temperatures within 24 hours.
3. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat to maintain 10 °C minimum
adjacent to both the formwork and the structure while curing.
4. Limit the rate of cooling to 3 degrees C in any 1 hour and 10 °C per 24 hours
after heat application.
F. Hot Weather
1. Maintain required concrete temperature in accordance with ACI 305R to
prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 1 kg of water per square meter
of exposed concrete per hour.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control
concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete.

3. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing.
4. Start curing when the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to
permit curing without damage.
5. Provide water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water hauling
equipment, where job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist
concrete surface throughout the curing period.
6. Provide burlap cover or other suitable, permeable material with fog spray or
continuous wetting of the concrete when weather conditions prevent the use
of either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets.
7. For vertical surfaces, protect forms from direct sunlight and add water to top
of structure once concrete is set.
G. Bonding
1. Surfaces of set concrete at joints, must be roughened and cleaned of laitance,
coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner
that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave laitance, loosened
particles of aggregate, nor damaged concrete at the surface.
2. Obtain bonding of fresh concrete that has set as follows:
a. At joints between footings and walls or columns, between walls or
columns and the beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless
otherwise specified; roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete
must be dampened, but not saturated, immediately prior to placing of
fresh concrete.
b. At joints in exposed-to-view work; at vertical joints in walls; at joints
near midpoint of span in girders, beams, supported slabs, other
structural members; in work designed to contain liquids; the
roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened but
not saturated and covered with a cement grout coating.
c. Provide cement grout that consists of equal parts of Portland cement
and fine aggregate by weight with not more than 22.5 liters of water
per sack of cement.
d. Apply cement grout with a stiff broom or brush to a minimum
thickness of 1.6 mm.
e. Deposit fresh concrete before cement grout has attained its initial set.
3.10 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Mixing Equipment
1. Before concrete pours, designate on-site area to be paved later in project for
cleaning out concrete mixing trucks.
2. Minimize water used to wash equipment.
B. Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete
1. Crush and reuse hardened, cured waste concrete as fill or as a base course for
pavement.
C. Reinforcing Steel

1. Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area for recycling.
D. Other Waste
1. Identify concrete manufacturer's or supplier's policy for collection or return
of construction waste, unused material, deconstruction waste, and/or
packaging material.
3.11 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES
A. Defects
1. Repair surface defects in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.
B. Top of Walls
1. Surfaces not otherwise specified must be finished with wood floats to even
surfaces.
2. Finish must match adjacent finishes.
C. As-Cast Rough Form
1. Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view a surface finish SF-1.0.
2. Patch holes and defects in accordance with ACI 301.
D. Standard Smooth Finish
1. Provide for surfaces exposed to public view a surface finish SF-3.0.
2. Patch holes and defects in accordance with ACI 301.
3.12 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints
1. Make and locate joints not indicated so as not to impair strength and
appearance of the structure, as approved.
2. Joints must be perpendicular to main reinforcement.
3. Reinforcement must be continued and developed across construction joints.
4. Locate construction joints as follows:
a. Maximum Allowable Construction Joint Spacing
 In walls at not more than 18 meter in any horizontal
direction.
 In slabs on ground, so as to divide slab into areas not in
excess of 110 m2.
b. Construction Joints for Constructability Purposes
 In walls, at top of footing; at top of slabs on ground; at top
and bottom of door and window openings or where required
to conform to architectural details; and at underside of
deepest beam or girder framing into wall.
 In columns or piers, at top of footing; at top of slabs on
ground; and at underside of deepest beam or girder framing
into column or pier.

 Near midpoint of spans for supported slabs, beams, and
girders unless a beam intersects a girder at the center, in
which case construction joints in girder must offset a
distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Make transfer
of shear through construction joint by use of inclined
reinforcement.
5. Provide keyways at least 40 mm deep in construction joints in walls and
slabs and between walls and footings; approved bulkheads may be used for
slabs.
B. Isolation Joints in Slabs on Ground
1. Provide joints at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical
surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
elsewhere as indicated.
2. Fill joints with pre-molded joint filler strips 13 mm thick, extending full slab
depth. Install filler strips at proper level below finish floor elevation with a
slightly tapered, dress-and-oiled wood strip temporarily secured to top of
filler strip to form a groove not less than 19 mm in depth where joint is
sealed with sealing compound and not less than 6 mm in depth where joint
sealing is not required.
3. Remove wood strip after concrete has set. Contractor must clean groove of
foreign matter and loose particles after surface has dried.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs on Ground
1. Provide joints to form panels as indicated.
2. Under and on exact line of each control joint, cut 50 percent of welded wire
reinforcement before placing concrete.
3. Saw cut contraction joints into slab on ground in accordance with ACI 301
Section 5.
4. Joints must be 4 mm wide by 1/5 to 1/4 of slab depth and formed by inserting
hand-pressed fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is
flush with slab surface.
5. After concrete has cured for at least 7 days, the Contractor must remove
inserts and clean groove of foreign matter and loose particles.
6. Saw cutting will be limited to within 12 hours after set and at 1/4 slab depth.
D. Sealing Joints in Slabs on Ground
1. Contraction and control joints which are to receive finish flooring material
must be sealed with joint sealing compound after concrete curing period.
2. Slightly under-fill groove with joint sealing compound to prevent extrusion
of compound.
3. Remove excess material as soon after sealing as possible.
4. Sealed groove must be left ready to receive filling material that is provided as
part of finish floor covering work.
3.13 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING

A. Standard Floor Topping
1. Provide topping for treads and platforms of metal steel stairs and elsewhere
as indicated.
2. When topping is placed on a green concrete base slab, screed surface of base
slab to a level not more than 38 mm or less than 25 mm below required finish
surface.
3. Remove water and laitance from surface of base slab before placing topping
mixture.
4. As soon as water ceases to rise to surface of base slab, place topping.
5. When topping is placed on a hardened concrete base slab, remove dirt, loose
material, oil, grease, asphalt, paint, and other contaminants from base slab
surface, leaving a clean surface.
6. Prior to placing topping mixture, 64 mm minimum, slab surface must be
dampened and left free of standing water.
7. Immediately before topping mixture is placed, broom a coat of neat cement
grout onto surface of slab.
8. Do not allow cement grout to set or dry before topping is placed.
9. When topping is placed on a metal surface, such as metal pans for steel
stairs, remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, asphalt, paint, and other
contaminants from metal surface.
10. Placing
a. Spread standard topping mixture evenly on previously prepared base
slab or metal surface, brought to correct level with a straightedge,
and struck off.
b. Topping must be consolidated, floated, checked for trueness of
surface, and refloated as specified for float finish.
11. Finishing
a. Give trowel finish standard floor topping surfaces (e.g. chemical-
hardener, non-slip aggregate finish, colored wear-resistant finish,
heavy-duty wear-resistant finish)
b. Give other finishes standard floor topping surfaces as indicated.
B. Heavy-Duty Floor Topping
1. Provide topping where indicated.
2. Heavy-duty Topping Mixture
3. Provide mixture that consists of 1 part Portland cement and 2-1/2 parts emery
aggregate or 1 part fine aggregate and 1-1/2 parts trap rock coarse aggregate,
by volume.
4. Exact proportions of mixture must conform to recommendations of aggregate
manufacturer.

5. Mixing water must not exceed 15 liter per 50 kilogram sack of cement
including unabsorbed moisture in aggregate. Maximum slump must be 25
mm
C. Base Slab
1. Screed surface of slab to a level neither more than 38 mm nor less than 25
mm below grade of finished floor.
2. Give slab a scratch finish as specified.
3. Preparations prior to placing:
a. Remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, asphalt, paint and other
contaminants from base slab surface.
b. Prior to placing topping mixture, dampen slab surface and leave free
of standing water.
c. Immediately before topping mixture is placed, broom a coat of neat
cement grout onto surface of slab.
d. Allow cement grout to set or dry before topping mixture is placed.
4. Placing
a. Spread heavy-duty topping mixture evenly on previously prepared
base slab, and bring to correct level with a straightedge, and strike
off.
b. Provide topping that is consolidated, floated, and checked for
trueness of surface as specified for float finish, except that power-
driven floats is the impact type.
5. Finishing
a. Give trowel finish heavy-duty floor topping surfaces.
b. Provide trowel finish as specified, except that additional troweling
after first power troweling must be not less than three hand-troweling
operations.
3.14 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Curing to be executed in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5, unless otherwise
specified.
B. Begin curing immediately following form removal.
C. Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting, pile driving, movement
of equipment in the vicinity, disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement,
and any other activity resulting in ground vibrations.
D. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical
injury, tire marks, and oil stains.
E. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the expiration of the
specified curing period.
F. Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where appearance would be
objectionable, on any surface to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded to the
concrete, or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded.

G. If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period, provide another
curing procedure specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period.
H. Provide moist curing for those areas receiving liquid chemical sealer-hardener or
epoxy coating.
I. Allow curing compound/sealer installations to cure prior to the installation of
materials that adsorb VOCs.
1. Requirements for Type III, High-Early-Strength Portland Cement
a. The curing periods are required to be not less than one-fourth of
those specified for Portland cement, but in no case less than 72
hours.
2. Curing Periods
a. In accordance with ACI 301 Section 5, except 10 days for retaining
walls, pavement or chimneys.
b. Begin curing immediately after placement.
c. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot
temperatures, and mechanical injury; and maintain minimal moisture
loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for
hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete.
d. The materials and methods of curing are subject to approval by the
Engineer.
3. Curing Formed Surfaces
a. Accomplish curing of formed surfaces, including undersurfaces of
girders, beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist
curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are
removed.
b. If forms are removed before end of curing period, accomplish final
curing of formed surfaces by any of the curing methods specified
above, as applicable.
4. Curing Unformed Surfaces
a. Accomplish initial curing of unformed surfaces, such as monolithic
slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by membrane curing.
b. Unless otherwise specified, accomplish final curing of unformed
surfaces by any of curing methods specified, as applicable.
c. Accomplish final curing of concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor
hardener of finish flooring by moisture-retaining cover curing.
5. Temperature of Concrete During Curing
a. When temperatures of atmosphere is 5 °C and below, maintain
temperature of concrete at not less than 13 °C throughout concrete
curing period or 7 °C when the curing period is measured by
maturity.
b. When necessary, make arrangements before start of concrete placing
for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to maintain

specified temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during
curing period.
c. When the temperature of atmosphere is 27 °C and above or during
other climatic conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete,
make arrangements before start of concrete placing for installation of
wind breaks, of shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or
moisture-retaining covering of light color as required to protect
concrete during curing period.
d. Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed
3 degrees C in any 1 hour or 27 °C in any 24-hour period.
6. Protection from Mechanical Injury
a. During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical
disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive
vibration and from damage caused by rain or running water.
7. Protection after curing
a. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction
operations.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor’s reports
Frequency Of
No. Title Report Submitted
Report
 31 days prior to delivery of  One time
1 Sources of materials concrete
 On apparent change  As required
 31 days prior to delivery of
Supplier quality  One time
2 concrete
inspection plan

concrete
Mix design for all
3
classes of concrete  When mix is re-designed  As required
Name, location,  31 days prior to delivery of  One time

equipment & personnel concrete
4 of test laboratory to be  If changed  As required
used by supplier
(including own lab.)
Program, methods and  One time
5 details of batching plant concrete
and equipment

Proposed methods of  31 days prior to delivery of
complying with hot  Each summer
6 concrete
weather mixing and
delivery
concrete  One time
7
Certificate for cement  For each new delivery from 
from manufacturer manufacturer  As required


Certificate for concrete
8 admixtures from  If changed  As required
manufacturer

Report on plant trial
concrete
mixes with 7 day & 28
9
day test of results for all  If changed  As required
classes of concrete
Report of the following

tests on fine and coarse
aggregate:
1. Los Angeles
abrasion at 100
& 500 revolution
2. Sieve analysis  31 days prior to delivery of  One time
3. Clay, silt, dust concrete
10 (passing 75  During production of concrete  As required
micron)
4. Clay lumps &
particles
5. Water
absorption
6. % of sulphates
(SO3) &
chlorides (NaCl)
Report of the following
tests on water for mixing  31 days prior to delivery of  One time
concrete, washing and/or concrete
11 cooling aggregate and  During production of concrete  As required
curing:
1. Sulphates (SO3)
2. Chlorides (NaCl)

12 Delivery ticket With delivery of each load of concrete  Each delivery
Reports and records on

tests of accuracy and
13 calibration for concrete As applicable  Monthly
plant equipment and
measuring devices
B. Sampling
1. In accordance with ASTM C172/C172M, collect samples of fresh concrete to
perform tests specified.
2. In accordance with ASTM C31/C31M collect samples of fresh concrete for
making test specimens.
C. Testing
1. Slump Tests
a. Take concrete samples In accordance with ASTM C143/C143M
during concrete placement/discharge.
b. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition
of an approved admixture provided that the water-cementitious
material ratio is not exceeded.
c. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test
cylinders are made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 16 cubic
meters (maximum) of concrete.
2. Temperature Tests
a. Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms.
b. Perform tests in hot or cold weather conditions (below 10 °C and
above 27 degrees C) for each batch (minimum) or every 16 cubic
meters (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is
obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.
3. Compressive Strength Tests
a. In accordance with ASTM C39/C39M, make six 150 mm by 300
mm test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM
C31/C31M, ASTM C172/C172M and applicable requirements of
ACI 305R and ACI 306R.
b. Take precautions to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the
specimen.
c. Test two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold two
cylinders in reserve.
d. Take samples for strength tests of each mix design of concrete
placed each day not less than once a day, nor less than once for each

75 cubic meters of concrete for the first 380 cubic meters, then every
380 cubic meters thereafter, nor less than once for each 500 square
meters of surface area for slabs or walls.
e. For the entire project, take no less than five sets of samples and
perform strength tests for each mix design of concrete placed. Each
strength test result must be the average of two cylinders from the
same concrete sample tested at 28 days.
f. Concrete compressive tests must meet the requirements of ACI 318
Section 5.6.
g. Retest locations represented by erratic core strengths.
h. Where retest does not meet concrete compressive strength
requirements submit a mitigation or remediation plan for review and
approval by the Engineer.
i. Repair core holes with non-shrink grout. Match color and finish of
adjacent concrete.
4. Air Content
a. Fulfill the requirements of ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM
C231/C231M for normal weight concrete and ASTM C173/C173M
for lightweight concrete.
b. Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as
specified for slump tests.
5. Unit Weight of Structural Concrete
a. Fulfill the requirements of ASTM C567/C567M and ASTM
C138/C138M.
b. Determine unit weight of lightweight and normal weight concrete.
Perform test for every 15 cubic meters maximum.
6. Ion Concentration
a. Fulfill the requirements of ACI 318.
b. Determine water soluble ion concentration in accordance with
ASTM C1218/C1218M. Perform test once for each mix design.
7. Strength of Concrete Structure
a. The strength of the concrete structure will be considered to be
deficient if any of the following conditions are identified:
 Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated
 Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified
 Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location
in such a manner as to reduce strength
 Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes
of temperature during curing, not conforming to
requirements specified

 Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances,
particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive
vibration
 Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength
b. Where the strength of the concrete structure is considered deficient
submit a mitigation or remediation plan for review and approval by
the Engineer.
8. Non-Conforming Materials
a. Factors that indicate that there are non-conforming materials include
(but not limited to) excessive compressive strength, inadequate
compressive strength, excessive slump, excessive voids and
honeycombing, concrete delivery records that indicate excessive
time between mixing and placement, or excessive water was added
to the mixture during delivery and placement.
b. Any of these indicators alone are sufficient reason for the Engineer
to request additional sampling and testing.
c. Investigations into non-conforming materials must be conducted at
the Contractor's expense. The Contractor must be responsible for the
investigation and must make written recommendations to adequately
mitigate or remediate the non-conforming material.
d. The Engineer may accept, accept with reduced payment, require
mitigation, or require removal and replacement of non-conforming
material at no additional cost to the Owner.
9. Testing Concrete Structure for Strength
a. When there is evidence that strength of concrete structure in place
does not meet specification requirements or there are non-
conforming materials, make cores drilled from hardened concrete for
compressive strength determination in accordance with ASTM
C42/C42M, and as follows:
 Take at least three representative cores from each member or
area of concrete-in-place that is considered potentially
deficient. Location of cores will be determined by the
Engineer.
 Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with
ASTM C42/C42M if concrete they represent is more than
superficially wet under service.
 Air dry cores, (16 to 27 °C with relative humidity less than
60 percent) for 7 days before test and test dry if concrete
they represent is dry under service conditions.
 Strength of cores from each member or area is considered
satisfactory if their average is equal to or greater than 85
percent of the 28-day design compressive strength of the
class of concrete.

 Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests
in a manner approved by the Engineer.
3.16 REPAIR, REHABILITATION AND REMOVAL
A. Before the Engineer accepts the structure the Contractor must inspect the structure
for cracks, damage and substandard concrete placements that may adversely affect
the service life of the structure.
B. A report documenting these defects must be prepared which includes
recommendations for repair, removal or remediation must be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before any corrective work is accomplished.
C. Crack Repair (for water tank designed in accordance with ACI 530)
1. Prior to final acceptance, all cracks in excess of 0.50 mm wide must be
documented and repaired.
2. The proposed method and materials to repair the cracks must be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
3. The proposal must address the amount of movement expected in the crack
due to temperature changes and loading.
D. Repair of Weak Surfaces
1. Weak surfaces are defined as mortar-rich, rain-damaged, uncured, or
containing exposed voids or deleterious materials.
2. Concrete surfaces with weak surfaces less than 6 mm thick must be diamond
ground to remove the weak surface.
3. Surfaces containing weak surfaces greater than 6 mm thick must be removed
and replaced or mitigated in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
E. Failure of Quality Assurance Test Results
1. Proposed mitigation efforts by the Contractor must be approved by the
Engineer prior to proceeding.
PART4 - METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
4.1 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. Walls with a bevelled cross section at the top will be measured to the highest edge.
B. Suspended floors and ceilings will be measured to the outside edge of the floor.
Inclined and arched ceilings will be measured as the development of the surface of
the slab.
C. When measuring by volume, members which cross each other are calculated once
only; main beams are always calculated straight through. In the case of crossing with
columns, and connection to columns the latter are not included.
D. Where work is measured by volume, no deductions will be made for voids less than
0.25 m3.
E. Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding
0.50 m2.
F. No deductions will be made from concrete for reinforcement or sections built in.
4.2 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

A. Works Measured by Volume
1. Cast-In-place concrete of the following categories will be measured by
volume geometrically (m3):
a. Foundations in trenches
b. Isolated foundation bases
c. Pile caps and ground beams
d. Beds over 300 mm thick
e. Suspended slabs which shall include floors, roofs, landings and the
like over 200 mm thick.
f. Up stand and kerbs
g. Walls over 200 mm thick
h. Columns
i. Beams (measured below the slab)
j. Steps and stair cases
2. Piles are measured by number or linear meter, rate includes concrete,
reinforcement, and demolishing head piles up to the required level
3. Columns height are measured from surface of reinforced foundation or slab
up to bottom of beam or slab.
4. Beams are measured C.L. To C.L. and its depth from bottom of beam to
bottom of slab.
5. Cantilevers are measured C.L. to end and its depth from bottom of beam to
bottom of slab
B. Works Measured by Area
1. Cast-in-place concrete of the following categories will be measured by area
(m2) stating the thickness.
2. Blinding beds, suspended slabs which shall include floors, roofs and the like
and landings not exceeding 200 mm thickness
3. Special surfaces finish.
C. Sundries
Sundries prices are included in the rates of concrete work and shall not be measured
or taken into consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the bill of quantities.
1. Expansion joint material or the like shall be measured by length (m) or area
(m2).
2. Designated joints, water stops or the like shall be measured by length (m).
PART5 - BASIS OF PAYMENT
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be in full compensation for the delivery, transport, placement and
finishing of cast-in-place concrete, including all labor, plant, equipment, tools, traffic
control, certifying and testing, quality assurance, and all other operations to perform
the work, including but not limited to the following ancillary works.

B. Material, which is unnecessarily wasted, disposed off site, or otherwise misused,
shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense.
C. No payment will be made for quantities resulting from oversized or unauthorized
work or any other unauthorized operation.
D. Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be
removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
5.2 ANCILLARY WORKS TO BE INCLUDED IN THE UNIT PRICE RATES
A. The unit prices rates for concrete include for working at different levels, hoisting and
covering, laying in bays, construction joints, cast in place and vibration, finishing
surface of concrete, unless otherwise noted, protecting and curing by any material
working concrete in and around reinforcement.
B. The unit prices rates for concrete include for all materials (fine and coarse
aggregates, cement, steel reinforcement, steel chairs, additives, water, formwork, all
kinds of shuttering and scaffolding …etc.).
C. The unit prices rates for concrete include for mechanical mixing or ready-mix
concrete.
D. The unit prices rates for concrete include for shuttering dismantling, and dismantling
agents.
E. Concrete accessories (including water stops and vapor barriers unless it is clearly
mentioned in the bill of quantities), embedded items, mortises, plugs, grouting for
general fixing of joinery and metal work shall be deemed to be included in the unit
price rates.
F. Costs of all tests shall be included in the unit price rates.
G. External Q. C. by Third Party.
H. Certifications.
END OF SECTION 03 3000


SECTION 03 4500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following located inside the building premises:
1. Precast concrete panels.
2. Supplementary devices, anchors, fasteners, and other components required
for installation of assemblies, including the devices that are to be cast-in the
structure.
3. Grouting at sill joints.
4. Caulking of Joints.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants
C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others:
1. Anchoring devices to receive mechanical and electrical work; as indicated on
contract documents.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 301-16 Specifications for Structural Concrete
2. ACI 318-11: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary
B. American society for testing and materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A36 / A36M - 14 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2. ASTM A123 / A123M - 15 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
3. ASTM A307 - 14 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60000 PSI Tensile Strength
4. ASTM A615 / A615M - 16 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
6. ASTM C150 / C150M - 16e1 Standard Specification for Portland cement
7. ASTM C578 - 15b Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 4500 Precast architectural concrete


8. ASTM C1077 - 16a Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and
Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing
Agency Evaluation
C. American welding society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2015, Structural Welding Code - Steel
2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2011 Structural Welding Code -Reinforcing Steel
D. Plant Certification Program (PCI)
1. PCI MNL-117-96 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Architectural Precast Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute.
2. PCI MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete;
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; Seventh Edition.
3. PCI MNL-122 Architectural Precast Concrete, 3rd Edition - 1910
4. PCI MNL-123 Connections Manual: Design And Typical Details Of
Connections For Precast And Prestressed Concrete - 1988
5. PCI MNL-135 - Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete
Construction; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2000.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design precast concrete units and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to
allow for fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live-load
deflection, shrinkage and creep of primary building structure, and other building
movements.
B. Design and fabricate panels to permit structural frame movement caused by air
temperature changes and applied loads.
C. Design and fabrication of all precast members shall be in accordance with ACI 318
"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" and the Uniform Building
Code.
D. Panels and anchorage systems designed, by a structural engineer licensed to practice,
in the zone where the project is located.
E. Air Permeability, Water Resistance: Precast concrete units shall have an air
permeability not to exceed 0.02L/s/m2 @ 75 Pa.
F. Water Vapor Permeance: Precast concrete units shall have permeance not to exceed
15 ng/(Pa.S.m2) (0.173 perms).
G. Thermal Properties: Thermal Conductivity 1.40 (W/mK) and Specific Heat Capacity
84 (J/kgK).
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Plant
Certification Program and shall be certified in category A1 or C1A.


B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Tests shall be performed by an independent testing

agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
Testing Agency shall be hired by the Contractor.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provision of following codes, specifications and
standards, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice”.
E. Mock-up:
1. After approval of finished samples, provide a mock-up panel per the
drawings if required. Panels viewed at the fabricators plant to exhibit the
quality, tolerances, corner conditions, and the exterior and interior finishes.
2. Production of panels shall not be processed until mock-up has been
approved.
1.6 SUBMITTALS AND DESIGN
A. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Submit complete structural design calculations sealed by a Registered
Professional Engineer licensed by the Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction
over the project. Calculations shall be submitted for all members and
connections, and shall include both vertical and lateral load analyses.
2. Elevation view, plan view, and location of each panel; include panel
identification numbers.
3. Dimensions and finishes.
4. Sections and details showing connections, cast-in items, and their relations to
the structure.
5. Descriptions of materials for loose and cast-in anchoring devices.
6. Field installed anchor locations.
7. Erection sequences and handling requirements.
8. Indicate sizes and locations of block-outs required for devices recess
mounted within the panels which will be installed by other trades.
9. Placement, including location of all type of joints
10. Shop drawings shall be stamped, and signed by the design professional
engineer.
B. Product Data: Submit product literature for precast units, insulation, accommodation
of movements and tolerances, thermal performance, acoustic performance, air
permeability, water resistance, fire rating, durability criteria, and all accessories.
C. Finish Samples:
1. Range Samples
a. During the bidding period and prior to commencement of
manufacture, submit range samples of the proposed finish
representative of the finished face showing typical range of color and
texture.


b. The minimum sample size is to be approximately 300 mm x 300 mm

and of appropriate thickness which is representative of the final
product.
c. Six range samples shall be agreed. They are then divided into two
sets of three, namely “Upper Limit”, “Benchmark”, “Lower Limit”.
Each set of three shall indicate the agreed range. One set of three
shall be set up in the Contractor's production plant and one set shall
be kept by the Architect. Both sets are to be marked (signed) by the
Architect and the Contractor and photographed, with copies of the
photographs to be retained by the Architect and/or the Client
Representative.
2. Samples during Fabrication
a. Make arrangements for 3 members of the design team to undertake
production visits during production to assess conformity with the
range samples prior to each shipment. The named individuals from
the design team responsible for assessing such samples shall be
identified by the Architect and/or the Client Representative
immediately upon request after the Contract is awarded.
b. Should production begin falling outside of the expected appearance
or performance properties, the Contractor shall make arrangements
for further inspections. Any remedial solutions to overcome the
problem have to be agreed by the Architect and/or the Client
Representative and they shall be at the Contractor’s own expenses.
D. Product Design Criteria:
1. Design Data:
a. Submit design calculations prepared, stamped and signed by
structural engineer.
b. Include calculations for panels and connections used as shear walls.
2. Mix Designs: Submit concrete mix designs.
3. Field Report:
a. Manufacturer’s structural engineer shall review the erections welds
and bolted connections to verify that they are in compliance with the
precast design drawings and calculations.
b. For record purposes, submit written report immediately following
installation of all assemblies affirming field observations and
recommended corrections.
c. Prepare a minimum of 2 test boards per work shift until production
uniformity acceptable to the quality control personnel has been
achieved. At such time frequency may be reduced to one board per
work shift.
d. Submit reports giving proportions, test results, inspection results, and
unit identification numbers and casting date for each work shift.
e. Rejection: Panels in place may be rejected for any one of the
following product defects or installation deficiencies:


 Non repairable damage incurred during construction

operations.
 Ragged or irregular edges.
 Visible form joints or irregular surfaces.
 Panels not conforming to tolerance requirements.
 Foreign material embedded in the face.
 Visible repairs.
 Cracks visible at a distance of 2m.
 Panels do not meet design strength requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.
F. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers, edit list
below to suit Project.
1. Cementatious materials.
2. Reinforcing materials and pre-stressing tendons.
3. Admixtures.
4. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.
5. Brick units and accessories.
6. Stone anchors.
G. Test Reports from a qualified testing agency:
1. Records of concrete cube breaks for concrete used in the precast concrete
products.
2. Mill tests of reinforcing steel used.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver assemblies to the job-site in such quantities and at such times to
ensure continuity of erection.
2. Deliver assemblies at a time in sequence such that the components can be
lifted from the truck and set in place.
B. Storage:
1. General; Protect panels against damage, distortion, and discoloration.
2. Store precast units off the ground.
3. Place stored units so that identification marks are discernable.
4. Store panels on edge such that the face is placed in vertical position.
5. Storage areas shall be stable and provided with foundations that will prevent
differential settlement, twisting or bowing of panels.
C. Handling: Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their design and
shape in order to avoid stresses which would cause cracking or damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland cement; ASTM C150, Type I or III.
B. Admixtures: Manufacturers and types as recommended by the fabricator.
C. Aggregates; ASTM C33; severe weathering. To the greatest extent possible, provide
aggregates which are local to the precast manufacturer and which are similar to the
aggregates in the Architect’s approved sample.
D. Water: Potable and free from amounts of foreign materials harmful to concrete and
embedded steel.
E. Connectors: Corrosion and Alkali resistant nonconductive connectors.
F. Grout: Portland cement, sand, and water sufficient for placement and hydration; or a
proprietary premixed non-shrink non-ferrous aggregate composition; minimum 250
kg/cm2 compressive strength.
G. Cast-in and Loose Anchoring Devices:
1. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 when
located within earthwork.
2. Bolts: ASTM A307 or A325; galvanized when located within earthwork.
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Concrete Mixes:
1. Concrete Face Mix as per finished sample. Consists of Portland cement, local
aggregates, air entrainment, and water reducing admixtures to produce 350
kg/cm2 compressive strength.
2. Interior Concrete Mix: Consists of grey Portland cement, local aggregates,
and water reducing admixtures to produce 350 kg/cm2 compressive strength.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Panels: Panel widths and shapes as shown.
B. Precast Trim: Steel reinforced; shapes as indicated.
C. Verify and submit field measurements prior to fabrication.
D. Cast-in anchorages and other embedded items.
E. Provide joint alignment plates for adjacent panels with height differing more than 60
cm.
F. Recess lifting hooks in panel edges.
G. Mark each panel edge with the appropriate identification number in the locations
shown on the shop drawings.
H. Provide quirk at exterior corners, refer to details. Finish returns surfaces to match
panel facing.
I. Coordinate requirements for block out locations and sizes in precast panels with other
trades, such as wall mounted pushbutton switches and overhead concealed closers at
storefront entrance systems, and other similar conditions.


J. Exterior Finishes:
1. Smooth form finish unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2. Typical Panel Backside Finish:
a. Bull float finish for areas not exposed to view.
b. Fine float (paintable) finish for areas exposed to view.
K. Fabricating Tolerances:
1. Comply with PCI manual MNL 117 for A1 products or MNL 116 for C1A
Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Installation performed by a qualified erector with minimum five years experience in
precast concrete construction.
B. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that
such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly
commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work.
C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning
work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective
installation caused by prior observable conditions.
D. Preparatory Work: Provide anchors, bolts, plates, and dowels to receive panels with
setting diagrams.
E. Furnish loose anchoring devices to fasten precast to the structure.
F. Lift, handle and erect panels per manufactures instruction. Install level, plumb,
square, and true to line within allowable erection tolerances and without cumulative
dimensional error.
G. Stabilize panels securely and permanently as indicated on approved shop drawings.
Provide temporary bracing as necessary. Remove temporary bracing upon
completion.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square,
and true, without exceeding the following noncumulative erection tolerances.
1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 13 mm.
2. Plan Location from Centerline of Steel: Plus or minus 13 mm.
3. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:
a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 6 mm.
b. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 6 mm.
4. Support Elevation from Nominal Support Elevation: As follows:
a. Maximum Low: 13 mm.
b. Maximum High: 6 mm.


5. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 30 m:

25 mm.
6. Maximum jog in alignment of matching edges: 6 mm.
7. Joint Width (governs over joint taper): ±6 mm.
8. Maximum Jog in alignment of matching faces: 6 mm.
9. Differential Bowing or Camber, as erected, between adjacent members of
same design: 6 mm.
3.2 GROUTING
A. Grouting of Sill Joints:
1. Saturate concrete contact surfaces prior to grouting. Remove excess water.
2. Compact grout thoroughly to eliminate air pockets. Do not vibrate.
3. Cure with moisture for at least 24 hours.
4. Do not re-temper grout once set.
5. Grout shall be continuous under panels.
B. Grout all pick holes solid. Exposed patches shall match the adjacent panel finish.
3.3 PATCHING
A. Concrete Patching will be acceptable providing structural adequacy and appearance
are not impaired.
B. General
1. The Contractor must inform the Architect of any damage occurred on site for
their consideration and approval.
2. Generally, cracked, damaged or defeated pre cast concrete units are not
acceptable and they have to be replaced at the Contractor’s own expenses.
3. In case of superficial damages due to the transportation, offloading or
installation, they may be adjusted with the consent of the Architect in terms
of aesthetic appearance. When deciding whether or not the damage is
superficial, consideration shall be given to its extent and location in relation
to supports, fixings and corners.
4. Repairs or patching will only be permitted provided the structural adequacy
of the component is not impaired.
5. Cosmetic repairs shall not be made to a more than the 5% of the units.
6. A comprehensive method statement for site repairing shall be submitted to
the Architect and/or the Client Representative for review and approval: this
document shall clarify the type of materials intended to use, the method of
installation and the compatibility with the pre cast concrete and the materials
in contact with (if any).
7. Repairs to the finished surfaces will be accepted provided the repairs are
made using the material specified above and provided such repairs match the
color and texture of the surrounding pre cast concrete finish.


8. Damage requiring repair or patching caused by other trades on or off site will
be reviewed by the Architect and/or the Client Representative and if the
result cause is by others it will be paid for by others after written
authorization to perform such works by the Architect and/or the Client
Representative has been received by the Manufacturer.
C. Samples for Repairs
1. Two pairs of samples (namely “damaged” and “repaired” pieces) shall also
be submitted together with the Method Statement issue. Once approved, one
pair shall be given to the Contractor as a quality reference during repairing
and the other pair shall be kept on site, all to the satisfaction of the Architect.
2. Both sets are to be marked (signed) by the Architect and the Contractor and
photographed, with copies of the photographs to be retained by the
Construction Manager. The agreed samples shall be used for production
quality control purposes.
D. Acceptance Criteria
1. 2 meters at eye level.
2. Light conditions: normal daylight (no direct sunlight). Viewings in boxes
with artificial lights or overcast sky are not permitted.
3. Viewing angle: perpendicular to cladding and up to 30° each side from 90°
view.
4. Time limit for assessment: none
5. Zone of viewing: whole area
6. Precast Concrete has to be presented clean and dry. Wetted at request.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation and sealant joint treatment, clean surface free of stains and other
similar markings by use of detergent and water applied with a stiff fiber brush and
followed with a clear water rinse.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Provide non-combustible shields during welding operations.
PART 4 - METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid will be measured in place or will be determined from the
shop drawings as directed by the Engineer.
A. Architectural finishes will be measured as allowance by area (m2).
B. Lintels, sills, duct covers or the like will be measured by length (m).
C. Beams, girders, columns, stanchions, tunnel rings or the like will be enumerated (no).
D. Pad stones, capping or the like will be enumerated (no).
PART 5 - BASIS OF PAYMENT


5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be in full compensation for the fabrication, delivery and installation of
precast concrete elements, including all labor, plant, equipment, tools, traffic control,
certifying and testing, quality assurance, and all other operations to perform the work,
including but not limited to the following ancillary works.
B. Material which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused shall be replaced at
Contractor’s expense.
D. Material or work which does not conform to specification requirements shall be
A. The unit prices for precast concrete work shall be deemed to include all formwork,
bedding, special sealing, temporary supports, connections between precast units and
cast-in-place structure, anchor bolts and other fixing devices, cast-in inserts not
related to erection, and any reinforcement or handling devices, moulds, hoisting,
grouting and fixing.
B. All accessories and materials necessary for the manufacturing, finishing, cleaning and
storage of precast concrete units shall be deemed to be included in the unit price
rates.
C. Auxiliary elements and tools required to finalize connection between precast concrete
units and their supporting frame and/or member and between adjacent precast
concrete units shall be included in the unit price rates, including, but not limited to,
clip angles, plates, bolts, plastic shims and neoprene pads used to affix or bear the
precast concrete units to one another or onto the building frame or foundations.
D. Cutting holes less than 25 cm diameter.
E. Costs of corrections to other work affected by or resulting from performing precast
concrete work shall be included in the unit price rates.
F. Contracting an independent laboratory/Agency to perform the external and source
quality control.
G. Costs of all samples and tests shall be included in the unit price rates.


SECTION 03 5400 - CAST UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Standard aggregate concrete floor screed underlayment for interior finish
flooring.
2. Lightweight aggregate concrete floor screed for interior application only.
3. Granolithic Floor screed and cove base.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest editions.
1. ASTM A1064 / A1064M - 16b Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire
and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
3. ASTM C109 / C109M - 16a Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength
of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens)
4. ASTM C150 / C150M - 16e1 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
5. ASTM C881 / C881M - 15 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base
Bonding Systems for Concrete
6. ASTM C1059 / C1059M - 13 Standard Specification for Latex Agents for
Bonding Fresh To Hardened Concrete
7. ASTM D1752 - 04a (2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge
8. ASTM D2240 - 15 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer
Hardness
9. ASTM E1155 - 14 Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness
and FL Floor Levelness Numbers
B. American Association Of State Highway And Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. AASHTO M 182-05 (2012) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made
from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Screed: a layer of cement-sand, or concrete mix, and other materials, with or without
reinforcement, laid on the structural floor or roof slab to achieve correct level and
receive another finish material.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 5400 Cast underlayment


1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this
Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved,
authorized, or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product. Include
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and
other information specified.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with
other components, and application.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient
temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting screed
performance.
B. Close areas to traffic during screed application and for appropriate time period after
application as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate cement-based screed with requirements of finish flooring products,
including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCREED MATERIALS
A. Site-Prepared Mix: Cement-sand mix with admixtures applied over structural deck to
receive another finishing material.
1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.
2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 20 MPa at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109M.
3. Slump: Maximum 125 mm.
4. Screed Additive: Plasticizers and water-retaining agents formulated for use
with screed when applied to substrate and conditions indicated, and to
approval.
5. Mix proportions: submit mix for approval to give a 28 day compressive
strength of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not
less than 1: 4 by volume.
6. Water-cement ratio: adjust ratio to achieve the required compressive strength
and slump.
7. Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if
directed. Submit mix proportions for approval.


B. Premix Mix: Factory prepared mix with fibrous reinforcement and admixtures
applied over structural deck to receive another finishing material.
1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.
2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 20 MPa at 28 days when tested
according to C 109M.
3. Water-cement ratio: Adjust ratio to achieve the required compressive
strength and slump and as per manufacturer’s printed instructions.
4. Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if
directed. Submit mix proportions for approval.
C. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33 and as follows:
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard,
free of deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 9.5 mm: 100 percent
b. 4.8 mm: 95-100 percent
c. 2.4 mm: 80-90 percent
d. 1.2 mm: 50-75 percent
e. 600 .m: 30-50 percent
f. 300 .m: 10-20 percent
g. 150 .m: 2-5 percent
2. Coarse aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of
deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 12.5 mm : 100 percent
b. 9.5 mm : 30-50 percent
c. 4.8 mm : 0-15 percent
d. 2.4 mm : 0-5 percent
D. Light Weight Aggregate Screed: Comprising ordinary Portland cement and pumice.
Not less than 80 mm thick, and having the following properties:
1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size : 0-8 mm
2. Bulk Density in dry : 700 kg/m3
3. Cement : 200 kg
4. Sand content : nil
5. Light Weight Aggregate: 1000 lt. or as directed by manufacturer to achieve
specified density, compressive strength and thermal conductivity.
6. Concrete Density : 900 kg/m3
7. Compressive Strength : > 5 MPa
8. Thermal Conductivity : 0.226 W/m °C


9. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Pumice
b. Granolithic Floor screed:
c. Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064 welded steel wire fabric.
d. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 21 °C.
2.2 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or Kenaf,
weighing approximately 305 g/m2 when dry.
B. Water: Potable.
2.3 DESIGN MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of lightweight concrete screed by
either laboratory trial batch or field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use a
qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs.
B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or
cementatious material permitted by ACI 301.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids epoxy resin with a
Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion
or styrene butadiene.
E. Admixtures: admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain no more than 0.1 %
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementatious material and compatible with
other admixture and cementatious materials. Do not admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
2.5 MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an
acrylic-bonding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint
consistency.
B. Screed Mix: Design mix, with or without admixture, to produce concrete floor
topping material with the following characteristics:
1. Compressive strength: at 28 days not less than 20 MPa.
2. Slump: maximum 125 mm.


3. Mix proportions: submit mix for approval to give a 28 day compressive

strength of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not
less than 1:4 by volume.
4. Maximum w/cm ratio: 0.51.
5. Mix screed materials, admixtures and water in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of
screed. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Verify that base slabs meet finish and surface profile requirements in Section 03 300
- Cast-In-Place Concrete
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound
concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface
profile with amplitude of 6 mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to topping manufacturer's
written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair
bond of topping.
3. Saw cut existing contraction and construction joints to a depth of 13 mm and
fill with epoxy joint filler.
B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
screed surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips 13 mm below screed surface where
joint sealants, specified in Section 07 920 - Joint Sealants are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than
one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
3.3 SCREED APPLICATION
A. Start screed application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
B. Fibrous Reinforcement: For reinforced screeds, apply fibrous reinforcing as per
manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Deferred Screed: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding
slurry into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.5 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place
screed while slurry is still tacky.
D. Place screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve
tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop
within pour strip.


1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane free of humps or hollows.
E. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as screed can support
equipment and operator. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and
consolidate screed by power-driven trowel so no blisters develop. Continue
troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is smooth and uniform in
texture.
a. Finish surfaces to specified overall values of flatness, FF 25; and
levelness, FL 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F FF 17; and
levelness, FL 15, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E
1155 / 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface.
b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between screed
surface and an unleveled freestanding 3 m long straightedge, resting
on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not
exceed 6.4 mm.
c. Recommended F-Numbers for various floor profile categories:
Floor Profile Random Traffic Floors Defined Traffic Floors
Category Specified Overall Value Minimum Local Value
FF FL FF FL F min
Conventional (using
19 13 13 10 19
bull float)
Conventional (using
25 17 13 10 25
highway straight
edge)
Good 38 25 19 13 38
Flat 50 33 25 17 50
Very Flat 75 50 38 25 75
Super flat 100 66 50 33 100
Ultra flat 150 100 75 50 150
F. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of screed, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed
is placed against hardened or partially hardened screed.
G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws
equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3 mm wide


joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before screed develops random contraction cracks.
1. Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness,
but not less than 13 mm deep.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
B. Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of the
following methods, according to screed manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven
days with water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously
wet. Cover screed surfaces and edges with 300 mm lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
3.5 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install epoxy joint filler, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, once screed has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim joint
filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.6 REPAIRS
A. Defective Screed: Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have
not bonded to concrete substrate.
A. Sample Sets: At point of placement, testing and inspecting agency shall take a set of
3 molded-cube samples from the screed mix for the first 90 m2 plus 1 set of samples
for each subsequent 460 m2 of screed, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples
for each day's placement. Samples shall be tested according to ASTM C 109M for
compliance with compressive strength requirements.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Protect screeds from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
Use protective methods and materials approved by Engineer, including temporary
covering.
B. Clean screeds not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended
to install final finishes.
4.1 GENERAL
A. Work is measured by area; no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding 1 m2.


A. Sundries
Sundries prices are included in the rates of concrete underlayment work and shall not
be measured or taken into consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the bill of
quantities.
1. Expansion joint material or the like shall be measured by length (m).
2. Designated joints or the like shall be measured by length (m).
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be in full compensation for the delivery, transport, placement and
finishing, including all labor, plant, equipment, tools, traffic control, certifying and
testing, quality assurance, and all other operations to perform the work, including but
not limited to the following ancillary works.
shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense.
A. The unit prices rates for concrete include for working at different levels, hoisting and
covering, laying in bays, construction joints, finishing surface, unless otherwise
noted, protecting and curing by any material.
B. The unit prices rates include for all materials.
C. The unit prices rates include for mechanical mixing.
D. Costs of all tests shall be included in the unit price rates.
E. External Q. C. by Third Party.
F. Certifications.

OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
DIVISION 04: MASONRY
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 04 Masonry


SECTION 04 2100 - CLAY MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Clay Masonry Units
B. Reinforcement and Anchorage
C. Expansion Joints
D. Mortar
E. Flashing
F. Weeps
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)
1. ASTM A1064 / A1064M - 17 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and
Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
2. ASTM A153 / A153M - 16a Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware
4. ASTM A775 / A775M - 07b (2014) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated
Steel Reinforcing Bars
5. ASTM A996 / A996M - 14a Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel
Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
6. ASTM A1008 / A1008M - 13 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-
Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
7. ASTM C67 - 14 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile
8. ASTM C144 - 11 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
9. ASTM C150 / C150M - 12 Standard Specification for Portland cement
10. ASTM C207 - 06(2011) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes
11. ASTM C216 - 14 Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units
Made from Clay or Shale)
12. ASTM C270 - 14 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
13. ASTM C652 - 14 Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry
Units Made From Clay or Shale)
14. ASTM D1056 - 14 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—
Sponge or Expanded Rubber
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 04 2100 Clay masonry unit

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of brick samples
showing range of color and texture to be expected.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples representing actual
color and texture of the brick specified.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be
supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single
installer with a minimum of five years demonstrated experience in installing products of
the same type and scope as specified.
C. Brick Tests: Sample and test shall be in accordance with ASTM C 67.
D. Test Reports:
1. Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory.
2. Test reports for each type of building and facing brick shall be submitted to the
Architect for review.
3. Test reports shall indicate:
a. Compressive strength.
b. 24 hour cold water absorption.
c. 5-hour boil absorption.
d. Saturation coefficient.
e. Initial rate of absorption.
f. Efflorescence.
E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up panel for each type of brick specified for evaluation of
color, texture and workmanship to be used.
1. Locate in areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not begin installation of brickwork until the Architect approves the mock-up
(s).
3. Build as many mock-ups as required to obtain the Architect's acceptance.
Remove unacceptable mock-ups from the site.
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store materials to prevent damage due to moisture, contamination, breakage, chipping or
other causes.


C. Store materials on pallets or stable aggregate bed to reduce contamination and soiling.
Cover with a non-staining waterproof membrane allowing for airflow around brick while
protecting it from airborne contaminants and wind-borne dirt.
1.6 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance includes furnishing face brick, and hollow brick units. Material allowance and
Installation is included in this Section and is part of Contract Sum/Price.
A. Cold Weather Procedures:
1. Preparation:
a. If ice or snow has formed on the masonry bed, remove it by carefully
applying heat not to exceed 49° C until the surface is dry to the touch.
b. Remove any brick units or mortar that is frozen or damaged. When the
clay masonry unit suction exceeds 15 grams per minute per 100 cm2,
sprinkle with heated water as follows:
 When units are 0° C or above, heat water to 21° C or above.
 When units are below 0° C, heat water to 54° C or above.
2. Work in Progress:
a. Air temperature 4° C to 0° C:
 Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures that
match air temperature.
b. Air temperature 0° C to -4° C:
 Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures
between 4° C and 49° C.
 Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.
 Installation in colder air temperatures will require heat sources
on the wall and the use of windbreaks or tents to create a
controlled environment suitable for proper bonding and curing.
3. Completed Work and Work Not in Progress:
a. Mean daily air temperature of 4° C to 0° C: Protect masonry from rain
and snow for 24 hours by covering with a weather-resistive membrane.
b. Mean daily air temperature of 0° C to -4° C: Cover masonry with a

weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours.
c. Mean daily air temperature of -4° C to -7° C: Cover masonry with
insulating blankets for 24 hours.
B. Hot Weather Procedures:
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 32° C and wind exceeds 12 km per hour:
a. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 21° C and 49° C.


b. Limit the spread of the mortar bed to 1.20 m and place units within 1
minute of spreading mortar.
c. Control moisture evaporation in partially or newly completed walls by
fog spraying with potable water, covering with opaque plastic or canvas
or both.
2. Protection of Work in Progress:
a. Covering:
 Cover tops of walls with a strong waterproof membrane at the
end of each day or work shutdown. Extend the waterproof
membrane cover a minimum of 60 cm down the side of each
wall.
 Hold cover securely in place.
b. Load Application:
 Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours
after completing columns and walls.
 Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after
completing columns and walls.
c. Staining:
 Prevent grout and mortar from staining the face of masonry.
 Remove grout and mortar that comes in contact with masonry
units immediately.
 Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings.
 Protect base of wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter.
 Turn scaffold boards on edge when work is not in progress to

lessen splattering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLAY MASONRY UNITS
A. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW,
B. Minimum Compressive Strength: 10.34 MPa.
C. Maximum Initial Rate of Absorption (IRA): 4 kg /m2 /min.
D. Provide brick similar in texture, color and physical properties to those available for
inspection at the Architect's office and/or as supplied on the approved sample panel.
E. Shapes: Special shapes are required to be used per architectural detail(s).

F. All brick supplied shall be pre-blended by the manufacturer.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Steel Reinforcement:
1. Billet Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 615.


2. Rail Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 996.

3. Axle Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 996.
4. Epoxy Coated Steel Bars: ASTM A 775.
B. Fabricated Steel Lintels: Requirements for loose steel lintels are specified in Section 05
5000 - Metal Fabrications.
1. Brick Anchors and Ties: Provide to sizes and types indicated on the Drawings.
2. Corrugated Ties: ASTM A 1008, 20 gauge, galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
3. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A1064, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A
153, Class B-2.
4. Wire Wall Ties, ASTM A 82:
a. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
5. Dovetail Anchors, ASTM A 1008:
a. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Expansion Joints
1. Pre-molded Foam: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1
2. Neoprene: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1.
3. Sealant: Shall be in accordance with Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection.
B. Mortar: Mortar should be mixed by proportion according to ASTM C 270 for Type N
mortar
1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
3. Sand: ASTM C144.
4. Water: Potable.
C. Flashing: Build in all flashings which enter the masonry as the work progresses.
D. Weeps: Weeps are to be used in conjunction with flashing materials for proper
functioning of the masonry wall drainage system. The specified weep material is:
1. Cotton sash cord, 30 cm long with end laid in air cavity.
2. Plastic tube, 6 mm minimum diameter.
3. Plastic vents or cells.
4. Aluminum vents or cells.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.


C. Verify that built in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry
work.
D. If backup substrate and other preparation work is the responsibility of another installer,
notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove mud, loose rust, ice and contaminants that may interfere with mortar-to-unit
bonding or mortar-to-footing/brick ledge bonding.
B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent support.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coursing:
1. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal
joints of uniform thickness.
3. Lay brick units in bond indicated on the Drawings.
B. Laying Clay Masonry Units:
1. Lay brick making sure head joints and bed joints are full of mortar.
2. Lay brick units plumb and true to line.
3. Where fresh mortar joins partially set mortar, remove loose brick and mortar and
lightly wet the exposed surface of set masonry.
4. Remove hardened mortar and replace it with fresh mortar.
5. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.
C. Masonry Reinforcing: Install as indicated.
D. Tooling and Pointing:
1. Tool mortar joints to shape(s) indicated on the Drawings.
2. Tool exposed joints when they are thumbprint hard.
3. Flush-cut all joints when they are not tooled.
4. When re-pointing a section in a wall, rake the mortar joints to a depth of not less
than 13 mm. Fill the joint completely with pointing mortar and tool to match the
surrounding masonry.
E. Flashing:
1. Build in all flashings that enter the masonry, as the work progresses.
2. Remove any projections on the brick surface or mortar bed that might puncture
the flashing material.
3. Place through-wall flashing on a bed of mortar so that the flashing projects 6 mm
from wall face and forms a drip edge. Overlap flashing a minimum of 6 inches.
4. Cover flashing with mortar.

F. Weeps:

1. Install weeps in the head joints of the first brick course immediately above the
through-wall flashing. Place weeps at not more than 24 inches on center
horizontally.
2. Keep the air cavity free of mortar as much as possible.
G. Control And Expansion Joints:
1. Install control and expansion joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Keep joints free of mortar and any debris that may hinder movement.
3. Install expansion joint material and finish the joint with a sealer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cut out defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and re-point with mortar.
B. Clean a sample wall area. Do not proceed with cleaning without Architect's approval.
C. Clean brick in accordance with the proprietary cleaning product manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged work before Substantial Completion.
4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid for will be measured in place or determined from drawings.
B. No deductions will be made for openings not exceeding 0.50 m2 of a wall area.
C. Thickness of walls is stated in descriptions. Thickness stated is the nominal thickness
A. Walls generally will be measured by area (m2), giving the type and thickness.
B. Walls are measured on the centre line of the material. No deduction is made for lintels,
sills, and the like.
C. Walls built against other constructions will be measured by area (m2) giving the type and
thickness of the wall and nature of the adjoining construction.
D. Cavity walls will be measured by area (m2) as a composite unit including forming the
cavity. Closing cavity walls at ends and around openings will be deemed to be included
in the rates.
E. Isolated piers will be measured by area (m2) giving the type and thickness.
F. Air bricks or the like and special bricks will be enumerated (no.).
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payments will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing all
materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, labor, samples
and mock-ups, coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing,
quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.



A. Ancillary work includes the following:
1. For all masonry work, rate includes solid jambs at openings and 1.5 m high solid
blocks in wet areas, galvanized steel anchors, wall ties, expanded metal secured
reinforcements stiffeners, movement joints, jointing and galvanized expanded
steel mesh every third coarse.
2. Building-in of girders, beams, and other structural members
3. Sills, lintels, copings, bearing bars, steps, timbers, steel sections and the like,
over-sealing courses, or the like
4. Expansion joints or the like
5. Mortar for bedding and jointing,
6. Type of bond and method of pointing,
7. Raking out joints or leaving rough joints to form key,
8. Extra materials for curved work,
9. Building overhand,
10. Bonding ends of walls to other work including providing ties or other fixings and
extra material in bonding,
11. Reveals, angles and intersections,
12. Rough and fair cutting,
13. Grooves, throats, mortises, chases, rebates, holes, stops, miters and the like,
14. Weather fillets, angle fillets and the like and pointing in flashings including
cutting grooves or chases,
15. Ends and angles,
16. Building in or cutting and pinning ends of lintels, sills, bearing bars, steps,
timbers, steel sections and the like,
17. Templates for forming openings and temporary support and protection to built-in
frames.

SECTION 04 2200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Ties and anchors.
4. Miscellaneous masonry accessories
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured
product specified.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results of masonry materials for compliance with requirements indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicating details of lintels, anchoring masonry to abutting concrete,
movement joints, joints between masonry and structure above, masonry intersections
and junctions and joint treatment.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and
accumulation of dirt and soil.
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Masonry Mortar Types
1. Mortar Mix Type N: A mortar mix type N is recommended on exterior
and above-grade walls that are exposed to severe weather and high heat.
Type N mortar mix has a medium compressive strength and it is composed of
1 part Portland cement, 1 part lime and 6 parts sand. A type N mortar is
described as a general purpose mortar mix, used in above grade, exterior and
interior load-bearing installations. It is also the preferred mortar mix for soft
stone masonry. This is the mortar most often used by home owners. Type N
mortar typically achieves 28 day strength in the range between 105 and 170
kg/cm2.
2. Mortar Mix Type O: Mortar mix type O is referred as that mix with a low
compressive strength, about 25 kg/cm2, used on interior or non-load –bearing
walls. Its exterior use should be limited due to its low structural capacity. In
the appendix for ASTM C 270, Type O mortar is listed as an alternative to
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 02 2200 Concrete unit masonry

Type N for areas exposed to freezing. Type O Mortar mix is ideal when re-
pointing due to its consistency and can be applied easily. It is used in above
grade, non-load bearing situations in both interior and exterior environments.
Type O mortar provides a psi in the range between 50 and 85, sometimes up
to 140 kg/cm2.
3. Mortar Mix Type S: Offering a high compressive strength, over 125 kg/cm2,
and with high tensile bond strength, mortar mix type S is the ideal product to
be used in masonry at or below grade. It performs extremely well to fight soil
pressure, wind or under seismic conditions. This mortar mix can be used for
below grade areas, for example masonry foundations, manholes, retaining
walls, sewers, and brick patios and brick pavements. Type S mortars are
required to have a minimum of 125 kg/cm2 and their mixes usually give you
strengths of from 160 to 210 kg/cm2.
4. Mortar Mix Type M: Type M mortar mix has the highest amount of Portland
cement and it is recommended primarily for walls bearing heavy loads. Type
M mortar mix is used primarily for heavy loads, masonry below grade,
foundations, retaining walls and driveways. Mortar mix type M will provide
with at least 175 kg/cm2 compressive strength. A type M mortar with its high
strength yet poor adhesion and sealing can be a bad choice for one area of the
job and just what is needed in another. Type M is preferred with stone
because the strength of the mortar simulated that of the stone being used.
1.4 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C55 - 14a Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick
2. ASTM C91 / C91M - 12 Standard Specification for Masonry Cement
3. ASTM C140 / C140M - 14 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing
Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units
4. ASTM C144 - 11 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
5. ASTM C207 - 06(2011) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for
Masonry Purposes
6. ASTM C270 - 14 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
7. ASTM C780 - 14 Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and
Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry
8. ASTM C1019 – 13 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
9. ASTM C952 - 12 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to
Masonry Units
10. ASTM C1142 - 95(2013) Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar
for Unit Masonry
11. ASTM E119 - 12a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 530/530.1-13: Building Code Requirements and Specification for
Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries

C. British Standards
1. BS EN 772-1:2011 Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of
compressive strength
2. BS 1243:1978 Specification for metal ties for cavity wall construction
3. BS 4721:1981 Specification for ready-mixed building mortars
4. BS 4887-2:1987 Mortar admixtures. Specification for set retarding
admixtures
5. BS 6398:1983 Specification for bitumen damp-proof courses for masonry
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry
when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold cover
securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for
at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide
artificial shade as required.
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 38 °C, do not spread mortar beds more
than 1200 mm ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of
spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C91 / C91M - 12.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 150 kg/cm2.
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Size (Width)
1. Width nominal dimensions are 250mm and 120mm.
2. Manufactured to dimensions 3mm less than nominal dimensions.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Masonry mortar: ASTM C270 - 14.
B. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C270 - 14, Type S.
D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144 - 11.
E. Water: Clean and potable.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, compounds, or other admixtures,
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Do not use lime in mortar or grout. Use any approved liquid-type plasticizer
that induces the same effect of lime when used in mortar mix.
B. Mortar used in masonry works shall be cement sand mortar with plasticizer.
Compressive strength of mortar after 28 days shall not be less than 3 Mpa. Submit
lab design mix for approval.
C. Mortar and grout shall be mechanically mixed in suitable movable drum mixers.
D. Mortar and grout shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Type: Fine, Maximum size of coarse aggregates shall be 8.00 mm
2. Binding Material: Ordinary Portland cement. Do not use lime. Minimum
cement content shall be 350 kg/m3 for walls 120 mm thick and 300 kg/m3 for
walls 250 mm thick or more.
3. Slump: 200-280 mm
4. Admixtures: Approved liquid types
E. Submit design mix for approval.
F. Concrete grout shall be used for filling hollow cells in bond beams, window and door
jams and other locations as specified shall be mechanically mixed in drum mixers in
volumetric proportions with only enough water shall be added to the mixture to
produce a mixture which is flowable, but which will not show an excess of water
when placed.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made
from steel sheet galvanized after fabrication not less than 2.5 mm thick. Ties made
from galvanized steel sheet may be used in interior walls, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Partition Top anchors: Use steel angles as detailed on drawings. Fabricate from steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
C. Wire Mesh Joint Reinforcement: Hot Dip Galvanized, dimensions: 13mm x 13mm
mesh of 1.5mm. Provide wire mesh in widths and lengths to suit every wall cross
section dimensions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, listing conditions detrimental to
performance.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build walls to
the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in
other Sections of the Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After
installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately
adjacent to the opening.
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction.
Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Install cut units with cut surfaces
and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at the time of laying.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 6
mm in 6 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and
reveals, do not vary from level by more than 6 mm in 6 m, nor 12 mm
maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 3 mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm. Do not
vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint
thicknesses by more than 3 mm.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints,
returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,
jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by
lapping not less than 60 mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at
corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 120-mm horizontal face dimensions
at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for
one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not

tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if
required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.
D. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 600 mm under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of storey to underside of solid
floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with pieces of
stone, tiles or hand material.
2. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above.
3. Fill joint at both faces with sealant after dead-load deflection of structure
above approaches final position. Sealant shall be elastomeric for non-fire
rated assemblies and fire rated for fire rated assemblies
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where
adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger
than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO CONCRETE COLUMNS AND WALLS
A. Anchor masonry to concrete where masonry abuts or faces concrete columns or
walls, comply with the following:
1. Anchor masonry to concrete with metal anchors embedded as indicated in
masonry joints and attached to concrete.
2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 420 mm o.c. vertically and 915
mm o.c. horizontally.
3.7 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Use wire mesh as joint reinforcement in concrete masonry unit walls or partitions.
1. Locate joint reinforcement in mortar joints at 800 mm maximum vertical
intervals.
2. Additional joint reinforcement is required in mortar joints at both 200 mm
and 400 above and below windows, doors, louvers and similar openings in
masonry, except where other type anchors are required for anchorage of
masonry to concrete structure.
A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing
indicated below.
1. Payment for these services will be made by the Contractor.

B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed
during construction for each 400 sq. m of wall area or portion thereof.
C. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780: 14.
D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019: 13.
3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match
adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes,
and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and
adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for
sealant application.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
3.10 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SCHEDULE
A. Use solid concrete blocks for building all bellow grade masonry and any masonry
construction that retains soil.
B. Use solid concrete blocks or hollow blocks filled with mortar for buildings walls and
partitions at perimeter and inside toilets and bathrooms.
4.1 GENERAL
B. No deductions will be made for openings not exceeding 0.50 m2 of a wall area.
C. Thickness of walls is stated in descriptions. Thickness stated is the nominal
thickness for bricks or blocks.
A. Walls generally will be measured by area (m2), giving the type and thickness.
B. Walls are measured on the centre line of the material. No deduction is made for
lintels, sills, and the like.
C. Walls built against other constructions will be measured by area (m2) giving the type
and thickness of the wall and nature of the adjoining construction.
D. Cavity walls will be measured by area (m2) as a composite unit including forming the
cavity. Closing cavity walls at ends and around openings will be deemed to be
included in the rates.
E. Isolated piers will be measured by area (m2) giving the type and thickness.
F. Air bricks or the like and special bricks will be enumerated (no.).
5.1 GENERAL
materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, labor,

samples and mock-ups, coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination,
testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
A. Ancillary work includes the following:
1. Building-in of girders, beams, and other structural members
2. Sills, lintels, copings, bearing bars, steps, timbers, steel sections and
the like, over-sealing courses, or the like
3. Expansion joints or the like
4. Mortar for bedding and jointing,
5. Type of bond and method of pointing,
6. Raking out joints or leaving rough joints to form key,
7. Extra materials for curved work,
8. Building overhand,
9. Bonding ends of walls to other work including providing ties or other
fixings and extra material in bonding,
10. Reveals, angles and intersections,
11. Rough and fair cutting,
12. Grooves, throats, mortises, chases, rebates, holes, stops, miters and the
like,
13. Weather fillets, angle fillets and the like and pointing in flashings
including cutting grooves or chases,
14. Ends and angles,
15. Building in or cutting and pinning ends of lintels, sills, bearing bars,
steps, timbers, steel sections and the like,
16. Templates for forming openings and temporary support and protection
to built-in frames.

SECTION 04 4200 - EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dimension stone panels set with individual anchors.
2. Dimension stone panels semi-mechanically anchored (field installed).
3. Dimension stone trim units, including bands, copings, sills, jambs and soffits.
1.3 REFERENCES
1. ASTM A27 / A27M - 13 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
for General Application
3. ASTM A47 / A47M - 99(2014) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable
Iron Castings
5. ASTM A240 / A240M - 15b Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
and for General Applications
6. ASTM A276 / A276M - 16 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars
and Shapes
7. ASTM A307 - 14 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60000 PSI Tensile Strength
8. ASTM A500 / A500M - 13 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
9. ASTM A513 / A513M - 15 Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-
Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing
10. ASTM A653 / A653M - 15e1 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
11. ASTM A666 - 15 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
12. ASTM A780 / A780M - 09(2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged
and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 04 4200 Exterior stone cladding

13. ASTM A992 / A992M - 11(2015) Standard Specification for Structural Steel
Shapes
14. ASTM A1008 / A1008M - 15 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-
Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-
Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hard enable
15. ASTM B221 - 14 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
16. ASTM C97 / C97M - 15 Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk
Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone
17. ASTM C114 - 15 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of
Hydraulic Cement
18. ASTM C119 - 14e1 Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone
19. ASTM C207 - 06(2011) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for
Masonry Purposes
20. ASTM C170 / C170M - 16 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength
of Dimension Stone
21. ASTM C503 / C503M - 15 Standard Specification for Marble Dimension
Stone
22. ASTM C568 / C568M - 15 Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension
Stone
23. ASTM C615 / C615M - 11 Standard Specification for Granite Dimension
Stone
24. ASTM C616 / C616M - 15 Standard Specification for Quartz-Based
Dimension Stone
25. ASTM C629 / C629M - 15 Standard Specification for Slate Dimension Stone
26. ASTM C880 / C880M - 15 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of
Dimension Stone
27. ASTM C979 / C979M - 16 Standard Specification for Pigments for
Integrally Colored Concrete
28. ASTM C1242 - 15a Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of
Dimension Stone Attachment Systems
29. ASTM C1354 / C1354M - 15 Standard Test Method for Strength of
Individual Stone Anchorages in Dimension Stone
30. ASTM C1526 – 08 (2014) Standard Specification for Serpentine Dimension
Stone
31. ASTM C1527 / C1527M - 11Standard Specification for Travertine
Dimension Stone
33. ASTM E488 / E488M - 15 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in
Concrete Elements

34. ASTM F436 - 11 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
35. ASTM F593 - 13a Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs
36. ASTM F594 - 09(2015) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
B. American Welding Society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010: Structural Welding Code
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M: Structural Welding Code – Aluminum
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 530/530.1-13: Building Code Requirements and Specification for
Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries
D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1. ASCE/SEI 7: Minimum Design Loads For Buildings and Other Structures
2. ASCE 8: Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel
Structural Members
E. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
1. AISC 360: Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
2. AISC 303: Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
F. Aluminum Design Manual (ADM)
1. AA ADM-1
G. Metal Framing Manufacturer Association
1. Test, and manufacture of ferrous and nonferrous metal framing
1.4 ALLOWANCES
A. Pre-construction and quality-control testing is part of testing and inspecting
allowance.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Stone Cladding Assembly: An exterior wall covering system consisting
of dimension stone panels and trim together with anchors, backup structure
secondary weather barrier (sheathing), mortar, adhesives, fasteners, and sealants used
to secure the stone to the building structure and to produce a weather-resistant
covering.
1. Backup structure includes steel trusses, steel strong back frames, steel stud
frames, metal-grid system and miscellaneous steel framing required to secure
stone to the building structure.
B. IBC: International Building Code.
1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for dimension stone
cladding assembly, including dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints both within dimension stone cladding
assembly and between dimension stone cladding assembly and other
construction.
2. Include details of mortar joints, sealant joints and mortar joints pointed with
sealant.
3. Show locations and details of anchors and backup structure.
4. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.
5. Include large-scale shaded elevations and details of decorative surfaces and
inscriptions.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.
D. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each variety, color, and finish of stone
required; not less than 300 mm square.
1. Sets shall consist of at least four Samples, exhibiting extremes of the full
range of color and other visual characteristics expected and will establish the
standard by which stone will be judged.
E. Colored Pointing Mortar Samples for Verification: For each color required. Make
Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.
F. Sealant Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required.
1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, professional engineer and testing
agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Material Test Reports:
1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a
qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical
properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM
standards. Base reports on testing done within previous three years.
2. For metal components, by a qualified testing agency, indicating chemical and
physical properties of metal.
3. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer
complying and indicating that those sealants will not stain or damage stone.
Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
D. Preconstruction test reports.
E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and
equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Dimension Stone Units: Furnish 3 (three) finished stone panels 600 x 600
mm for each finish and variety of stone specified.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
dimension stone cladding assemblies similar to that required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing dimension
stone cladding assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code – Steel, AWS D1.2/D1.2M,
"Structural Welding Code – Aluminum and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code -
Sheet Steel.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of typical exterior wall area as shown on Drawings and not
less than 1800 mm long by 1200 mm high.
a. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and
methods of installation.
b. Include window opening with stone returns and trim.
c. Include sealant-filled joint.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.11 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Stone Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing.
1. Testing and retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
2. Furnish test specimens representative of materials to be used that are
representative of materials proposed for incorporation into the Work.
3. Physical Property Tests: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project,
tested for compliance with physical property requirements, other than
abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards.

4. Flexural Strength Tests: For each combination of stone variety, thickness,
orientation of cut, and finish, proposed for use on Project, tested according to
ASTM C 880/C 880M, in both wet and dry conditions.
5. Anchorage Tests: For each combination of stone variety, orientation of cut,
finish, and anchor type proposed for use on Project, tested according to
ASTM C 1354/C 1354M.
B. Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant
manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant
manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants"
Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
C. Preconstruction Field Testing of Sealants: Before installing joint sealants, field test
their adhesion to joint substrates.
A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and
other causes.
1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might
cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood
supports.
2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with non-staining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone.
Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with
designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient
markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed.
C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with
manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
D. Store cementatious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location. Do not use cementatious materials that have become damp.
E. Store aggregates in locations where grading and other required characteristics can be
maintained and where contamination can be avoided.
1.13 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protect dimension stone cladding during erection by doing the following:
1. Cover tops of dimension stone cladding installation with non-staining,
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed
structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 600
mm down both sides and hold securely in place.
2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources.
Immediately remove such materials without damaging stone.
3. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
4. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and sealant droppings.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or
coated with ice or frost. Remove and replace dimension stone cladding damaged by
frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction and protection
requirements for masonry contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction and protection
requirements for masonry contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
D. Environmental Limitations for Sealants: Do not install sealants when ambient and
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below
5 °C or when joint substrates are wet.
1.14 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry,
flashing reglets, and similar items to be used by dimension stone cladding Installer
for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of dimension stone cladding assembly.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and
deliver to Project site in time for installation.
B. Time delivery and installation of dimension stone cladding to avoid extended on-site
storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to dimension stone cladding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from
single quarry, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same
variety from same source for each.
2. Make quarried blocks available for examination by Architect.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform
quality for each cementatious component from single manufacturer and each
aggregate from single source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory, sealant
and other material from single manufacturer for each product.
A. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
Stone anchors shall withstand not less than two times the weight of the stone
cladding in both compression and tension.
B. Structural Performance: Dimension stone cladding assembly shall withstand the
effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated.
2. Equipment Loads: Allow for loads due to window cleaning and maintenance
equipment.

C. Model building codes and ASCE/SEI 7 establish criteria for buildings subject to
earthquake motions. The contractor to verify requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Seismic Performance: Dimension stone cladding assembly shall withstand the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 67 °C, ambient; 100 °C, material surfaces.
F. Horizontal Building Movement: Allow for maximum horizontal building movement
equal to quotient resulting from dividing floor-to-floor height at any floor by 400.
G. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding assembly to withstand
loads indicated without exceeding stone's allowable working stress determined by
dividing stone's average ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following
safety factors:
1. Safety Factor for Olitic Limestone and Sandstone: 8
2. Safety Factor for Dolomite Limestone: 6
3. Safety Factor for Marble: 5
4. Safety Factor for Concentrated Stresses: 4 for granite and 10 for stone
varieties other than granite.
H. Design stone anchors and backup structure to withstand loads indicated without
exceeding allowable working stresses established by the following:
1. For Structural Steel: AISC 360.
2. For Cold-Formed Steel: AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
3. For Cold-Formed Stainless Steel: ASCE 8, "Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members."
4. For Aluminum: AA ADM-1, "The Aluminum Design Manual."
5. For Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of
tested capacity when installed in concrete with compressive strength
indicated.
6. For Post-installed Fasteners in Masonry: One-sixth of tested capacity when
installed in masonry units indicated.
I. Limit deflection in each prefabricated assembly caused by indicated loads and
thermal movements, acting singly or in combination with one another, to not more
than 1/720 of assembly's clear span or the following, whichever is smaller:
1. 1.5 mm, measured in plane of wall.
2. 6 mm, measured perpendicular to wall.
J. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and
erection tolerances of building's structural system. Concrete fabrication and erection
tolerances are specified in Section 03 3000, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Structural-steel

fabrication and erection tolerances are specified in Section 05 1200, Structural Steel
Framing.
K. Provision for Deflection of Building Structure:
1. Deflection Due to Weight of Dimension Stone Cladding Assembly: Allow
for 6 mm vertical deflection in 6 m span of structural members supporting
dimension stone cladding assembly.
2. Live Load Deflection: Allow for 6 mm vertical deflection, in 6 m span of
structural members supporting dimension stone cladding assembly, due to
live loads imposed on building's structural frame after stone installation.
L. Corrosion and Staining Control: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as
well as staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with
incompatible materials. Materials shall not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint
materials.
2.3 LIMESTONE
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568.
B. Classification:
1. For very porous Olitic Limestone and Sandstone that should only be used on
building exteriors in mild climates: I Low-Density
2. For Olitic Limestone and Sandstone Medium-Density
3. For Dolomite limestone II Medium-Density and III High-Density:
a. Absorption, 5 percent by weight maximum
b. Density, 2400 kg/cu. m minimum
c. Compressive strength, 55 MPa minimum
d. Modulus of rupture 5.5 MPa minimum.
C. Description: Olitic Limestone and Sandstone, or Shell limestone.
D. Cut: Vein or Fleuri.
1. Orientation of Veining (for vein cut): Horizontal or Vertical or as indicated.
E. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings
occur.
F. Finish: Smooth finish, Sand rubbed, Machine tooled, four bats per 25 mm, Machine
tooled, six bats per 25 mm, Machine tooled, eight bats per 25 mm, or match
Architect's sample.
G. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
H. Thickness: Not less than 32 mm unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MARBLE
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503, Classification I Calcite or
Classification II Dolomite.
B. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained, white or as per drawings, stone with
slight veining.

C. Cut: Vein or Fleuri.
Orientation of Veining (for vein cut): Horizontal or Vertical or as indicated.
D. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings
occur.
E. Finish: Polished, Honed or match Architect's sample.
F. Thickness: Not less than 30 mm unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 OTHER STONE
A. Material Standards:
1. Maximum Absorption per ASTM C 97/C 97M:
2. Minimum Compressive Strength per ASTM C 170/C 170M
3. Minimum Flexural Strength per ASTM C 880/C 880M
B. Finish: Match approved Architect's sample.
C. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
D. Thickness: As indicated.
2.6 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M
or ASTM A 666, Type 316; temper as required to support loads imposed without
exceeding allowable design stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from
stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 316.
B. Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from extruded aluminum (after verifying
that aluminum is not corroded by contact with stone selected), ASTM B 221M, alloy
and temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design
stresses, but not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T6
C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Inserts: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to 4 times the loads imposed as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
D. Post-installed Anchor Bolts for Concrete and Masonry: Chemical anchors or torque-
controlled expansion anchors or undercut anchors made from stainless-steel
components complying with ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group A1 or
A4 for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666,
Type 304 or 316, for anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
E. Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and
hardened washers.
1. For stainless steel and aluminum, use annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and
washers; for bolts, ASTM F 738M; and for nuts, ASTM F 836M, Alloy

Group 1 (A1) (with aluminum and Type 304 stainless steel) and Group 2
(A4) (with Type 316 stainless steel).
2. For galvanized-steel shelf angles and backup structure, use carbon-steel
bolts, nuts, and washers; for bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; for nuts,
ASTM A 563M, Grade A; and for washers, ASTM F 436M; all hot-dip or
mechanically zinc coated.
2.7 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction, natural color or white as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain no
more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207.
C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Pigments
shall have a record of satisfactory performance in mortar.
D. Portland cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement and hydrated lime.
E. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement, hydrated
lime, and mortar pigments. Mix shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent
of Portland cement by weight.
F. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 6 mm and pointing mortar
, 100 percent shall pass 1.18 mm sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or
other durable stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
G. Water: Potable.
2.8 STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore
Durometer hardness of 50 to 70, non-staining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent
point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into
required depths of pointing materials.
B. Setting Buttons: Resilient plastic buttons, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint
thicknesses and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of
pointing materials.
C. Concealed Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricated from zinc-tin, alloy-coated stainless
steel in thicknesses indicated, but not less than 0.4 mm thick.
D. Cementatious Damp proofing for Limestone: Cementatious formulation
recommended by ILI and non-staining to stone; compatible with joint sealants and
noncorrosive to anchors and attachments.
E. Weep and Vent Tubes: Medium-density polyethylene tubing, 6-mm OD (outer
diameter) or rectangular, cellular, polypropylene or clear butyrate extrusion, 9 by 38
mm, of length required to extend from exterior face of stone to cavity behind.
F. Cellular Plastic Weep Hole/Vents: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-
resistant polypropylene copolymer, of length required to extend from exterior face of
stone to cavity behind, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
G. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, of length
required to extend from exterior face of stone to cavity behind, in color selected from
manufacturer's standard.
H. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber,
6 to 10 mm in diameter, of length required to produce 50 mm exposure on exterior
and 450 mm in cavity between Wythes.
I. Sealants for Joints in Dimension Stone Cladding: Manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated
below that do not stain stone:
1. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, acid curing or Multi-
component, non-sag, neutral curing.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, Class 100/50 or Multi-
component, non-sag, Class 50.
3. Polysulfide Joint Sealant: Single component or Multi-component, non-sag.
4. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed silicone,
5. Joint-Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range of colors.
J. Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Same sealant used for joints in dimension stone.
1. Single-component, non-sag, neutral-curing, medium- to high-modulus
silicone sealant; Class 25, Use NT (non-traffic), and Use M (masonry).
2. Single-component, non-sag, urethane sealant; Use T (traffic), and Use M
(masonry).
K. Damp proofing for surfaces to receive dimension stone cladding
1. Two coats of cold fluid- applied damp proofing for surfaces to receive
dimension stone cladding, as per SECTION 07 1416.
2.9 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with
requirements indicated. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's
(National Building Granite Quarries Association) "Specifications for Architectural
Granite."
B. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearance of 25 mm
between backs of stone units and surfaces or projections of structural members,
fireproofing (if any), backup walls, and other work behind stone.
C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise
indicated. Shape beds to fit supports.
D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting
devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place.
E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone, except sawed reveals, to comply with
requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups.

F. Cut stone to produce uniform joints 10 mm wide (or as directed by Engineer) and in
locations indicated.
G. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as
required to accommodate contiguous work.
H. Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce stone shapes with a
uniform profile throughout entire unit length, with precisely formed arris slightly
eased to prevent snipping, and with matching profile at joints between units.
1. For polished or honed granite and marble moldings produce moldings and
molded edges with machines that use abrasive shaping wheels made to
reverse contour of molding shape.
I. Depending on nature and extent of carving involved, developing an allowance for
this work and specifying providers may be necessary.
J. Carve and cut (depending on nature and extent of carving involved) inscriptions and
decorative surfaces. Use skilled stone carvers experienced in the successful
performance of work similar to that indicated.
K. Abrasively etch inscriptions and decorative surfaces.
L. To reproduce photographic images on polished stone, Laser etch inscriptions and
decorative surfaces.
M. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust.
N. Inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in
place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units
match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in
approved samples and mockups.
2.10 FABRICATION OF BACKUP STRUCTURE
A. Fabrication of Steel Trusses and Strong back Frames and Miscellaneous Steel
Framing: Fabricate in shop to comply with AISC 303.
1. Weld shop connections to comply with applicable provisions of
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2. Fabricate joints to exclude water or to permit its escape to building exterior,
at locations where water could accumulate because of condensation or other
causes.
3. Hot-dip galvanized backup structure after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Fabrication of Steel Stud Frames:
1. Weld secondary weather barrier (sheathing) to outside face of steel stud
frames. Use continuous welds at all four edges of sheets to provide
continuous weather seal.
2. Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.11 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written
instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and
with optimum performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and
aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise indicated. Discard
mortar when it has reached initial set.
B. Mortar types
1. Mortar Mix Type N: A mortar mix type N is usually recommended on
exterior and above-grade walls that are exposed to severe weather and high
heat. Type N mortar mix has a medium compressive strength and it is
composed of 1 part Portland cement, 1 part lime and 6 parts sand. A type N
mortar is described as a general purpose mortar mix, used in above grade,
exterior and interior load-bearing installations. It is also the preferred mortar
mix for soft stone masonry. This is the mortar most often used by home
owners. Type N mortar typically achieves 28 day strength in the range
between 105 and 170 kg/cm2.
2. Mortar Mix Type O: Mortar mix type O is referred as that mix with a low
compressive strength, about 350 psi, used on interior or non-load –bearing
walls. Its exterior use should be limited due to its low structural capacity. In
the appendix for ASTM C 270, Type O mortar is listed as an alternative to
Type N for areas exposed to freezing. Type O Mortar mix is ideal when re-
pointing due to its consistency and can be applied easily . It is used in above
grade, non-load bearing situations in both interior and exterior environments.
Type O mortar provides a psi in the range between 50 and 85, sometimes up
to 140 kg/cm2.
3. Mortar Mix Type S: Offering a high compressive strength, over 1800 psi,
and with high tensile bond strength, mortar mix type S is the ideal product to
be used in masonry at or below grade. It performs extremely well to fight soil
pressure, wind or under seismic conditions. This mortar mix can be used for
below grade areas, for example masonry foundations, manholes, retaining
walls, sewers, and brick patios and brick pavements. Type S mortars are
required to have a minimum of 125 kg/cm2 and their mixes usually give you
strengths of from 160 to 210 kg/cm2.
4. Mortar Mix Type M: Type M mortar mix has the highest amount of Portland
cement and it is recommended primarily for walls bearing heavy loads. Type
M mortar mix is used primarily for heavy loads, masonry below grade,
foundations, retaining walls and driveways. Mortar mix type M will provide
with at least 175 kg/cm2 compressive strength. A type M mortar with its high
strength yet poor adhesion and sealing can be a bad choice for one area of the
job and just what is needed in another. Type M is preferred with stone
because the strength of the mortar simulated that of the stone being used.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: (Verify that mortar has lower compressive
strength than stone) Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types
of mortar indicated below:
1. Set granite with Type S mortar.
2. Set limestone with Type N mortar.
3. Set marble with Type S mortar.
4. Set quartz-based stone with Type N mortar.
5. Set serpentine with Type S mortar.
6. Set slate with Type S mortar.
7. Set travertine with Type N mortar.
8. Backparge travertine with Type O mortar.
D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of
mortar indicated or as directed by Engineer. Provide pointing mortar mixed to match
Architect's sample and complying with the following:
1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement
ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix Mortar: Use Portland cement-lime
mix of selected color.
3. Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining
colored aggregates with Portland cement of selected color.
4. Point granite with Type S mortar.
5. Point limestone with Type N mortar.
6. Point marble with Type N mortar.
7. Point quartz-based stone with Type N mortar.
8. Point serpentine with Type N mortar.
9. Point slate with Type N mortar.
10. Point travertine with Type N mortar.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform source quality-control
testing.
1. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done
at Contractor's expense.
2. Furnish test specimens randomly selected from same blocks as actual
materials proposed for incorporation into the Work.
3. Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880/C 880M, performed on specimens of
same thickness, orientation of cut, and finish as installed stone. One set of
test specimens is required to be tested for every 500 sq. m, but not fewer than
two sets for each stone variety.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive dimension stone cladding and conditions under which
dimension stone cladding will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
dimension stone cladding.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of dimension stone cladding.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING, GENERAL
A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains,
and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and
then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no
caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
B. Coat limestone with damp proofing to extent indicated below:
1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 300 mm above
finish-grade elevations.
2. Stone extending below grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces
below grade.
3. Allow damp proofing to cure before setting damp proofed stone. Do not
damage or remove damp proofing while handling and setting stone.
C. Parge back of travertine panels with mortar not less than 10 mm thick.
D. Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ
skilled stone fitters at Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight
and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
E. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to
accommodate contiguous work.
F. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners,
and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension stone cladding in
place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in
locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated, and with edges and faces
aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
G. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations
indicated.
H. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
I. Install concealed flashing at continuous shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and similar
obstructions to downward flow of water, to divert water to building exterior. Extend
flashing 150 mm at ends and turn up not less than 50 mm to form end dams.
J. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of stone units and
backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.

1. Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base
of cavity walls and above shelf angles and flashing. Locate weep holes at
intervals not exceeding 600 m. Use weeps and vents tubes or plastic weep
hole/vents or wicking material.
2. Place vents in cavity walls at tops of cavities, below shelf angles and
flashing, and at intervals not exceeding 6 m vertically. Locate vents in joints
at intervals not exceeding 1500 mm horizontally. Use weeps and vents tubes
or plastic weep hole/vent.
3.3 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING WITH MORTAR
A. Set dimension stone cladding with mortar and mechanical anchors where indicated.
B. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use setting buttons of adequate size, in sufficient quantity, and of thickness
required to maintain uniform joint width and to prevent mortar from
extruding. Hold buttons back from face of stone a distance at least equal to
width of joint, but not less than depth of pointing materials.
2. Do not set heavy units or projecting courses until mortar in courses below
has hardened enough to resist being squeezed out of joint.
3. Support and brace projecting stones until wall above is in place and mortar
has set.
4. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to
prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of
anchor holes and kerfs with mortar.
C. Embed ends of sills in mortar; leave remainder of joint open until final pointing.
D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 12 mm. Rake
joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
E. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar
particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding
areas, apply first layer of pointing mortar in layers not more than 10 mm until a
uniform depth is formed.
F. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers not more than 10 mm.
Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before
applying next layer.
G. Tool joints with a round jointer having a diameter 3 mm larger than width of joint,
when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard.
H. Rake out mortar from sealant-pointed joints to depths required for sealant and sealant
backing but not less than 12 mm. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms
and clean sides.
I. Set the following dimension stone cladding with unfilled head joints for installing
joint sealants:
1. Cornices.
2. Copings.
3. Sills.

4. Belt and other projecting courses.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 6 mm
in 3 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more. For external corners, corners and jambs within
6 m of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3
mm in 3 m, or 10 mm in 12 m or more.
B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, water tables, parapets, horizontal bands,
horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, or 10
mm maximum.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions
of walls and partitions, do not exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions
indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 6 mm.
E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or
minus 3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within
1500 mm of each other, do not vary more than 3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint
width, whichever is less from one to the other.
F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5 mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective
joints, and dimension stone cladding that does not match approved samples and
mockups. Damaged stone may be repaired if Architect approves methods and
results.
B. Replace damaged or defective work in a manner that results in dimension stone
cladding's matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other
requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding as work progresses. Remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Remove excess sealant and smears as
sealant is installed.
D. Final Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after
completion of pointing and sealing, using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes.
Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning agents containing
caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage
stone.
4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid will be measured in place or will be determined from
drawings and shop drawings.
B. Work will be measured on the exposed surface.
C. Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for voids not
exceeding 0.1 m2.
D. Exterior and interior stone facing will be measured separately.
E. Stone facing with vented cavity will be measured separately.
F. Soffits, columns, pillars and the like will be measured separately.
A. Surfaces will be measured by m2 for each specified type, grade and surface
characteristic of natural stone.
B. Soffits, columns, pillars and the like will be measured by m2 for each specified type,
grade, and surface characteristic of natural stone.
C. Structural expansion joints may be measured by linear meter (m).
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material,
equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labor, mixing,
samples, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the site and
B. Material which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused shall be replaced at
C. No payment will be made for unauthorized operations.
D. No payment will be made for Ancillary Works.
E. Material or work which does not conform to specification requirements shall be
removed and replaced on Contractor’s expense.
A. The following ancillary works shall be included in the unit price rates:
1. Facing around openings, connections to adjacent components, laid to pattern,
sloped vertical surfaces, cuttings to holes for pipes, sockets, switches, outlets
and the like, fixing templates, preparation of backgrounds including priming,
protecting and cleaning.
2. Damp proofing for surfaces to receive stone cladding.
3. All anchorage items.
4. Grouting where indicated.
5. All movement joints including cleaning, priming, joint back-ups and sealing.
6. Any width, height, girth, size or shape of slab or feature
7. Bedding and fixing including bedding mortars, adhesives and fixing
materials
8. All cutting and internal and external angles, intersections and joints
9. Layout and treatment of joints including grouting
10. Structural expansion joints, unless it is mentioned clearly in the bill of
quantities
11. Cleaning, sealing and polishing
12. Working over and around obstructions
13. Overhead

OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
DIVISION 05: METALS
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 05 Metals

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Iron Castings
4. ASTM A153 / A153M - 09 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-
Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
5. ASTM A283 / A283M - 13 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate
Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
6. ASTM A307 – 12 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
7. ASTM A563 - 07a (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts
8. ASTM A780 / A780M – 09 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and
Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
9. ASTM A786 / A786M - 05(2009) Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled
Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates
10. ASTM C1107 / C1107M - 14 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
11. ASTM D1187 / D1187M - 97(2011) e1 Standard Specification for Asphalt-
Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
12. ASTM F1554 - 07ae1 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55,
and 105-ksi Yield Strength
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1. B18.22M - 1981 Metric Plain Washers
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI 14.3-2000 Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
2. Cementations Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 05 5000 Metal fabrication

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,
as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed
Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use
materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
roughness.
2.2 PLATES
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M or St37.
B. Checker plate steel surface on steel substrate
1. Anti slip, non gritted, steel surface on steel substrate
2. Medium surface texture particularly applicable to heavier and more
viscous accumulations
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786 M rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D.
D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
2.3 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES
A. Fabricate cover plates of 6 mm thick rolled steel weighing not more than 45 kg per plate
with a raised pattern nonslip top surface conforming to ASTM A283/A283M having a
minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.50 when tested in accordance with ASTM
D2047.
B. Frames shall be structural steel shapes and plates, with bent steel bars or headed anchors
welded to frame for anchoring to concrete or securely fastened to the structure as
indicated.
C. Miter and weld all corners.
D. Allow for expansion on straight runs over 4500 mm.
E. Remove sharp edges and burrs from cover plates and exposed edges of frames. Weld all
connections and grind top surface smooth. Weld bar stops every six inches. Provide
3mm clearance at edges and between cover plates.
2.4 FASTENERS

A. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where
indicated, flat washers or compatible.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or compatible.
C. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22M.
2.5 PAINT
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except
containing no asbestos fibres, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM
D 1187.
2.6 GROUT
A. Non-shrink Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate
and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support
indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges.

I. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated,
Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
K. Comply with details indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings.
2.8 INSERTS, SLEEVES AND ANCHORS
A. Provide inserts, sleeves and anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or
applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural steel
framework as necessary to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates and bars of welded construction,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive hardware, hangers and similar items.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast in to concrete or built in to masonry,
equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick
by 200 mm long at 600 mm O.C. unless otherwise indicated.
2. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with requirements of Division 9, Section “Painting” for applying of finishes
indicated on drawings.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard
listed below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for shop priming: prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
requirements specified in Division 9, Section “Painting”.
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finished and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Field-Applied Finishes: Type of finish is to be as indicated on Drawings or specified.
Comply with requirements of Division 9, Section "Painting" for type of finish indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by
the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease,
dirt and other foreign matter.
B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded

fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws, and other connectors.
C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured
from established lines and levels.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that will come into contact
with grout, concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
A. Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines
and angles and true curves.
B. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Provide continuous
welding along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not
tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth.
C. Provide a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise
approved, flush exposed riveting. Mill joints where tight fits are required. Corner joints
shall be coped, well formed, and in true alignment. Accurately set work to established
lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
A. Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in
place.
B. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion
shields, and powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and
through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts,
and screws for wood.
C. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal.

D. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and
finish, to which fastenings are applied.
E. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 INSTALLING INSERTS, SLEEVES AND ANCHORS
A. Inserts, Sleeves and Anchors: Inserts, sleeves and anchors shall be fixed in place before
concreting as shown on Drawings or as required. Set sleeves in concrete with ends flush
with finish elevations or surfaces; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.
3.5 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings, if any.
A. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05 mm dry film thickness.
B. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
4.1 GENERAL
A. Built-in units, prefabricated or assembled on site will be enumerated.
B. Trench covers will be measured according to type and width by length (m).
C. Dimensions and details are stated in descriptions, where necessary, to identify the work.
Dimensions stated for wood are deemed to be finished sizes.
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment,
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples, co-
coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance,
cleaning and protecting.
A. The following ancillary works shall be included in the unit price rates and will not be
measured separately.
B. Taking measurements for installation from established lines and levels.
C. All supports and fixings for installation on site.
D. Staircases, Balustrades, Plates and the like

1. Covers, trims, ironmongery and the like, where supplied with the unit,
2. Soffit lining, spandrel panels and the like, where supplied with the unit,
3. Surface treatments and preservative and fire-retardant treatments applied as
part of the production process,
4. Finishes, where part of the unit as delivered,
5. Rebates, grooves, splays, chamfers, mouldings and the like on wood
including ends and angles
6. Fixings and fastenings including blockings, wedges, bolts, brackets, cleats
and the like,
7. Cutting and fitting around obstructions.

SECTION 05 5133 - METAL LADDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI-ASC 14.3-2008: Fixed LaddersFixed
2. ANSI A14.9 - 2010: Safety Requirements for Ceiling Mounted Disappearing
Climbing Systems.
B. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)
1. OSHA 1910.27: Fixed Ladders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
3. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide plan, section, elevation and perspective view drawings as
necessary to depict appropriate installation procedures including location, mounting,
attachment, and penetration flashing.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be
supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a
single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in
installing products of the same type and scope as specified.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
Protect all components off the ground, away from standing water on a hard, level
surface.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 05 5133 Metal ladders

1.6 WARRANTY
A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of
the manufacturer's five (5) year standard limited warranty against manufacturing
defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD ACCESS LADDERS
A. Ladder System Design: Provide modular access components sections to allow for site
specific configuration without the need for on-site welding.
B. Access ladder fixed in position shall:
1. Vertical
2. Be offset at each rest platform
3. Have side rails that extend 90 cm above the landing
4. Have rungs which are at least 15 cm from the wall
C. The minimum design live load imposed by persons should be two loads of
1.1 kN each concentrated between any two consecutive attachments. Each rung in the
ladder should be designed for a single concentrated live load of 1.1 kN minimum
D. All parts and surfaces of fixed ladder installations must be free of sharp edges, burrs,
or other details that may be hazardous to the person using the ladder.
E. If the distance from the top of a parapet to the roof-top exceeds one rung-space
(i.e, max. 300 mm) a means of climbing to and from the top of the parapet should be
provided
F. Rungs:
1. The top of the uppermost rung of a ladder should be level with the top of the
access/egress level or landing platform served by the ladder. Where there is a
parapet, the access/egress level would be the roof if the parapet is cut to
permit passage through the parapet. However, if the parapet is continuous,
the access/egress level would be the top of the parapet.
2. Rungs should have a non-slip surface.
G. Side Rails
1. The minimum size (cross-section) recommended for a steel ladder is
10 mm × 65 mm solid
H. Safety Cages
1. Cages should not be less than 680 mm wide and should extend not less than
680 mm and not more than 760 mm from the centre-line of the rung.
2. The inside of cages must be free of obstructions.
I. Attachments and Anchorages
1. Two means of anchoring the top of the ladder, accomplished by fastening the
side rail extension above the top of the access/egress level to the structure,
building.
2.

J. Finish:
1. Galvanized
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
F. Protect installed products until completion of project.
G. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Dimensions and details are stated in descriptions, where necessary, to identify the
work
5.1 GENERAL
equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples,
co-coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality
assurance, cleaning and protecting.

1. Taking measurements for installation from established lines and levels.
2. All supports and fixings for installation on site.
3. Frames, where supplied with the unit,

4. Fitting.
5. Surface treatments and preservative.
6. Finishes, where part of the unit as delivered
7. Fixing and fastening, bedding, jointing and pointing including providing
materials

SECTION 05 5200 - METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. American Welding Society (AWS):
2. ASTM A153 / A153M - 16 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-
A. General: Handrail and railing systems shall withstand structural loads indicated,
determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
B. Structural Load: Of 100 to 500 kg/m, according to location, without exceeding the
allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors,
and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the
respective components.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads:
a. Concentrated load of 100 kg applied at any point and in any
direction.
b. Uniform load of 75 kg/m applied horizontally and concurrently with
uniform load vertically downward.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following
loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 100 kg applied at any point and in any direction
b. Uniform load of 75 kg/m applied in any direction
c. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum
change in ambient temperature in fabricating, and installing handrails and railing
systems to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components and
connections, and other detrimental effect. Base calculation on actual surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night-time sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 60°C ambient, and 100°C material surfaces.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for manufacturer product lines of handrails and railing systems assembled
from standard components include product data for grout, anchoring cement, and paint
products.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 05 5200 Metal railings

B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings, including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
C. Samples: 1500 mm long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member,
including handrails, top rails, posts, balusters Fittings and brackets.
1. Manufacturer's color charts.
2. Each type of exposed finish required for final unit of Work.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified testing
agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated.
1. Test each type of handrail and system for compliance with requirements
specified, for performance and test methods.
2. Conduct tests using specimens and assemblies representative proposed
materials and construction.
3. Fabricate and install assemblies using personnel who shall perform the same
tasks for the Project.
4. Select sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate the
capability of handrail, railing systems to comply with performance
requirements.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and
material from a single manufacturer.
C. Mock-up: Construct mock-up for each form of railing system and finish required to
verify selections made under sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well
as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-up using materials indicated for
final unit or Work.
1.5 STORAGE
A. Store handrails and railing systems inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured
concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme
temperatures, and humidity.
A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing are indicated to fit to other
construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railing systems without field
measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any
means not satisfying structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS
A. Provide metal free from surface blemishes, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units.
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying with the
requirements:
1. Steel Tubing: Cold-Formed or Hot Formed Steel Tubing
2. For Exterior Installation: Where indicated, provide tubing with electrostatic
powder coating.
3. Steel Plated, Shapes, and Bars
4. Iron Casting: Malleable iron.
5. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type
material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide cast brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to
threaded hanger bolt.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners
1. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to other Construction: Select fasteners of
the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable
for anchoring handrails and railing to other types of construction and capable
of withstanding design loads.
a. For Steel Railings and Fittings: Use plated fasteners.
2. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same
basic metal as the fastened metal. Do not use metals that are corrosive or
incompatible with materials joined.
a. Provide concealed fasteners, for interconnecting handrail and railing
components and for attaching them to other work, except where
exposed fasteners are unavoidable.
b. Provide Phillips Flathead Machine Screw for exposed fasteners,
B. Cast-in-Place and Post installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load
imposed when installed in concrete.
1. Cast-in-Place Anchors
2. Expansion Anchors
C. Wood Handrails: Hardwood handrails of species and profile indicated, or as selected by
Engineer, bonded to sub-rail with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
1. Wood species: Oak and Pitch Pine. Refer to drawings for size and
configurations.
D. Paint: Provide primes complying with applicable requirements of Division 9 Section
"Painting".

1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead and chromate-free,
universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility
with finish paint, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-
applied top coats despite prolonged exposure.
2. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated
for priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems
indicated.
3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing
welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94% zinc
dust by weight.
E. Grout and Anchoring Cement
1. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2. Ordinary Grout: ordinary Portland cement, and desert sand mixed with the
proportion of 1 cement to 2½ sand and necessary water.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with the design, dimensions, details,
finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacing,
and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
1. Assemble Railing Systems: In shop to the greatest extent possible to
minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary
for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of
joined pieces.
2. Form changes in direction of railing members as detailed, or by bending:
a. By radius indicated
b. By mitering elbow bends
3. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required, maintain profile
of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrails and railing components.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members
by welding, cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close
fit. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches
contours and adjoining surfaces.

C. Mechanical Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails by connecting
members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive
where this represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.
D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall
brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect handrail and railing
members to other construction.
1. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing
systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable
to withstand loads imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate
anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than
150 mm long with inside dimensions not less than 12 mm greater than
outside dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.
3. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube whose
inside diameter is sized for a close fit with movement of post without lateral
load, measured at top, to not more than 1/12 of post height. Provide socket
covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.
4. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed
cut edges.
5. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise
indicated. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
6. Cut reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow
sections of railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from
condensation or other sources.
8. Fabricate joints that shall be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
9. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end
fittings, use flash welding or bolted connections with unexposed bolts.
10. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise
indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of the railing
and wall is 6 mm or less.
11. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings
and at the edge of open-side floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions
and details indicated.
12. Fillers: Provide steel sheets or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or
required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall
bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit
wall finish thickness. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent
bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
1. Steel Finishes: All exposed steel units shall be finished as indicated on
Drawings or at Engineer request:
a. Spray Enamel
2. Wood Finishes: All exposed wood units shall be finished as indicated on
Drawings or at Engineer request.
C. Fill vent and drain holes that shall be exposed in the finished work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filling off smooth.
1. For galvanized handrails and railing systems, provide galvanized fittings,
brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
2. For non-galvanized steel handrails and railing systems, provide non-
galvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except
galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior masonry and concrete
construction.
D. Preparation for shop priming, after galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt,
oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
1. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements.
2. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components,
unless otherwise indicated. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be
embedded in concrete or masonry.
3. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
4. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
E. Baked-Enamel Finish: Apply baked enamel finish complying with paint manufacturer's
specifications for cleaning, conversion, coating and painting. Colors and gloss shall be
selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installing anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete as
masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing handrails and railing. Set handrails and railing accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation.
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.

2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that
have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field
connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
3. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1½ mm in 1 m.
4. Align rails so that variation from level for horizontal members and from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members does not exceed 2
mm in 1 m.
B. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
corrosion resistance of base materials.
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface
matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of the following that shall be in
contact with gout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar materials with a heavy coat
of bituminous paint.
1. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching
alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less
than that required by structural loads.
2. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing handrails and railing systems and for properly
transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Railing Connections
1. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent
damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed
locking screws using plastic filler, cement colored to match finish of
handrails and railing systems.
2. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting
railing components by welding. Cope or use fittings designed for this
purpose.
3. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not
further apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-
joint internal sleeve extending 50 mm beyond joint on either side; fasten
internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within150 mm of post.
B. Anchoring Posts: Use one of the following methods:
1. Use steel anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeve preset and anchored into
concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular
space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring material, mixed
and placed to comply with manufacturer's directions.

2. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core-drilling holes not less than 125
mm deep and 20 mm greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of
all loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and
concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply
with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
a. Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.
b. Anchoring cement.
3. Cover anchorage joint with a round flange of same metal as post, attached to
post as follows:
a. Welded to post after placement of anchoring material.
b. By set screws.
4. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring materials, and
leave 3 mm build-up, sloped away from post.
5. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle or floor type as required
by conditions, connected to posts and to meal supporting members.
C. Removable Railing System
1. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets
cast into concrete. Accurately located sockets to match post spacing.
D. Attaching Handrails to Walls: Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end
fittings. Provide bracket with 38 mm clearance from inside face of handrail and
finished wall surface.
1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to
support structural loads.
2. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as
follows:
3. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
4. Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
5. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified testing agency to
perform field quality control testing.
B. The testing agency shall randomly select completed railing assemblies for testing
that are representative of the different railing designs and conditions in the completed
Work.
C. Testing agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Engineer.
D. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements, unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the
Engineer so that they shall comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional Testing: Where railings are removed and replaced or are repaired,
additional testing shall be performed to determine compliance with specified
requirements.

3.5 TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint are specified in Division 9.
B. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and apply galvanizing repair paint.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction
period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer.
Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no
evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refined in the field
to the shop; make required alternations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Handrails and railings will be measured according to type by length (m).
C. Dimensions and details are stated in descriptions, where necessary, to identify the work.
Dimensions stated for wood are deemed to be finished sizes.
D. Balustrades and the like are given in meters
5.1 GENERAL
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples, co-
coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance,
cleaning and protecting.
B. Taking measurements for installation from established lines and levels.
C. All supports and fixings for installation on site.
D. Glazing beads, gaskets, weather-strips, flashings, architraves, trims and the like
accessories, where supplied with the unit
E. Glazing
F. Ironmongery
G. Surface treatments and preservative applied as part of the production process,
H. Finishes, where part of the unit as delivered
I. Priming backs of frames and the like


IFC - Rev.00 Page 10 of 10 November
2019
FOR
DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 06 Wood, plastics and composites

SECTION 06 4000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ANSI/AHA A135.4-1995 Basic Hardwood.
2. ANSI A208.2- 2002 Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior
Application
3. ANSI/NEMA LD 3-2005 High-Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D1037 – 12 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of
Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit 8 copies of manufacturer's data for each item furnished
under this Section.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit 3 copies of shop drawings showing plans, elevations, and large scale
details for each fabricated item. Identify locations of each item. Show plastic
laminate colors, patterns, and inserts.
C. Samples:
1. Submit samples of each wood species to receive transparent finishes.
2. Submit a finished sample of each finish.
3. Submit samples of milled paneling and trim items.
A. Built-ins and casework shall be constructed and installed to carry intended loads, not
have sharp corners, splinters, or any construction features or projections that would be
hazardous to occupants and users. Casework and cabinets shall be constructed in
conformance with applicable state and federal accessibility requirements.
B. Cabinet work shall follow minimum requirements described in the latest edition of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) following "Custom Grade" standards.
C. Particle board is not allowed.
D. Casework shall be "Custom Grade" overlay design with plastic laminate finish.
E. Only manufacturers with financial stability and 5 years experience in casework
manufacture and installations of similar scope will be considered.
1. The installer must be a company whose primary business is the
manufacturing of plastic laminate casework.
2. The installer shall have adequate physical facilities and personnel for this
size project with a qualified engineering department to provide layout and
shop drawings for review before fabrication.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 06 4000 Architectural woodwork

F. Evidence of qualifications shall include product catalog, descriptive literature, and
specifications for the proposed product. Submit a sample cabinet, complete with
drawer, door hardware, and corner sample of counter top with the product literature.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver casework when the building is secure and weather tight.
B. The air circulation control system shall be operating and maintaining humidity and
temperature conditions similar to the conditions to be maintained by the Board.
C. Interior plaster and plaster veneer work shall be complete and dry.
D. Painting and other finish work shall be complete in immediate and adjacent areas within
the building where millwork/cabinet work/casework is stored.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, plain sawn, selected for compatible grain and color, no
defects.
B. Case and built-ins members, tops, bottoms, sides, dividers, shelves, door fronts, and
drawer fronts shall be 19 mm thick 7 ply closed grain hardwood plywood.
C. Case backs shall be 6 mm thick closed grain hardwood plywood.
D. Plywood shall have water-resistant glue. Provide manufacturer's association stamp
except where exposed to view.
E. Plywood Face Veneer: Same species as exposed solid lumber, clear, selected for grain
and color compatible with exposed solid lumber, no defects. Provide HPVA HP-1,
Grade AA faces at least 0.5mm thick and Grade J cross-bands. Provide solid cross-
bandings without voids using water resistant resin glue. Edge band exposed edges with
3 mm solid wood of same species as face veneer.
F. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF) Panels:
1. Material:
a. Wood Fiber: 100 percent post-industrial recycled wood residuals.
b. Binder: Formaldehyde-free adhesive system.
2. Conformance: ANSI A208.2, industrial-grade MDF.
G. Stone Countertop: Polished stone, free of checks, spalls, stains, discoloration, cracks,
unusual patterns or other imperfections, and matching the Owner’s control samples.
Refer to Division 12 Section “Stone Countertops”.
1. Countertop Material: Refer to Drawings for Stone Types.
2. Surface Finish: Polished, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
H. Plastic Laminate: High pressure laminates conforming to NEMA specification LD3
latest edition. Laminate the plastic laminate sheets to the core stock under pressure
with water resistant adhesive to achieve a Type II bond.
1. Material Thickness:
a. 0.7 mm - Exposed interior surfaces of door backs, cabinet sides,
backs, and shelving and all other remaining exposed interior
horizontal and vertical surfaces.

b. Concealed Surfaces: Not applicable.
2. Colors and Patterns:
a. Colors and patterns shall be judged equivalent, as determined by the
A/E, to those preselected or above specified colors and patterns.
I. Wood trim, cabinet stiles and rails, wood door Panels and frames:
1. Hardwood: AWI "Custom" Quality.
2. Where hinges or other attachment requiring screws for holding power in
concealed wood are required, lumber shall be one of the following:
a. Yellow Pine.
3. Lumber scheduled or detailed to be covered with plastic laminate shall be
one of the following:
a. Yellow Pine.
4. Lumber used for construction of bins or shelving supports located in kitchen
pantries, shops, storage rooms, or janitor closets shall be, unless otherwise
shown on the drawings, finished under Painting Section with "natural finish"
and shall be of one of the following:
a. Yellow Pine.
5. Lumber scheduled or detailed to be transparent finished (varnished, stained,
oil-rubbed, gloss or satin polyurethane finish) shall be the following:
a. Beech.
6. Lumber scheduled to be painted or enameled shall be one of the following.
Do not use fir plywood in this application:
a. Yellow Pine.
J. Adhesives: Use adhesives meeting Strength and Rate of Loading, Moisture Resistance,
and Heat Resistance requirements set forth in AWI 100-G-11. Do not use glues
containing formaldehyde.
1. For interior work:
a. Modified Polyvinyl Acetate: For normal use except items requiring
high moisture resistance.
b. Casein Glue: For normal use except waterproofed items.
c. Contact Cements (not the solvent type): For bonding high water
pressure laminates only.
2. For exterior work or in kitchens, toilets or other rooms with rooms with
moisture:
a. Phenolic Resin: Generally for moisture resistance of fully waterproof
bond.
K. Glass Panels:
1. Fabricate with clear glass 4 mm thick or as per drawings and directed by
Engineer. Refer to specifications Division 08 – Section “Glass and Glazing”.
2. Large Hollow-core Doors in Cabinet Work: Comply with requirements of
Division 08 Section “Wood Doors.”

L. Finish Hardware:
1. Hinges for 19 mm Thick Doors:
a. Satin chrome plated steel, 5 knuckles, wrap around type allowing
270 degree swing at end of cabinet work unit, mounted with
minimum 4 plated No.8 self-tapping screws per hinge leaf.
Concealed European type hinges are not allowed.
b. For doors up to and including 120 cm high:
Provide 2 hinges.
c. For doors over 120 cm high: Provide 3 hinges.
2. Pulls: 7.5 mm wire pull, 100 mm long, solid brass, satin chrome plated.
3. Door Catches:
a. For doors up to and including 950 mm high: Provide 1 heavy duty
magnetic type catch, slotted for adjustment. Attach with screws.
b. For door 950 mm high and over: Provide 2 heavy duty magnetic type
catches, slotted for adjustment. Attach with screws.
4. Locks for 20 mm doors with plastic laminate finish: (Where indicated on
drawings). Satin chrome or nickel plated steel 6 tumbler lock with grooved
key.
5. Drawer Slides: Zinc plated cold rolled steel rated for 35 kg capacity.
6. Steel Standards: zinc plated finish, 16 mm screw nails, and shelf clips.
Surface mount.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Construct cabinet work as shown on the drawings and meeting the following
requirements:
1. Face frames, mortise, screw, glue, and make all such joints concealed.
2. Cabinet members, bottoms, sub-top, sides, and back shall be joined by dado
and rebated joints secured with glue and concealed mechanical fasteners.
Case backs shall have a 75mm anchor cleat the full width of the unit at the
top.
3. Case construction of butt joins with dowel pins is not allowed.
4. Construct the toe space base from solid lumber and separately framed.
5. Drawers: Lock shouldered.
6. Drawer Sides and Backs:
a. Well sanded Southern Yellow Pine with corners rounded and natural
finish.
b. Plastic laminate on 13 mm plywood with plastic laminate interior.
7. Drawer Bottoms: 13 mm tempered fiberboard with factory applied gloss
surface of color approved by Engineer.
8. Cabinet interior sides drilled to receive shelf pins leaving exposed core are
not acceptable.
9. Shelving:

a. 19 mm plywood for lengths less than 900 mm.
b. 25 mm plywood or 19 mm plywood with 19 mm x 38 mm hardwood
edges at front and rear of shelf for lengths 900 mm or greater.
10. Adjustable Shelving: Use surface mounted standards and notched shelving
ends.
11. Exposed Shelving: In storage rooms, utility rooms, kitchen pantries, shops,
mechanical or electrical rooms, or in janitor closets, shall be "natural finish"
constructed of plywood with edges banded of similar material and have
outside face veneers of Beech.
B. All other Shelving: Hardwood plywood with bonded edges, finished "transparent" and
of plywood with veneers meeting the following criteria:
1. Cabinet and casework hardware will be supplied under the finish Hardware
Section and shall be installed by the cabinet and casework fabricator. Locate
hardware accurately on shop drawings.
2. Species: Birch, APA grade marked MDO 1 face/2 face, interior grade.
3. Where normally exposed to view (behind cabinet doors): Birch, AWI
Custom Quality.
4. Where normally concealed from view (behind cabinet doors): Birch, AWI
Economy Quality.
C. All cabinets shall be constructed of "transparently finished" hardwood plywood doors,
ends, drawer fronts, dividers, and backs (except against walls) with lumber stiles and
rails of same species, as follows:
1. Species: Softwood APA grade faced, with Walnut veneer.
D. Interior Wood Base: Plain Sawn MDF manufactured to sizes and patterns (profile)
shown from selected First Grade; complying with grade requirements of referenced
woodworking standard, for quality of materials and manufacture.
1. Refer to drawings for size and finish requirements.
E. Cornices, Standing and Running Trim and Wood Moldings:
1. Back out or kerfs backs of standing and running trim wider than 125
mm, except members with ends exposed in finished work.
2. Ease edges of lumber less than 25 mm in nominal thickness to 1.5
mm radius and edges of lumber 25 mm or more in nominal thickness
to 3 mm radius.
3. Refer to drawings for size and finish requirements.
F. Wood Beams:
1. Box section of softwood construction with Mahogany veneer.
Provide steel strengthening bars where needed.
2. Provide Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, required for suspension
system. Support Channels and Hangers shall be galvanized steel; size
and type to suit application, and beam system flatness requirement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the millwork/cabinetwork is to be
installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of this phase of the Work. Do not proceed with this phase until the
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work shall be
construed as acceptance of the conditions.
B. Contractor shall take accurate field measurements and adjust the shop drawings
accordingly before fabrication. The A/E shall be informed in writing of any dimension
changes resulting from such field measurement before fabrication.
C. The casework shall be set in place, leveled, and secured to walls and floors as normal
and standard to the trade. Fillers shall be used between casework and walls and shall be
accurately scribed to walls for a neat installation. Casework shall be caulked where
meeting walls, floors and soffits. Seal all counter joints and where backsplash meets
counter top.
D. The casework installer shall accurately cut openings required for sinks or other
equipment as indicated on plans.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide first quality construction following best trade practices.
B. Cuts, miters, joints, etc. shall be well sawn and joined. Nail heads or holes shall not be
exposed in finish work. Drive nails and screws true and straight. Glue joints
securely together. Sand all surfaces thoroughly, leaving clean and ready for finishing.
C. Bond plastic laminate to surfaces with technique and contact cement approved by
laminated plastic manufacturer.
D. Install cabinet hardware according to requirements of the finish hardware as specified
and in accurate positions as indicated on the drawings.
4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid for will be measured in place or will be determined from
drawings as directed by the Engineer.
B. No deduction will be made for openings, recesses and niches individually measuring
0,25 m2 or less in facing panels, insulating materials, impervious layers and
lightweight exterior wall cladding.
C. When measuring by length (m), deduction will be made for interruptions.
D. No deduction will be made for frames, studs, horizontal members and other framing
elements, rafters, batten framing and substructures in false floors, insulation, fillings,
impervious layers, etc.

A. Measuring of works will be based on the following units:
1. Area (m2), accounted for separately according to type and size:
a. Boarding and paneling
2. Length (m) of structural timber, accounted for separately according to type
and size:

a. Beams ,joists and girders for floors and flat roofs
b. Beams, joists and girders for pitched roofs
c. Posts, studs, bracing or the like for walls and partitions
d. Bearers, wall plates, purlins or the like
e. Battens
f. Rafters
3. Number of items (pc) , accounted for separately according to type and size:
a. Prefabricated assemblies (e.g. trusses, frames, columns or beams,
joined by means of nails, connectors, dowels, adhesive, etc.)
b. Steel components, e.g. connectors, bolts, anchor ties, distance pieces
, corbels and other fittings
B. Preservative treatments, flame-retardant treatments, decorative treatments will be
measured as Lump Sum (LS), if it is clearly mentioned as a separate item.
5.1 GENERAL
A. The unit prices shall include all preservative treatments, flame-retardant treatments,
decorative treatments, raking, cutting and circular cutting, joints, notching, fitted
ends, mitered ends and intersections, including all nails and screws, cutting and
waste, halving, trimming, boring, sinking, pelleting, notching and fitting, dovetailing,
scribing, rebates, grooves, chamfers, splay and rounded edges, bead moldings and the
like and all other labors to complete the work.
B. No payment will be made for quantities as a result of over sizing or any other
unauthorized operation.
C. Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be
A. Preparation of samples and mock-ups as required by the Engineer.
B. Leveling of background up to 30 mm to produce a plane surface for boarding and
paneling.

FOR
DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 Thermal and moisture protection

SECTION 07 1416 - COLD FLUID- APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The works to be performed under this Section include the supply and application of
coats for protecting concrete work below ground as per attached drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting
work.
1. Submit an affidavit from manufacturer approving applicator before installation.
a. Applicator shall provide evidence of 5 years satisfactory application
experience of the system specified.
2. Submit material product data, material specifications, and application manual
from manufacturer describing completely the preparation of surfaces and
application of specified materials.
1.3 REFERENCES
1. ASTM D1227 - 13 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a
Protective Coating for Roofing
A. All works shall be done in accordance with the specifications mentioned in this Section.
In all cases, all works are to be performed by specialized experienced subcontractors.
A. Materials shall be delivered to the job in manufacturer’s original unopened containers or
wraps with labels intact and manufacturer’s brand and name clearly marked there out.
All materials shall be of well reputable manufacturer make.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, product data, and samples specified
below at the same time as a package.
B. Shop Drawings: When there is a proposed deviation from the contract Documents,
submit the revised detail, labelled as such for approval. The revised detail shall show
existing conditions and shall be referenced directly to the related details on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Product Data: Catalogue sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each
material specified.
1. Revise the membrane manufacturer’s product data as necessary to suit the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Manufacturer’s details are not to be
used for the Work of this contract.
a. Unless approved otherwise in writing by the Director, the
requirements of the Contract Documents take precedence over the
approved waterproofing manufacturer’s specifications and details.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 1416 Cold fluid- applied waterproofing

b. Any materials, installation procedures, or details not included in the
Contract Documents must be approved by the Director.
2. Manufacturer’s Warranty Sample: Submit a sample copy of the membrane
manufacturer’s 5 year materials warranty.
D. Samples:
1. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Membrane: Two 0.3 m2 pieces.
2. Flashing Cap Sheet: One 75cm2 pieces.
3. Protection Board: One 75cm2 piece.
4. Insulation: One 75cm2piece.
5. Drainage Composite: One 75cm2 piece.
E. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Membrane Waterproofing Manufacturer’s Certification:
a. Submit a letter certifying that the manufacturer has been actively
marketing the submitted system for a minimum of 3 years.
b. Submit the names and addresses of 10 previous waterproofing
projects. Include the type and size of each project, and name and
telephone number of a contact person at the project location.
2. Applicator’s Certification:
a. Submit a letter certifying that the applicator has been actively
installing waterproofing and/or roofing systems for the past 5 years.
b. Submit the names and addresses of 5 previous waterproofing and/or
roofing projects. Include the type and size of each project, the
waterproofing and/or roofing manufacturer’s name, and the name
and telephone number of a contact person at the project location.
c. Submit a letter certifying that the supervisor or foreman and the
workers applying the waterproofing materials have at least 3 years
experience in the application of waterproofing and/or roofing
materials.
3. Company Field Advisor:
a. Submit the names, address, and telephone number of the Company
Field Advisor who will be assigned to this project.
G. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Upon acceptance of the completed Work of this
Section, furnish the membrane manufacturer’s written 5 year materials
warranty.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish warranty covering watertight integrity or waterproofing for 5 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Warranty shall provide for prompt repair of leaks, ruptures, blisters, and other
imperfections at no cost to the Owner.
2. Warranty shall be signed by contractor and waterproofing applicator.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Single-Component thixotropic cold applied brown rubber/bitumen liquid emulsion with
added rubber latex. Comply with ASTM D1227, Type 3 and Class 1.
B. Typical Properties
Color: Dark brown
Specific gravity: 1.01 at 25°C
Coverage: 1-4.5m²/kg
Flashpoint: Non flammable
Service temperature: -30°C to +100°C
Dry film thickness: 1.5 mm minimum
Application temperature: +5°C to 55°C
Rubber content: 10% in the dried film
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that
conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements for installation. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
Substrate shall be sound, stable with an even finish and free from dirt, dust, loose debris,
grease, etc. before waterproofing application.
B. Dampen dry surfaces before applying water based bitumen emulsion.
C. Hot, very dry or porous surfaces should be dampened with a priming coat before
waterproofing is applied.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Apply waterproofing to area(s) indicated on Drawings. Apply by spray, roller, or brush.
All areas indicated shall receive 2or 3 coats of waterproofing; to be applied at right
angles to give a D.F.T. (Dry Finished Thickness) of 770 microns per coat.
B. Spaces in which coatings are to be applied are to be well ventilated.
C. Apply coatings generally in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to
prepared surfaces, in dry atmospheric conditions, after primer has dried and after
previous coats have hardened.
D. Apply waterproofing to green concrete immediately after shuttering has been removed.
Apply waterproofing to damp but not waterlogged surfaces.
E. Work coating into recesses, edges, joints, intersections and over surfaces generally to
obtain uniform and continuous film.
F. The waterproofing has to reach the bottom level of the marble skirting.

G. For existing buildings, re-coat the reachable parts (300 mm measured from the bottom
level of marble skirting) with waterproofing (two coats) after repairing all MEP
penetrations.
H. Final covering is to be laid/applied as soon as possible after coating has hardened.
I. Blind the first coat with clean sharp sand to afford higher dry film thickness and aid
monitoring layer applications.
J. Backfill and compact fill material per Division 02 Section “Earthwork.”
4.1 GENERAL
B. Work measured by area shall be measured flat. No allowance will be made for overlaps.
C. Work measured by length shall be measured net and no allowance will be made for
overlaps.
D. Where work is measured by area no deduction will be made for openings not exceeding
0.5 m2.
A. Area (m2), accounted for separately:
1. Damp-proofing
2. Protection layers
B. Length (m), accounted for separately:
1. Damp-proofing of movement joints
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all damp-proofing
materials, equipment, tools, storage facilities, all labour, coordinating work with other
trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protective
measures.
B. Material or work, which does not conform to specification, shall be removed or replaced
at Contractor’s expense.
1. Scaffolding
2. Re-excavation of working spaces outside walls
3. Preparation of samples as required by the Engineer
4. Preparation of mock-ups as required by the Engineer
5. The finished work will include but not be limited to protection layers
(Geotextile), internal and external corners, seam jointing, different attachment
methods, counter flashing, expansion joints and control joints.
SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM E84 – 14 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
2. ASTM C203 - 05a (2012) Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and
Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation
3. ASTM C272 / C272M - 16 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of
Core Materials for Sandwich Constructions
4. ASTM C552 - 13 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
5. ASTM C578 - 14 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation
6. ASTM C920 - 14a Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
7. ASTM D1621 - 16 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
1. Catalogue sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each type of
insulation specified, include data substantiating that the materials comply with
the specified thermal resistance and vapour resistance qualities.
B. Samples:
1. Blanket or Roll: 75 cm2.
2. Rigid Type: 40 cm2.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire-resistance
characteristic specified for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-
burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: with maximum flame-spread and smoke
developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 2100 Thermal insulation

B. Compressive Strength, ASTM D1621, 40 psi minimum.
C. Water Absorption, ASTM C272, by volume, (24 hr water immersion): 0.3%
maximum.
D. Flexural Strength, ASTM C203, 60 psi minimum.
2.2 VAPOUR RETARDERS
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapour Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film
laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester
scrim and weighing not less than 2.45 kg/m2, with maximum permeance rating of
0.0507 perm.
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Vapour -Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapour -
retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapour retarder.
B. Vapour -Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with
fender washers.
C. Single-Component Non-sag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS,
Class 25, and Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapour -barrier-
related substrates.
D. Adhesive for Vapour Retarders: Product recommended by vapour -retarder
manufacturer and with demonstrated capability to bond vapour retarders securely to
substrates indicated.
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate formed from perforated
galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.76 mm thick by 13 cm2 square, welded to projecting
copper-coated steel spindle 2.7 mm in diameter and of length capable of holding
insulation of thickness indicated securely in position with 10 cm2 or diameter self-
locking washers complying with the following requirements:
1. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.4 mm thick
galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness.
2. Where anchors are located in crawlspaces, protect ends with capped self-
locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent
retention of cap.
B. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting
over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 2.5 cm between face of
insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.
C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and
substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products
and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make
up total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOUR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapour retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapour
transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapour retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates.
B. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapour retarders with vapour -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between
penetrating objects and vapour retarder.
C. Repair tears or punctures in vapour retarders immediately before concealment by
other work. Cover with vapour -retarder tape or another layer of vapour retarder.
4.1 GENERAL
A. Insulation will be measured according to different thicknesses by m2
B. Voids not exceeding 0.5 m2 will not be deducted.
C. Reveals which are receiving insulation for openings > 2.0 m2 will be measured
separately by m length.
5.1 GENERAL
equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labor, samples,
coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality
B. The finished work will include but not be limited to protection layers, internal and
external corners, seam jointing, different attachment methods
1. Preparation of substrates to meet the required conditions for applying thermal
insulation.
2. Overlaps
4. Preparation of mock-ups as required by the Engineer

5. Insulation-retaining washers
6. Vapour retarders
7. Insulation standoff
8. Sealing joints

SECTION 07 3200 - ROOF TILES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour and materials
and performing all operations in connection with terrazzo and natural stone flooring
for units no greater than 40 mm in thickness. Unless otherwise indicated, all
provisions in this section shall apply equally to internal and external work.
1.2 REFERENCES
2. ASTM C 150/C 150M: 12 Standard Specifications for Portland cement.
3. ASTM C171 - 07 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing
Concrete
4. ASTM C241 / C241M - 13 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of
Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
B. British Standards
1. BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008Aggregates for concrete
2. BS EN 13139:2002 Aggregates for mortar
3. BS EN 1278:2010 Chemicals used for treatment of water intended for human
consumption. Ozone
4. BS EN 13748-1:2004 Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for internal use
5. BS EN 934-2:2009+A1:2012 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout .
Concrete admixtures. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and
labelling
6. BS EN 12004:2007+A1:2012 Adhesives for tiles. Requirements, evaluation
of conformity, classification and designation
7. BS 8204-4:2004+A1:2011 Screeds, bases and in situ floorings. Cementitious
terrazzo wearing surfaces. Code of practice
8. BS EN 12878:2014 Pigments for the colouring of building materials based
on cement and/or lime. Specifications and methods of test
9. BS 5385-1:2009 Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of ceramic,
natural stone and mosaic wall tiling in normal internal conditions. Code of
practice
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Abrasive Hardness (Ha) - value for abrasion resistance. Refers to the wearing
qualities of stone for floors, stair treads and other areas subjected to abrasion by foot
traffic. (see ASTM C 241)
B. Arris - the corner or angle formed by the meeting of two surfaces, especially in
mouldings; it can be moulded, unfinished, bevelled, rounded or otherwise shaped.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 3200 Roof tiles

C. Gritted - grinding a surface with grit stones.
D. Grout - a thin mortar to fill the joints
E. Marble chips - marble granules screened to various sizes.
F. Monolithic terrazzo (thin bed terrazzo) - cementations terrazzo topping poured on a
cementations base.
G. Polished - the finest and smoothest glossy finish on natural stone.
H. Precast terrazzo - terrazzo fabricated in moulds and finished in shop or factory (e.g.
treads and risers), by compression or vibration.
I. Rustic terrazzo - a surface variation where in lieu of grinding and polishing, the
surface is washed with water or otherwise treated to expose the natural stone
chipping.
J. Terrazzo - derived from the Italian "Terrace" and Terrazzo". Terrazzo consists of
marble, granite, or if agreed with the purchaser of other natural stone chipping
embedded in cement mortar and cured ground and polished to expose the aggregate
and provide a smooth hard finish. Typically used as a finish for floors either as
precast tiles or poured in place.
K. Wear - the removal of material or impairment of surface finish through friction or
impact.
L. Weathering - natural alteration by either chemical or mechanical processes due to the
action of constituents of the atmosphere, surface water, or to temperature change.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In compliance with conditions of contract the following shall be submitted thirty (30)
days before terrazzo and natural stone flooring is scheduled to commence.
B. Product Data
1. Complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to
be furnished and installed under this section including manufacturer's colour
charts showing full range of colours, textures, pattern, and trim units
(fittings) available for each type and composition of tile as indicated for
initial selection purposes.
C. Shop drawings
1. Shop drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections of units, arrangements
and provisions for jointing, and other details showing relationship with, and
attachment to related work.
D. Samples
1. Samples of each item, prepared on samples of adequate size and
construction, in sets showing full range of variations expected.
E. Quality Control Submittals
1. Documented experience of Contractor’s site supervisor(s).

A. Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor or
supplier if necessary.
B. Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than
three (3) days after testing and checking.
C. Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure
traceability.
D. Arrangements shall be made and time allowed in Contractor’s work schedule for
checking and testing as indicated.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Internal Quality Control
1. Contractor's internal Q. C. shall include but not be limited to:
2. Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for tiles
and all other material delivered to the side prior to first delivery to conform
compliance to specifications.
3. Checking supplier’s delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specification.
4. Checking correct storage of materials at least every 2 weeks.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping
1. Delivery, storage and handling shall be so arranged as to minimise
handling.
2. Adequate precautions shall be taken to guard against the possibility of
damage.
3. When delivered to the site, tiles shall be palletised and packaged shrink-
wrapped and edge protected by polystyrene wrapping or wooden casings and
stored in a clean and dry lockable storage.
4. Terrazzo tiles shall not be transported and delivered to the site until a
period of at least 7 days after pressing has elapsed and shall not be installed
earlier than 28 days after pressing.
5. Sensitive Material (e.g. adhesive, grout, sealant etc.) shall be labelled with
date of manufacture, service life, instructions for proper storage and use, and
any necessary precaution related to toxicity and flammability.
B. Storage and Protection
1. Tiles shall be stored in a clean and dry lockable storage.
2. Tiles shall be stored off ground and air shall be allowed to circulate around
tiles to avoid staining.
3. Terrazzo tiles shall be vertically stacked face to face. Thin battens shall be
inserted between rows of tiles.

4. Cement and lime shall be stored under dry conditions and used in order of
delivery. Cement or lime, which contains air set lumps, shall not be used and
discarded.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TERRAZZO TILES
A. Terrazzo tiles shall be made from aggregate and cement with two-part mixes (one for
base layer and one for facing layer) and shall be hydraulically pressed before curing.
Marble powder may be added if appropriate.
B. The edges of the tile shall be perpendicular to the surface. The planes of the upper
and lower surfaces shall be parallel and adjacent vertical edges of square tiles shall be
at right angle to each other. All arises shall be sharp and true.
C. The minimum transverse (flexural) strength shall be 3 N/mm2 and the total water
absorption shall not exceed 8%. The water absorption of the tile-face shall not exceed
0.4 g/cm2 when sampled and tested in compliance with BS 4131.
D. The maximum dimensional deviation shall be 3 mm in length and width and 6 mm in
thickness. However, for each shipment of tiles the tolerances shall not exceed 1 mm
for length and width and 3 mm for thickness.
E. Aggregate for base layer shall consist of naturally occurring materials such as
crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone, natural sand or crushed gravel sand and
shall comply with ASTM C 33.
F. Facing Layer
1. The facing layer shall be formed as an integral part of the tile and shall be not
less than 6 mm after grinding and shall be free from projections, depressions,
flakes and crazes.
2. Cement for the facing layer shall be gray, white or tinted Portland cement
3. If pigments are used they shall comply with requirements of BS EN 12878 or
shall be certified otherwise as suitable for the intended use.
4. Aggregate for facing layer shall be graded marble chipping of adequate
hardness, angular in shape as distinct from elongated and flaky,
2.2 TILE BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Cement
1. Cement used for bedding mortar shall be Ordinary Portland cement and shall
comply with ASTM C 150.
B. Sand
1. Sand used for bedding mortar shall be building sand (0-3 mm) from natural
sources in accordance with BS EN 12620or an equivalent standard.
C. Water
1. Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will not be allowed
for mixing water.
2.3 GROUT

A. Grout shall have low shrinkage and appropriate adhesion and shall be suitable for the
conditions to be met.
B. Cement: Sand Grout
1. Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve:
a. White joints, or
b. Coloured joints as approved by the Engineer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Units (Fittings)
1. All trim units (fittings) shall match the tiles and shall be from the same
source unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type, size, colour and pattern shall be as indicated.
B. Division Strips
1. Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be made
of:
a. Extruded aluminium
b. Stainless steel
2. With integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless
3. Dimension of division strips shall be suitable for the intended use.
2.5 MIXES
A. General
1. Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition
controlled.
2. Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be
measured by volume using suitable containers of fixed, measurable
measurement.
3. When mortar is mixed by hand, it shall be done on a clean non-absorbent
surface.
4. No water shall be added once mixing has been completed.
5. Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be
removed
6. Admixtures shall only be used when certified by the manufacturer as suitable
for the intended use.
7. Mixes shall comply with BS 5385.
B. Bedding Mortar Mixes
1. Cement: sand semi-dry mix shall be 1:3,5 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6
by weight)
2. The water-cement ratio shall be between 0,55 and 0,60.

C. Grouting Mixes
1. The proportions of cement: sand shall be 1: 1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm,
1: 2 for joints between 3-6 mm and 1: 3 for joints wider than 6 mm.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL EXAMINATION
A. All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, contamination, and any potentially deleterious material
prior to commencing floor-tiling work.
B. All surfaces to receive floor tiling shall be level and true. Where falls have been
incorporated in the base, they shall be examined for correctness.
C. Where floor tiles are to be bonded to concrete floors by cement: sand mortar bed on a
separating layer, the concrete surface shall be steel trowel finished.
D. Installation works shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
E. The tiling Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions
that will prevent a satisfactory tile installation.
3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION
A. Before installation commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for any cementitious
base to dry out.
B. Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before
the application of floor tiles begins i.e. installation of anchors, electrical, mechanical
and sanitary installations, and similar items located in or below tiled areas.
C. Bases not built accurately or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be corrected
and additional time shall be allowed for setting and curing
D. Any laitance on the surface of the background and contamination by oil, grease wax,
dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion of the tiles or may cause staining
shall be removed.
E. All loose material on the surface of backgrounds shall be removed by suitable
professional tools.
F. The finished floor level shall be established and properly marked in each room or
area to receive tiling.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required,
surfaces to receive floor tiling shall be centred and balanced.
2. Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under equipment and fixtures
to form a complete covering without interruptions.
3. Tiles shall be closely fit to piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that
plates, collars or covers overlap tiles.
4. Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts
shall be positioned on the outer edges of surfaces.

5. All joints shall be straight and of even width.
6. All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface shall
be true, when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap found shall not
exceed 2 mm and the straightedge shall not be obstructed.
7. No greater area of mortar shall be applied than can be worked before setting.
8. Before any fixing, colour and shade variations shall be checked. Variegated
tiles shall be thoroughly mixed.
9. Temperatures in tiled areas shall be maintained at 10 °C or more during
installation and for at least 7 days after completion, unless higher
temperatures are required by referenced standards or manufacturer's
instructions.
10. Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be
continuous with structural movement joints.
11. Additional movement joints shall be positioned where floor tiles abut
restraining surfaces such as walls, columns, door frames, pipes, where tiling
is continuous across of junctions of different backgrounds. In addition,
surfaces exceeding 25 m2 shall be bay jointed unless otherwise indicated.
B. Terrazzo Floor Tiles
1. Cement: Sand Semi-Dry Mix Bedding
a. The dryness of the mix shall result in less adhesion between the bed
and the concrete base that cleavage can occur.
b. Before the semi-dry mix is laid, the base shall be swept clean and
slightly dampened.
c. The semi-dry mix shall then be spread to a thickness of about 10 -
15% thicker than the final bed thickness and shall be partially
compacted, leaving the surface true and flat to the required level; the
final bed thickness shall be at least 25 mm.
d. A slurry of thick, creamy consistency (cement: fine sand 1: 1) shall
be applied either to the back of each tile before placing or
alternatively on the partially compacted mortar bed.
e. The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position by using
professional tools (e.g. rubber mallet) with regular and straight joints
between 2 mm and 3 mm wide. Full contact between slurried tile
backs and mortar bed shall be ensured.
f. Any surplus bedding material, which may have risen to the surface,
shall be removed and the surface washed and tiles completely
cleaned.
2. Cement: Sand Mortar bonded to Base
a. The clean and properly prepared concrete slab shall be kept wet for
several hours prior to placing the mortar bed.
b. Within a period of 30 min. before placing the mortar bed, a thin
layer of neat cement shall be spread on the concrete surface and
brushed to a thin uniform coating.

c. The stiff, plastic mortar bed shall be applied immediately over the
thin cement coating between wooden fillets while the slurry is still
wet and shall be levelled, tamped and fully compacted. Slurry of neat
cement and water shall be applied to the back of the tiles.
Alternatively, the levelled mortar bed shall be dusted with a thin dry
cement layer sprinkled with a fine sieve and lightly trowelled
assuring that the cement becomes dampen.
d. The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position with regular
and straight joints between 2 mm and 3 mm wide.
e. The final bed thickness shall be 15 - 25 mm except for units greater
than 500 x 500 mm when the bed thickness shall be 30 - 50 mm
thick.
f. Any surplus bedding material, which may rise to the surface, shall be
removed and tiles completely cleaned.
3. Grouting
a. Grouting shall not start until the mortar bed has set.
b. Joints shall be grouted with white or grey cement as indicated.
Pigments shall not exceed 5% by mass.
c. Joints shall be completely filled by squeegee until settlement ceases.
d. Excess grout shall be removed leaving filled joints flush with the tile
surface.
e. After grouting, terrazzo tiles shall be thoroughly washed with clean
water.
4. Grinding
a. Grinding and polishing shall commence after the grouted joints are
thoroughly hardened but no sooner than 3 days after grouting.
b. The tiled surface shall be mechanically ground to remove surplus
grout and to correct any unevenness between adjacent tiles.
c. All grinding residues and dust shall be washed off and voids shall be
filled with similar grout.
d. After 24 hours, the surface shall be re-ground.
e. Finally, the surface shall be wet polished to receive
 Its final finishes as indicated.
 A non-slip safe walking surface of 0,5 anti-slip coefficient of
friction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Areas to receive terrazzo or a natural stone finish shall be scheduled as late as
possible in the building program in order to reduce danger from damage and
contamination.
B. During the laying operation, tiled areas shall not be accessible except for the tiling
operatives.

C. Completed tiling shall not be subject to traffic for at least seven (7) days unless
otherwise recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
D. For general protection, the completed areas shall be covered by a heavy Polyethylene
sheeting of type that will not stain or discolour the finished surface.
E. When equipment or other heavy loads has to be removed over finished surfaces,
special precaution shall be taken e.g. use of timber planking. However, moving tackle
and the protection itself shall not damage the finished surface.
F. Stair finishing, nosing and other vulnerable constructions shall be protected by
temporary casings.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding
0,1 m2.
A. Flooring according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
B. Skirting will be measured according to type and material by length (m).
C. Provision of joints will be measured according to type and width by length (m).
5.1 GENERAL
equipment, tools, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and co-
ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, quality assurance, cleaning
and protecting.
1. Preparation of the underlayment to obtain a good bonding ground.
2. Cutting and fitting around door frames, pipes and the like.
3. Grouting.
4. Grinding and polishing.
5. Securing the works against undesired trespass until the surface or surface
treatment can no longer be damaged.
6. Providing certificates from authorised and independent laboratories or
agencies.

2019
SECTION 07 5200 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain
watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one
another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by
roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM D5 / D5M - 13 Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous
Materials
2. ASTM D36 / D36M - 14e1 Standard Test Method for Softening Point of
Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus)
3. ASTM D41 / D41M - 11 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in
Roofing, Damp-proofing, and Waterproofing
4. ASTM D146 / D146M - 04(2012)e1 Standard Test Methods for Sampling
and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and
Waterproofing
5. ASTM D448 - 12 Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road
and Bridge Construction
6. ASTM D4263 - 83(2012) Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in
Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
7. ASTM D5147 / D5147M - 14 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and
Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material
8. ASTM G154 - 12a Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet
(UV) Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Non-metallic Materials
B. European Standards
1. BS EN 1109:2013 Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen sheets for roof
waterproofing. Determination of flexibility at low temperature.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specifications Sections.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. 300-by-300-mm square of surfaced roofing membrane sheet.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 5200 Modified bituminous membrane roofing

2. 300-by-300-mm square of roof insulation.
3. 300 by 300 mm square of protection board.
4. Full-size roof paver in each color and texture required.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing components manufacturers certifying that
Installers are approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing
components.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing
components comply with requirements specified in this section.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing
system.
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's warranty.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated.
C. Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for pre-installation
conferences in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review
methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, testing and inspecting agency representative,
roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof
accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of
materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with
requirements, including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof
penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will
affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates
if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and
after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
and directions for storage.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
C. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
D. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting
during installation.
E. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, membrane flashings, roofing
membrane accessories, roof insulation, cover boards, roof pavers, walkway
products and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Torch applied APP-Modified Bituminous Membrane: Membrane applied in single layer
by torch used for waterproofing purposes including waterproofing of roofs consisting of
a reinforcing core of nonwoven polyester fabric spun bonded with continuous thread of
nominal weight of minimum 180 gm/m2; the fabric is impregnated and then coated both
sides with waterproofing agent consisting of bitumen heavily modified with APP the
thermoplastic resins, stabilizers and antioxidants. The membrane shall be barrier to
water and vapor and the following performance requirements:
1. Excellent resistance to atmospheric agents and maintain shape stability at
high temperature.
2. High adhesion strength to substrate
3. Good elongation to accommodate structural movements and high strength to
puncture.
APP bituminous roofing membrane shall have the following properties:

Property Value Test Method
Thickness 4 mm UEA tc
Service Ambient Temperature -10 °C BS EN-1109
Softening Point (R+B) of coating 150 °C minimum ASTM D36
Mixture
Penetration (DOW) of coating Mixture 12-16 dmm ASTM D5
Cold Flexibility -10 °C UEA tc
Water Absorption PBS Less than 0.15% ASTM D5147
Shape Stability at 120 C No Deformation
Impermeability of Membrane to water Absolutely impermeable UNI 8202
Impermeability of the welded Seam of Absolutely impermeable UNI 8202
Two Membrane to water
Elongation @ Break Longitudinal 45% minimum ASTM D146
Transverse 50% minimum ASTM D146
Tensile Strength: > 1000 N/5cm UEA tc
Longitudinal
> 750 N/5cm
Transverse
Tear Resistance: 250 N minimum EN-12310

Longitudinal Transverse
270 N minimum
Lap Joint Strength: Longitudinal Same as membrane
Transverse
Resistance to Thermal Aging No signs of deterioration after UNI 8202. UEA tc
the test
Resistance to Aging due to UV No signs of deterioration after ASTM G154
Radiation the test
Resistance to Hydro Shock No signs of deterioration after ASTM G154
the test
Vapor Permeability 70,000 μ UNI 8202/23
Dimensional Stability: − 0.2 UNI 8202/17
Longitudinal
+ 0.1
Transverse
Adhesion Strength of Membrane Fully 0.80 kg/cm2 UNI 8202

bonded to Concrete Deck, Previously
Treated with Derma primer
Specific Weight of Coating Mixture 1.02 +0.02 kg /dam3 ASTM D146
2.2 ANTI-ROOT MEMBRANE
A. Anti-root membrane is a membrane specially designed to resist root puncture, and
carefully blended with high quality anti-root additives that makes it suitable for all types
of waterproofing works especially roofs gardens and flower boxes.
B. The lower surface is laminated with a Polyethylene film while the upper surface is
covered with one of the following surface finish:

1. Polyethylene Film
2. Mineral Slate chips
3. Fine Sand
C. Side laps should be from 8-10 cm, while end laps should be from 12-15 cm.
D. Anti-root membrane shall have the following properties:
Property Value Test Method

Thickness 4 mm EN 13948
Resistance to root penetration Passed EN 1849
Softening point 150 °C ASTM D 36
Elongation @ Break
Longitudinal 35% minimum ASTM D146
Transverse 40% minimum
Tensile Strength
Longitudinal 500 N/5cm EN 12311-1
Transverse 750 N/5cm
Tear Resistance
Longitudinal 750 N minimum EN 12310-1
Transverse 500 N minimum
Water Impreability 500 KPa EN 1928

2.3 FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS
A. Flashing Sheet and Special Pieces: Comply with same requirements specified for
roofing membrane sheet in this section.
2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with roofing membrane.
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, non-hardening, non-
migrating, non-skinning, and nondrying.
D. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet as specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by
roofing system manufacturer.
F. Cant Strips: Precast from cement sand mortar for mix proportions of 1:3.
2.5 PROTECTION BOARD
A. Tough, semi-flexible prefabricated protection board, composed of mineral fortified
bituminous core, held under pressure between two asphalt saturated carriers.

B. Weight of reinforcements: Min. 240 g/m2.
C. Nominal thickness: 3 mm.
D. Tensile Strength (Longitudinal /Transversal): 700 N/5cm.
E. Tear Resistance (Longitudinal /Transversal): 550 N.
F. Softening point: > 150 °C.
G. Water absorption: Max. 1 %.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing
membrane:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced
and that roof drains are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that cants, blocking, and curbs are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that curbs match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for
capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
a. Test for moisture by pouring 0.5 L of hot roofing asphalt on deck at
start of each day's work and at start of each roof area or plane.
b. Do not proceed with roofing work if test sample foams or can be
easily and cleanly stripped after cooling.
B. Do not proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove
sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs
when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 0.3 L/sq. m and allow
primer to dry.
3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control
Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."
B. Start installation of bituminous roofing membrane in presence of roofing system
manufacturer's technical personnel.
C. Where roof slope exceeds 1:18, install roofing membrane sheets parallel with slope.
D. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services
for installing roofing system.

E. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and exposed other components of the
roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or
left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Provide cutoffs: tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing
membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing
cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed.
2. Complete terminations and flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of roofing system.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining
roofing.
3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install modified bituminous membrane base flashing over cant strips and other sloping
and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to
substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 200 mm above roofing
membrane and 100 mm onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt
roofing cement.
D. Install roofing membrane flashing where metal flanges and edgings are set on
membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Roof Drains: Set 760-by-760-mm metal flashing in bed of roofing-manufacturer-
approved asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing
with roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 150 mm beyond
edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane,
metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
F. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF BALLAST (for non-accessible / non-used roofs)
A. Immediately after placement of protection board apply stone ballast (gravel) on non-
accessible / non-used roofs.
B. Apply stone ballast (gravel) layer in uniform thickness according to drawings.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel
to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Engineer.
C. Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with
copies to Engineer and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free
of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to
warranty requirements.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Work measured by area shall be measured flat. No allowance will be made for overlaps.
C. Work measured by length shall be measured net and no allowance will be made for
overlaps.
D. Where work is measured by area no deduction shall be made for openings not exceeding
0.5 m2.
A. Area (m2), accounted for separately:
1. Waterproofing
2. Protection of waterproofing
3. Drainage panels
B. Length (m), accounted for separately:
1. Accessories like flashings, capping and metal fixing strips
2. Waterproofing of movement joints
C. Number of items, accounted for separately:
3. Penetrations, transitions and closures in the context of the waterproofing
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all waterproofing
materials, protection of applied waterproofing, equipment, tools, storage facilities, all
labour, coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality
assurance, cleaning and temporary protection.
B. Material or work, which does not conform to specification, shall be removed or
replaced at Contractor’s expense.
measured separately:
1. Scaffolding
2. Re-excavation of working spaces outside the walls

4. Preparation of mock-up as required by the Engineer
5. Primers, bonding compounds, adhesives and keying mixes
6. Applying coatings by brush or spray
7. Sloping and curved work to coatings
8. Work of any width, height or girth
9. Work laid to falls and cross falls, and intersections on sloping work
10. Cutting, notching, bending, fair edges and jointing, including extra material for
laps to sheet work
11. Raking, stepped and vertical work to skirting and the like
12. Edges, angles, intersections and the like, turning into grooves including extra
material wedging and sealing
13. Angle fillets, battens and nailing strips
14. Linings to sumps, outlets, gargoyles, dishing to gullies and the like
15. Holes for pipes and the like, forming collars and sealing.
16. 3.2 mm Bituminous protection board, internal and external corners, seam
jointing, different attachment methods, counter flashing, expansion joints and
control joints.

SECTION 07 7233 - ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roof hatches complete in place as defined herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
"Notice to Proceed", submit:
1. Manufacturer's data, catalogue cuts, dimensioned drawings, and other data
needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements and to enable
proper preparation of the roof opening.
2. Shop Drawings: Required.
A. Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
A. Delivery: Deliver all roof hatch components, all properly packaged and identified
with the manufacturer's name and product name to the job-site.
B. Storage: Store all components at the job-site in a location where directed by the
Consultant or Architect where they will be safe from damage until installation.
C. Handling: All roof hatch components shall be handled prior to and during installation
in a manner to prevent damage to all the components and adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION OF ROOF HATCHES
A. Roof access hatch (size as indicated on drawings). Frame shall be 0.45 mm
galvanized steel and shall have a 300 mm high curb, 88 mm pre-drilled mounting
flange, 25 mm fibreboard insulation, integral cap flashing and finished with a Safety
Red powder coat finish. All hardware shall be corrosion resistant and all fasteners
shall be self-locking type.
B. Cover shall be 0.45 mm galvanized steel with a 0.7 mm galvanized steel liner with a
core of 25 mm rigid foam insulation.
C. Cover operation shall be assisted with a compression spring and include a hold open
arm with vinyl grip to lock hatch in the open position, locking devices having an
inside and outside handle and inside padlock hasp.
D. Cover shall be mounted to a heavy duty hinge & pivot pins and have a continuously
extruded EPDM gasket around entire perimeter under cover.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 7233 Roof hatches

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provisions in
the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install a prepared curb in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
approved by the Consultant or Architect, anchoring all components into position for
long life under hard use.
C. Put operating components through at least five complete operating cycles, adjusting
as required and achieving optimum ease of operation.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding
0.5 m2.
4.2 Units of Measurement
A. Roof hatches will be enumerated according to different size, type, material and finish.
5.1 GENERAL
equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples,
coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality
1. Painting of concealed surfaces
2. Brackets, cleats and any other holding devices
3. Sealing of joints
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 7233 Roof hatches


SECTION 07 9500 - EXPANTION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General: Provide roof expansion joint assemblies that, when installed, remain
watertight within movement limitations specified by manufacturer.
1.2 REFERENCES
Dip Process
2. ASTM C665 - 12 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing
3. ASTM D1056 - 14 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials -
4. ASTM D4586 / D4586M - 07(2012) e1 Standard Specification for Asphalt
Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, construction details,
material and finish descriptions, installation instructions, and dimensions of
individual components.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, joints, splices, locations
of joints and splices, anchorage details, intersections, transitions, fittings, and
attachments to other Work. Where joint assemblies change planes, provide isometric
drawings depicting how components interconnect to achieve continuity.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal-flanged, bellows-type roof expansion joint
assemblies approved by roofing membrane manufacturer and that are part of roofing
membrane warranty.
1.5 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate delivery and installation of expansion joint assemblies to prevent damage
and provide timely integration of units with roofing membranes and flashing.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner
of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by roof expansion assembly
manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace roof expansion assemblies
that leak, deteriorate in excess of rates specified in manufacturer's published product
literature, or otherwise fail to perform within specified warranty period.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 07 9500 EXPANTION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES


C. Verify available warranties on units and components and insert number below. Many
published warranty periods do not exceed two years.
D. Warranty Period: 15 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip zinc-coating designation
G90, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and either commercial steel or forming
steel, minimum 0.5 mm thick.
A. Roof Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C 665.
C. Flexible Cellular Sponge or Expanded Rubber: ASTM D 1056.
2.3 BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard assemblies of sizes and types indicated,
including prefabricated units for corner and joint intersections and horizontal and
vertical transitions including those to other building expansion joints, splicing units,
adhesives, coatings, and other components as recommended by joint unit
manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate assemblies specifically for
applications indicated.
B. Metal-Flanged, Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Assemblies: Provide assemblies
consisting of exposed polymeric sheet over foam bellows, securely anchored at both
edges to 75 to 100 mm wide sheet metal nailing flanges, either flat or angle formed to
fit curbs as required. Insulate bellows with closed-cell, flexible rubber or plastic
foam not less than 8 mm thick; adhere bellows to underside of polymeric sheet.
1. Polymeric Sheet: EPDM, 60 mils thick.
2. Metal Flanges: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, minimum 0.5 mm thick.
3. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard, flexible, continuous, polymeric
moisture barrier looped under roof expansion assembly covers at locations
indicated. Fill space with blanket-type, glass-fiber insulation.
2.4 COMPRESSIBLE TUBE TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint
substrates, proved for roofing applications indicated as recommended by the roofing
membrane manufacturer based on the following:
1. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining,
non-waxing, non-extruding strips of closed-cell polyethylene foam,
nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-out-gassing in un-ruptured state
and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
2. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, or EPDM tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to -32 °C. Provide products with
low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to


control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant

performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof
expansion assemblies and materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Coordinate installation of roof expansion joint assembly materials and associated
work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements.
C. Extend roof expansion joint assemblies over the elements in the construction profile
indicated, with factory-fabricated transitions to provide continuous, uninterrupted,
waterproof roof expansion assemblies.
D. Splice roof expansion joint assemblies with materials provided by roof expansion
assembly manufacturer for this purpose, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to provide continuous, uninterrupted, waterproof roof expansion
assemblies.
E. Provide uniform profile of expansion joint assembly throughout length of each
installation; do not stretch polymeric sheets.
F. Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Assemblies
1. Install mineral-fiber blanket insulation to fill joint space within joint and
moisture barrier at locations indicated.
2. Bed anchorage flanges in cement or sealant recommended by manufacturer
and securely nail to curbs and cant strips as recommended by manufacturer,
but not less than 150 mm o.c.
3. On single-ply roofing, install roof expansion joint assemblies in the manner
indicated, complying with manufacturer's instructions. Anchor to curbs and
seal to membrane with sealant compatible with roofing membrane and
expansion joint assembly. Cover flanges with stripping or flashing and
install according to requirements of the specified roofing system."
G. Compressible Tubes: Install to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install tubes of type specified, appropriate to application and position
required to produce the cross-sectional shapes that allow expansion
performance of roofing membrane.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of compressible tubes.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear compressible tubes.
2. Provide uniform profile of expansion joint assembly throughout length of
each installation; coordinate with roofing membrane manufacturer.
3.2 PROTECTION


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer that ensures roof expansion joint assemblies are without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

FOR
DIVISION 08: OPENINGS
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 Openings

SECTION 08 1300 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment
and materials, and performing all operations in connection with the production and
installation of metal doors and frames.
B. Section includes
1. Metal door frames of steel, aluminum or stainless steel
2. Steel flush door assemblies
3. Steel door sets as fire-; thermal- or sound rated assemblies
4. Steel panel doors
5. Steel panel doors as fire rated- and/or smoke control doors
6. Aluminum panel doors
7. Aluminum panel doors as smoke control doors
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Standard Organization (ISO)
1. ISO 209:2010 Aluminum and aluminum alloys -- Chemical composition
2. ISO 209-1:2007 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys -- Chemical
composition and forms of products -- Part 1: Chemical composition
3. ISO 209-2:2007 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys -- Chemical
composition and forms of products -- Part 2: Forms of products
4. ISO 1461:2009 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles -- Specifications and test methods
5. ISO 3573:2012 Hot-rolled carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing
qualities
6. ISO 3574:2012 Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing
qualities
7. ISO 3575:2011 Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of
commercial and drawing qualities
8. ISO 3934:2012 Rubber, vulcanized and thermoplastic -- Preformed gaskets
used in buildings -- Classification, specifications and test methods
9. ISO 5002:2013 Hot-rolled and cold-reduced electrolytic zinc-coated carbon
steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities
10. ISO 6361-2:2011Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys -- Sheets, strips
and plates - Part 2: Mechanical properties
11. ISO 6361-1:2011 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys -- Sheets, strips
and plates - Part 1: Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 1300 Metal doors and frames

12. ISO 6362-1:2012 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys -- Extruded
rods/bars, tubes and profiles -- Part 1: Technical conditions for inspection
and delivery
13. ISO 6442:2014 Door leaves -- General and local flatness -- Measurement
method
14. ISO 8270:2009 Door sets -- Soft heavy body impact test
15. ISO 8271:2009 Door leaves -- Determination of the resistance to hard body
impact
16. ISO 11600:2009 Building construction -- Jointing products -- Classification
and requirements for sealants
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM E90 - 09 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
2. ASTM C1363 - 11 Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of
Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box
Apparatus
3. ASTM E413 - 16 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
C. American National Standards Institution (ANSI)
1. ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003 (R2009) Recommended Practice for Hardware
Reinforcing
D. British Standards
1. BS 4652:1995 Specification for zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
2. BS 5277:1976, EN 24:1975 Doors. Measurement of defects of general
flatness of door leaves
3. BS 6496:1984 Specification for powder organic coatings for application
and stoving to aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections for
external architectural purposes, and for the finish on aluminum alloy
extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coated with powder organic
4. BS 6497:1984 Specification for powder organic coatings for application
and stoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections and preformed
steel sheet for windows and associated external architectural purposes, and
for the finish on galvanized steel sections and preformed sheet coated with
powder organic coatings
E. Codes
1. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Provide product data for each type of door and frame specified, including
details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core,
label compliance, sound and insulation ratings, profiles and finishes and
manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Provide manufacturer’s certificates for all elements indicated showing
compliance with referenced standards and/ or requirements of local
authorities.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard and custom
made metal doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations
of door types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements,
and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items
2. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on contract drawings (if available).
C. Samples
1. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s color charts
showing full range of colors or patterns available for factory-finished doors
and frames.
2. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required,
prepared on samples not less than 10 by 15 cm and of the same thickness and
material indicated for the final unit of work.
D. Quality Control Submittals
1. Documented experience of contractor’s site supervisor(s).
2. Records and reports of Contractor’s Internal Q.C.
3. Records and reports of Contractor’s External Q.C.
A. Qualifications of Manufacturers
1. Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of
successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Qualifications of Installers
1. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of
work.
2. Contractor’s site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards
and at least five (5) years of documented experience.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
1. Contractor’s internal quality control shall include but not be limited to:
2. Checking supplier’s test certificates and certificates of compliance to
conform to specification and referenced standards prior to assembly or
installation.

3. Checking supplier’s delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specification.
1. Deliver metal doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide
protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to
prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.
1. System components and doors at building site shall be under cover. Place
units on minimum 10 cm high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented
plastic or canvas shelters, which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard
wrapper becomes wet during transport, remove carton immediately. Provide
minimum 5 cm spaces between stacked elements to promote air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel
1. Steel for doors and frames shall comply with the requirements of ISO 3573
and 3574 respectively ISO 3575 or equivalent Standards.
2. The thickness of framing-material shall not be less than 1.5 mm nominal.
3. Provide coating as indicated according to the following Standards:
4. Electrolytic coatings according to ISO 5002 or an equivalent Standard.
5. Hot dip galvanized coatings according to ISO 1461 or an equivalent
Standard.
6. Powder organic coating to galvanized steel according to BS 6497 or an
equivalent
Standard.
7. Metallic zinc-rich priming paint, complying with BS 4652 or an equivalent
Standard.
B. Aluminum
1. Extruded profiles and plates of aluminum or aluminum -alloys for doors and
frames shall comply with the requirements of ISO 209, 6361 and 6362 or
equivalent Standards.
2. Externally used aluminum shall be surface-treated as indicated according to
the following Standards:
3. Anodized finish complying with ISO 7599 or an equivalent Standard
4. Powder organic coating complying with BS 6496 or an equivalent Standard.
C. Gaskets
1. Gaskets shall be replaceable and made of rubber material complying with
ISO 3934 or an equivalent Standard.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Metal Door Frames
1. Standard Metal Door Frames
a. Wrap around frames (U-shaped)
b. Butt-type frames (U-shaped)
c. Z-type frames (Z-shaped)
d. Wrap around/ knock down frames for dry-walls (U-shaped)
2. General
a. Provide metal door frames of types and styles indicated on drawings
and schedules, complying with ANSI/SDI 100 or an equivalent
Standard.
b. Fabricate metal door frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free
from defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal according to
schedules and drawings to required sizes and profiles.
c. Frames shall consist of jambs, head, and where applicable transom
and sill. Corners shall be welded, or rigidly joined together by
mechanical means. Provide frames of material indicated in
schedules.
d. Internal frames: The bases of internal frames shall be braced with
adjustable base ties to hold the frames rigid during transit and
erection.
e. External frames: Provide a sill fixed to the base of the frame to suit
the frame profile. Frames set flush with the outside wall shall have a
weather-stripping bead at the top of the head to prevent water
penetration to the inside.
f. Fasteners: Each jamb shall be provided with three fastening devices,
made of galvanized mild steel of minimum thickness 1,5 mm.
Fasteners shall be concealed wherever possible. For exposed
fastening provide countersunk flat head screws.
B. Hardware Application
1. Mortar guards shall be welded in the frame where cut-outs are provided for
lock strike plates, bolts and hinges.
2. Hinges: Frames shall be prepared for mounting of screwed-on standard
hinges with reinforcing plates of 2,5 mm minimum thickness, adjustable in 3
ways, and fixed with countersunk screws. Provide number of hinges as
indicated.
3. Lock strike plates for single doors shall be adjustable and either galvanized
or of stainless steel, depending on framing material.
C. Gaskets
1. Provide pre-formed gaskets of neoprene or similar material acceptable to the
Engineer, on jambs, heads or transoms for internal frames.
2. Provide weather stripping for external frames on all 4 sides.
D. Finish:

1. Steel frames for internal use shall be zinc-coated; minimum thickness not
less than 15 micrometer, and treated with one coat of suitable priming paint.
2. Steel frames for external use and in corrosive atmosphere shall be hot-dip
galvanized with a minimum layer of 350 g/m2. Alternatively they may be
made of hot-dip galvanized steel sheet. Cut ends shall be protected with a
metallic zinc-rich priming paint. Galvanized surfaces shall be treated with
one coat of suitable priming paint.
3. Aluminum frames shall be either anodized with min. thickness 20
micrometer or powder organic coated with min. thickness 60 micrometer, as
indicated in schedules.
E. Custom Size Metal Door Frames
1. If frames are requested in special measurements, provide them according to
the specified grades, based on the fabrication of the standard sizes. In case of
frame size being greater than any standard frame, fabricate these frames
according to the requirements of the highest grade.
F. Standard Steel Flush Door Assemblies
1. Frames
a. Provide frames of types and styles as shown on drawings and
schedules.
b. Except on weather-stripped frames or otherwise indicated, rubber
buffers not less than 10 mm diameter and 2 mm thick, shall be fixed
in the rebate; three on strike jambs of single-door frames and two on
heads of double-door frames.
G. Door Leaves
1. Provide hollow steel door leaves of types, styles and grades as shown on
drawings and schedules similar to ANSI/SDI 100 or an equivalent Standard.
Use minimum 1 mm thick cold rolled steel for faces. Both faces shall have
metal sheeting of one piece without any joints. Leaves shall be rebated on
three sides; thickness shall not be less than 40 mm.
2. Doors shall be internally reinforced to resist impact and to ensure flatness.
They shall comply with ISO 8270, 8271 and 6442 or an equivalent Standard.
3. Louvers: Provide sight proof stationary louvers for interior doors where
indicated. Louver blades produced of 1,2 mm cold-rolled steel bend three
times and set into 1,0 mm frame.
4. Vision glazing: Provide cut-outs for vision-glazing in indicated sizes. Cut-
outs shall have glazing stops and beads, fixed with countersunk, oval-headed,
nickel-plated or stainless steel screws, depending on framing material.
Glazing stops of aluminum shall be fixed by clip-on method. Glazing shall be
done in dry glazing method, using pre-formed neoprene gaskets or similar
material acceptable to the Engineer. Set glazing only after finish coats have
been applied. Provide glass as indicated in schedules.
H. Finish Hardware Preparation
1. Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish
hardware, including cut-outs, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance

with ‘Finish Hardware Schedule’ and templates provided by hardware
suppliers.
2. Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling
and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at site.
3. Position finishes hardware in accordance with standards.
4. Provide hardware according to ‘Hardware Schedule’.
I. Finish
1. Internal steel doors shall have a zinc-coating of average minimum thickness
not less than 15 micrometer complying with ISO 5002 or an equivalent
Standard, and treated with one coat of suitable priming paint.
2. External and internal steel doors subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be
hot-dip galvanized with a minimum layer of 350 g/m2, complying with the
requirements of ISO 1461 or an equivalent Standard. Alternatively they may
be made of hot-dip galvanized steel sheet. Cut ends shall be protected with a
metallic zinc-rich priming paint, complying with BS 4652 or an equivalent
Standard. They shall be treated with one coat of suitable priming paint.
J. Fire Rating
1. Fire rated door sets shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 80
and be tested and labeled according to ASTM E152 or equivalent Standards.
Testing and labeling shall be done by an authorized and independent
Laboratory. They shall be provided according to the requested ratings in
schedules.
2. Louvers: If louvers are required they shall be of standard size for fire rated
doors and fuse linked for automatic closing in case of fire.
3. Glazing: Any vision glazing in these doors shall comply with the required
fire rating.
4. Hardware: Provide these doors complete with locks, bolting hardware and
hinges. If door closers are not specified provide one non load-bearing spring
hinge in the centre of the door. Double leaf doors shall have door closers for
both leaves and a door closing regulator. Provide further hardware according
to ‘Hardware Schedule’.
K. Aluminum Panel Doors
1. Provide aluminum doors as single or double doors, to door- or ceiling height,
with or without sidelights, according to drawings and schedules.
2. Aluminum Door Frames
a. Provide aluminum frames such as jambs, heads, transoms and
mullions according to drawings and schedules, made of extruded
profiles complying with ISO 6362 or an equivalent Standard.
b. Fasteners: Provide three, none-visible fasteners for each jamb; one
additional on each side for heights above 2,20 m. Frames for double
leaf doors shall have one additional fastener at the centre of the head
and if existing one at the sill.
c. Gaskets: Frames for operable doors shall have gaskets on three sides.

d. Sills: If sills are necessary for the strength of the frame they shall be
flush with the finished floor. Frames for double leaf doors shall have
a sill.
3. Aluminum Door Leaves
a. Provide aluminum frames for door leaves, such as stiles and rails
according to drawings and schedules, made of extruded profiles
complying with ISO 6362 or an equivalent Standard.
b. Stops and Beads: Stops around solid and glazed panels shall be
integral with the profiles for stiles and rails. Glazing beads shall be
fixed by clip-on method.
c. Panels: Solid panels shall be manufactured as sandwich elements
with layers of aluminum sheet of 1,0 mm minimum nominal
thickness on both sides, without any visible joints. The core filling
shall be rigid enough to produce a flush surface, free of warp and
buckle and comply with ISO 6442 or an equivalent Standard. Unless
otherwise indicated provide panels with U-values max. 2,5 W/m2. K.
4. Glazing
a. Doors shall be glazed with tempered-, wired- or laminated glass,
depending on requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. For
glazing above door height there are no special requirements.
b. Doors shall be factory pre-glazed to the greatest possible extend by
dry-glazing method, using pre-formed neoprene gaskets or similar
material acceptable to the Engineer. Provide glazing as indicated in
schedules.
5. Hardware
a. Position finishes hardware in accordance with standards. Hinges
shall be fastened concealed. Use countersunk stainless steel or
nickel-plated screws. For further hardware details see hardware
schedule.
6. Finish
a. Provide finish as indicated in schedules.
b. Anodized finish shall be of min. thickness 20 micrometer.
c. Powder organic coating shall be of min. thickness 60 micrometer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Prefabrication / Workmanship
1. Complete fabrication including application of hardware and other work to the
greatest possible degree in the workshop. Perform cutting, drilling and
grinding of metalwork before applying of finishes. If finishes (anodization)
have to be applied before fabrication, careful handling is necessary to avoid
any damage and possible rejection on site.
2. Sizing: The profiles used for frames and doors shall be dimensioned
adequately to carry the loads of the individual door sizes. Use manufacturer
tables for dimensioning.

3. Welding Fabricate steel frames with mitered corners and fully welded.
Transoms and mullions may be fastened by butt welding. Grind exposed
welds smooth and fully remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore
mechanical finish. Avoid distortion and discoloration on finished surfaces of
stainless steel when welding.
4. Reinforcing Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements
and for hardware application.
5. Dissimilar metals: Separate dissimilar metals with suitable separation layers.
Do not use coatings containing lead.
6. Continuity: Maintain accurate relationship of planes and angles. Provide
secure attachment and support for aluminum members at mechanical joints
with hairline fit of contacting members.
7. Fasteners: Provide either non-corrosive or corrosion protected fasteners and
conceals wherever possible.
8. Drainage: Fabricate stops for solid panels and glazing for external doors in a
way that any water and/ or condensation can be drained to the exterior.
B. Shop Assembly
1. Any frames and doors shall be assembled completely in the shop and shall
not be dismantled for shipping.
C. Shop Finishing
1. General
a. All stainless steel and aluminum doors and frames shall be shop
finished. Steel doors and frames shall be shop finished as indicated in
the respective paragraphs and items. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent any damage while shipping to the site.
2. Uniformity of Finish
a. Abutting members shall not have an integral color or texture
variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample
submittal.
D. Tolerances
1. Produce steel and aluminum elements within tolerances of DIN 18203 -2 or
an equivalent Standard.
E. Inspections
1. The Engineer shall be informed when the first unit is produced to allow for
inspection before production of the total amount and also before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine existing conditions for compliance with schedules and for completeness of
other trades supposed to be finished before starting of window installation.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

A. Examine doors prior to installation. Minor damages may be repaired on site provided
refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Engineer;
otherwise replace damaged items as directed.
B. Verify that doors comply with the requirements in schedules for type, size, location
and swing characteristic.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install standard and custom steel doors, frames and accessories in accordance with
final shop drawings, manufacturer’s data and as herein specified.
B. Hardware
1. Setting of Standard Metal Door Frames
a. Door frames may be installed prior to, or after wall construction,
depending on the Standard they are produced to, and/or the location
of installation.
2. Prior to Wall Construction
a. Comply with provisions of SDI -105 - ‘Recommended Erection
Instructions for Steel Frames’, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced
securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
c. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to
hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb.
d. Install fire rated frames in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 80 Standard
and manufacturers shop drawings.
3. After Wall Construction
a. Comply with provisions of SDI 105 - ‘Recommended Erection
Instructions for Steel Frames’, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Set Wrap around Frames in concrete and masonry construction
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
voids are filled with grout.
c. Butt-type and quoin-type frames: Set these frames accurately in
position, plumbed and aligned and fix it with 3 anchors per jamb
adjacent to hinge location at hinge jamb and at corresponding heights
on strike jamb. Fix the anchors with dowels and bolts. Use minimum
two bolts of 8 mm diameter per anchor. Use 4 anchors for heights
above 220 cm.
d. Install fire rated frames in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 80 Standard
and manufacturers shop drawings.
e. At dry-wall construction use special knock-down and slip-on frames.
Fix it according to frame- and dry-wall manufacturer’s requirements.
4. Setting of Standard Steel Door Assemblies

2019
a. For setting of frames see item ‘Setting of Standard Metal Door
Frames’.
b. Fit door leaves accurately to frames for uniform clearance at each
edge.
c. Fire rated door sets: Install fire rated door sets accurately according
to manufacturer’s instructions and meet requirements of
ANSI/NFPA 80 Standard.
d. Door leaves shall be taken off after installation and stored at a safe
and convenient place - coordinate with the Engineer.
5. Setting of Panel Doors.
a. Placing frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and
aligned. Fix each jamb with three dowels and bolts of 8 mm
diameter. Use four bolts for heights above 220 cm. Fix threshold and
head of double-leaf frames also to bottom or slab respectively.
b. Joints: Joints to surrounding construction shall be foamed and sealed
as indicated in drawings and schedules. Use adequate elastic sealing
component complying with ISO 11600 or an equivalent Standard.
Joints shall be cleaned and if necessary be primed before filling.
Width and depth of sealer shall be similar - see also detail drawings.
c. Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Allow 6 mm
clearance to finish floor level.
d. In case floor finish is not yet completed, door leaves shall be taken
off and stored at a safe and convenient place - coordinate with the
Engineer.
A. Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames
undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
B. Clean doors and frames prior to final inspection and remove protective plastic
wrappings from prefinished doors.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect frames and doors as recommended by manufacturer to ensure that they are
without damage at time of handing over. If necessary, or requested by the Engineer,
remove door leaves and store at a secure place.
4.1 GENERAL
A. For doors, door frames with and without side- and/or fanlights the ‘coordinating size’
shall be taken as basis for measurement.
B. Double-leaf doors or doors with side- and/or fanlights will be considered as one unit.
C. The glass will not be measured separately.
D. Hardware which is specified to be supplied with the door will not be measured
separately.
E. Hardware for fire-rated doors will not be measured separately.

2019
A. Metal door frames and door sets shall be enumerated. Setting and fitting will be
included with the items.
B. Steel and aluminium panel doors shall be enumerated. Setting and fitting will be
included with the items.
C. Hardware which is specified with the doors and all hardware for fire-rated doors will
be included with the items.
5.1 GENERAL
materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, labour,
1. Setting of door frames, fitting and hanging of door leaves including all fixing
materials, i.e. anchorage, bolts etc.
2. Establishing heights of finished floor with reference to installation locations.
3. Adjusting, cleaning and protection until final hand-over.
4. Removal and storage and re-assemble of door leave when so directed by the
Engineer.

2019
SECTION 08 1400 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Wood doors and metal frames required for this work are indicated
on the drawings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 – Section “Rough Carpentry”.
2. Division 08 – Section “Door Hardware.”
3. Division 09 – Section “Painting and Coatings.”
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS)
1. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS); 2009.
1. ASTM C1036-11E1 Standard Specification for Flat Glass
C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services.
D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2005.
E. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective’s; 2013.
F. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire
Protection Association; 2012.
G. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
H. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's product data and specifications before
starting work.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete detailed shop drawings of specified doors.
C. Samples: Provide representative samples in small section of all materials to be used
in the work, including hardware and accessories.
1. Veneer door faces. Show the full range of color, texture and pattern.
2. Samples for verification in the form and size indicated.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 1400 Wood doors

3. Corners sections and doors 400 mm2 with door faces and edging representing
each species and solid lumber required.
4. Frames for light openings and architrave 150 mm long for each material, type
and finish required.
A. Doors shall comply with:
1. National Wood Window and Door Association I.S.1-A-97 (NWWDA)
standards.
2. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) 7th edition.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver doors to job site until needed. Coordinate delivery with job progress.
1. Store doors in a flat position elevated a minimum of 100 mm above cured
concrete slab.
2. Ship doors individually wrapped/cartooned.
3. Identify each door by number/tag according to accepted shop drawings.
B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the A/E and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's written guarantee covering defects in materials, quality of
work, and warp exceeding 6 mm.
B. Guarantee shall be for the life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stile and Rail Door Construction: Oak and/or Beech Wood
1. Thickness: 44 mm.
2. Oak and/or Beech Wood Framing.
3. Oak and/or Beech Wood Veneer.
4. Solid wood core.
5. Lock Blocks: Both sides, minimum 100mm x 500 mm cantered.
6. Adhesive: Type I waterproof glue.
7. Guarantee: Standard one year (ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97
Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), Wood Windows and Glass Doors). All doors shall
carry identification markings.
B. Solid Core Flush Door: Softwood with Oak and/or Beech Wood Veneer:
2. Oak and/or Oak and/or Beach Wood frame.

4. Panel: 10 mm thick tempered glass.
7. Guarantee: Standard one year. All doors shall carry identification markings.
C. Hollow Core Swedish Wood Door with Oak and/or Beech Wood Veneer:
2. Core: Expanded cellular, uniformly bonded to the faces.
3. Facing: 5 mm plywood or MDF with Oak and/or Beech Wood Veneer both
sides as required.
7. Guarantee: Standard one year (ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97
Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), Wood Windows and Glass Doors)
8. All doors shall carry identification markings.
D. Post form laminate door with soft wood frame. Refer to Drawings.
E. The use of particle board or chip board, of any grade, is not allowed.
2.2 WOOD FRAMES AND ARCHITRAVES
A. Solid Oak Wood frames and architraves for doors specified in Articles 2.2.A and
2.2.B. above.
B. Solid Swedish Wood frames and architraves for doors specified in Article 2.2.C.
above.
C. Wood frames and architraves shall be fabricated to size and configurations shown on
drawings.
2.3 VISION PANELS
A. Float glass conform to ASTM C1036. Provide vision panels with required sizes.
1. Glass Thickness: 4 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2.4 VENT LOOVERS
A. Aluminum vent loovers shall be formed from not less than 2.34 mm aluminum
extrusions shall be 6063-T6 alloy and tempered with a satin clear anodized 200-R1
finish. Form 44 mm deep frames with mitered or coped members, with continuously
welded or riveted and soldered joints. Set blades at 45 degrees unless otherwise
indicated. Form ends of the blades flat against frame jamb and weld or rivet and
solder joints to ensure that joints will be tight.
2.5 FOAM SUBFRAME
A. Foam Sub-Frame: Manufacturer’s standard foamed-in-place polyurethane rigid foam
insulation, R-5 per inch or better.
2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to sizes and design indicated on Drawings, pre-fitted for openings and
properly beveled.
B. Pre-fit Clearances: 3 mm top and sides and 6 mm above scheduled finished flooring
material.
1. Refer to the Door Schedule for additional undercut as specified.
2. Bevel angle 3 mm per 50 mm of door thickness.
3. Cut-Outs:
a. Make cut-outs at factory for glass and louver openings to size and
shape indicated on Drawings.
b. Allow a minimum of 125 mm from cut-out to edges of doors.
c. Provide loose pre-metered stops to match door face for field
application.
4. Metal Louvers: Steel construction, painted, of size, type, and profile shown.
5. Hardware Preparation: Pre-machine at factory for scheduled hardware using
templates and directions furnished by Hardware Supplier.
a. Field installation is optional.
6. Maximum tolerances for doors are as follows:
a. Size: + 1.5 mm.
b. Warp: 6 mm along vertical edge of diagonal.
c. Squareness: 6 mm length of diagonals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area before hanging.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install according to manufacturers written instructions.
B. Place the door in the door opening. Position the unit so it's equally spaced into wall
opening. Fill gap both sides of frame and top to adjoining wall surfaces with foamed
in-place urethane.
C. Job-Fit Doors:
1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated.
2. Do not trim stiles and rails more than limits set by manufacturer or allowed
with fire-rated doors.
3. Machine doors for hardware.
4. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
D. Fitting Clearances:
1. Non-Rated Doors:
a. 3 mm at jambs and heads.

b. 1.5 mm per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors.
c. 3 mm from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering.
2. Threshold: 6 mm clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
3. Bevel non-rated doors 3 mm to 50 mm at lock and hinge edges.
E. Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating” for finishing of job site finished
doors.
A. Replace or re-hang hinge bound doors not swinging or operating freely.
B. Leave installation clean and free from finger marks, dirt, and other substances and
ready for painting.
4.1 GENERAL
A. For doors, door frames with and without side- and fanlights the ‘coordinating size’
shall be taken as basis for measurement.
B. Double-leaf doors or doors with side or fanlights will be considered one unit.
C. All glass will not be measured separately.
D. Door frames will not be measured separately unless mentioned clearly in the bill of
quantities as a separate item.
E. Hardware which is specified to be supplied with the door will not be measured
separately unless it is clearly mentioned in the bill of quantities as a separate item.
F. Hardware for fire-rated doors will not be measured separately unless mentioned
clearly in the bill of quantities as a separate item.
A. Wood door leaves, door assemblies and door sets shall be enumerated. Fitting,
hanging and fixing will be included with the items.
B. Plastic door assemblies shall be enumerated. Fixing will be included with the items.
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing all
1. Fixing of door frames, fitting and hanging of door leaves inclusive of all
fixing materials, i.e. anchorages, bolts etc.

3. Adjusting, cleaning and protection of the works until final handing over.
4. Removal and storage of door leaves, frames and fitting as directed by the
Engineer
5. Costs of all tests shall be included in the unit price rates.
6. External Q. C. by Third Party.
7. Certifications.

SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Access doors and frames at wall location.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM F1069 - 87(2012) Standard Specification for Doors, Watertight,
Gastight/Airtight and Weather tight, Individually Dogged, for Marine Use
2. ASTM F1068-90(2003) Standard Specification for Doors, Double,
Gastight/Airtight, Individually Dogged, for Marine Use
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on unit construction, size, configuration, scheduled
locations, and attachment method.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames
for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C. Manufacturer’s installation instructions: Indicate any special installation criteria
requiring an interface with adjacent components.
A. Perform work in accordance with Design requirements.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Code for UL and FM requirements for fire rated access doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS
A. Walls - Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit: Aluminium frame and cement board
infill.
2.2 FABRICATION WALL UNITS
A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 6-mm aluminium.
B. Fabricate door panels of 6-mm cement board, double sheet with integral non-
combustible insulation filler.
C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit.
D. Hardware:
1. Hinge: 175° stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin.
2. Lock: Screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam lock.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Aluminum Finish: to match wall finish.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 3113 Access doors and frames

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Coordinate with work of other trades.
C. Verify sizes of openings prior to installation.
D. Install frames plumb and level in opening, and secure rigidly in place.
E. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work-requiring access.
3.2 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
B. Protect installation during construction activities.
C. Adjust unit for a smooth operation.
4.1 GENERAL
A. Hardware which is specified to be supplied with the access door will not be measured
separately unless it is clearly mentioned in the bill of quantities as a separate item.
A. Access door leaves, door assemblies and door sets shall be enumerated. Fitting,
hanging and fixing will be included with the items.
B. Plastic door assemblies shall be enumerated. Fixing will be included with the items
5.1 GENERAL
1. Fixing of access door frames, fitting and hanging of door leaves inclusive of
all fixing materials, i.e. anchorages, bolts etc.
3. Adjusting, cleaning and protection of the works until final handing over.
4. Removal and storage of door leaves when directed by the Engineer
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 3113 Access doors and frames


SECTION - 08 3513 FOLDING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Bi-Folding Aluminum Doors
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
C. Aluminum Association (AA)
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply with:
1. Applicable provisions of AAMA Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual
for design, materials, fabrication and installation of component parts.
B. Design Requirements: Bi-Folding Aluminum Door, Door frame and hardware that is
engineered to allow doors in both directions to be folded to the side of an opening.
C. Performance Requirements: Each assembly shall be tested by a recognized testing
laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods.
1. Resistance to corner racking shall be tested by the dual moment corner joint
strength test.
2. Structural uniform load shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
A. Single Source Responsibility:
1. Obtain entrances, storefronts, ribbon walls, window walls, curtain walls,
window systems, and finish through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the specified
performance
1.5 WARRANTY
A. System shall be warranted against failure and/or deterioration of metals due to
manufacturing process for a period of two (2) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Bi-Folding Aluminum Door, 45 mm
1. Vertical stile: 50 mm or 125 mm.
2. Top rail: 90 mm or 130 mm.
3. Bottom rail: 75mm or 150 mm or 250 mm.
4. Glazing Insert: Snap-in type for 6 mm or 25 mm infill.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 5313 Folding doors


5. Door members: Extruded aluminum alloy (ASTM B221).

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Screws, fastening devices, and internal components:
1. Aluminum, stainless steel, or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A-
164 shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from
aluminum.
B. Glazing Gasket (compression-type design).
2.3 HARDWARE
A. Hardware for Bi-Folding Aluminum Door shall be furnished and installed by the
manufacturer and shall include the following standard hardware
1. Weather-stripping: A hard-backed polypore weather-strip shall be installed in
frame and interlockers and meeting stiles of bi-parting doors. Sliding panel
supplied with double sweep at sill.
2. Sill track: Aluminum
3. Stainless Steel Roller Guide Spindle
4. Guide Channel: aluminum
5. Top Guide Carrier/Hanger
6. Security lock.
7. Cylinders (interior and exterior).
2.4 FINISH
A. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum and components as indicated.
1. Anodic coating conforming with AA-M12C22A34/AA-M12C22A44.
2. Fluorocarbon Coating: AAMA 2605.2.
a. Resin: 70% PVDF.
b. Substrate: cleaned and pretreated with chromium phosphate.
c. Primer: Manufacturer’s standard resin base compatible coating.
3. Dry film thickness:
a. Extrusion: minimum 0.15 mil.
4. Color: As selected by Architect.
2.5 DOOR FABRICATION
A. Stiles and rails shall be tubular sections accurately joined, flush and hairline at
corners with heavy concealed reinforcement brackets secured with machine bolts,
with optional metal inert gas welding (MIG weld). Exposed screws not permitted.
B. Prepare internal reinforcement for hardware.
C. Custom hardware templates and physical hardware must be submitted prior to any
fabrication.
D. Glazing Gasket (compression-type design).


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATIONS
A. Examine conditions and verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers installation
instructions.
A. Contractors responsibility to make all necessary final adjustments to attain normal
operation of each door and its mechanical hardware


SECTION 08 4400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: install powder coated curtain wall system with required
glazing
1. Division 08 - 085113: ALUMINUM WINDOWS.
2. Division 08 - 088000: Glazing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA)
1. Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
2. CAN/CSA-S157-05/S157.1-05 (R2010) - Strength Design in Aluminum /
Commentary on CSA S157-05, Strength Design in Aluminum
B. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)
2. ASTM B449 - 93(2010)e1 Standard Specification for Chromates on
Aluminum
3. ASTM E283 – 04 (2012) Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air
Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen
4. ASTM E331 - 00(2009) Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Difference
6. ASTM E783 - 02(2010) Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air
Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors
7. ASTM E1105 - 00(2008) Standard Test Method for Field Determination of
Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference
C. British Specifications (BS)
1. BS 6496:1984 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and
stoving to aluminum alloy extrusions
2. BS 6497:1984 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and
stoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections
A. Curtain wall system performance requirements:
1. Wind loads: Provide Curtain Wall system; include anchorage, capable of

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 4400 - Curtain Wall And Glazed Assemblies

withstanding wind load design pressures of 70 kg/sq. m. inward and 35

kg/sq. m outward. The design pressures are based on the Egyptian code of
practice Ministerial Decree 45/1993 Edition.
2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.3 l/s· m2 at a static air pressure
differential of 300 Pa.
3. Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance
with ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547.
4. Structural performance shall be based on Aluminum Association
"Specification for Aluminum Structures" or CSA Standard CAN3-S157
"Strength Design in Aluminum". There shall be no deflection in excess of
L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit specified submittals in accordance
with “Conditions of the Contract” and Submittals Sections. Product data, shop
drawings, samples, and similar submittals
B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with
specified performance characteristics.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to “Conditions of the Contract” for project warranty
provisions.
B. Manufacturer’s Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s
warranty for curtain wall system as follows:
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the
project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event
later than six months from date of shipment by the Manufacturer.
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor)
to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of
work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product
manufacturer.
2. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing
structural calculations, applicable independent product test reports,
installation instructions, a review of the application method, customer
approval and periodic field service representation during construction.
B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project
requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and
manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time
requirements to avoid construction delays.


B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's

original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall
material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards
before, during and after curtain wall installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum (Curtain Wall and Components):
1. Material Standard: Extruded Aluminum, ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and
temper.
2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness
sufficient to meet the specified structural requirements.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be stainless steel.
B. Gaskets: Interior glazing gaskets shall be black closed cell neoprene sponge in vision
area. Exterior glazing gaskets and interior gaskets at spandrel areas shall be black
EPDM rubber.
C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation
between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.
2.3 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Sealants: Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section.
B. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with
minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet
enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. Vertical and
horizontal members shall be tubular extrusions designed for shear block
corner construction.
2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and
weatherproof.
3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Powder Coating Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prepare metal by a multistage cleaning process to thoroughly remove grease,
dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter.
2. Pre-treat prepared metal with chrome-phosphate conversion coating
according to ASTM B 449, Class 4; rinse; and dry thoroughly.


3. Apply thermosetting TGIC (Triglycidyl Isocyanurate) polyester powder

coating electro statically complying with BS 6496 and 6497 except with a
cured-film thickness not less than 100 microns (0.10 mm).
a. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Source Quality: Provide aluminum curtain walls specified herein from a single
source.
1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum curtain wall are part of a
building enclosure system, including entrances, entrance hardware, windows,
storefront framing and related products, provide building enclosure system
products from a single source manufacturer.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been
previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive
curtain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer’s
acceptable tolerances.
1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop
drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid construction delays.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install curtain wall systems plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or
rack of frames with manufacturer’s prescribed tolerances and installation
instructions. Provide support and anchor in place.
1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources
of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points.
2. Glazing: Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with extruded
aluminum pressure plates anchored to the mullion using stainless steel
fasteners.
3. Water Drainage: Each light of glass shall be compartmentalized using joint
plugs and silicone sealant to divert water to the horizontal weep locations.
Weep holes shall be located in the horizontal pressure plates and covers to
divert water to the exterior of the building.
B. Related Products Installation Requirements:
1. Sealants (Perimeter): Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section.
2. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section.
A. Field Tests: Architect shall select curtain wall units to be tested as soon as a
representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and
cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s
representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and
units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount.


1. Testing: Testing shall be performed per ASTM E1105 by a qualified

independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing
and testing requirements.
a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E
783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount
indicated in the performance requirements or 0.45l/m2, whichever is
greater.
b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E
1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a
static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration
pressure but not less than 383 Pa.
B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site
visit by manufacturer’s field service representative.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during
construction. Protect aluminum curtain wall system from damage from grinding and
polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants.
B. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove
construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

5.1 GENERAL
A- Payment will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing
all material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all
labor, samples and mock-ups, co-coordinating work with other trades, checking,
examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
5.2- ANCILLARY WORKS TO BE INCLUDED IN THE UNIT PRICE RATES
A- The following ancillary works shall be included in the unit price rates and will not
be measured separately:
1- Fixing, including all fixing material, i.e. anchorage, bolts etc., shall be included
within unit prices.
2- Establishing heights of finished floor with reference to installation locations shall

be included in the unit prices.
3- Adjusting, cleaning and protection of the works until final handing over shall be
included in the unit prices.


SECTION 08 5113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Aluminum windows of type and size shown, complete with
hardware, related components and accessories of the following types:
1. Operable windows
B. Related Sections
1. Glazing: Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA)
1. AA 45 (2003) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1. AAMA 101 (2005) Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC)
and Wood Windows and Glass Doors
2. AAMA 1302 (1976) Voluntary Specifications for Forced-Entry Resistant
Aluminum Prime Windows
C. ASME International (ASME)
1. ASME B29.400 (2001) Combination, "H" Type Mill Chains, and Sprockets
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2. ASTM A666 - 15 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
4. ASTM B244 - 09(2014) Standard Test Method for Measurement of
Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive
Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current Instruments
6. ASTM D1056 - 14 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—
7. ASTM E283 - 04(2012) Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air
Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference
9. ASTM E2016 - 15 Standard Specification for Industrial Woven Wire Cloth
E. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA)
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 5113 Aluminum windows

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.16 (2013) Auxiliary Hardware
F. International Window Cleaning Association (IWCA)
1. ANSI IWCA I 14.1-2001 Standard for window cleaning
G. National Wood Window And Door Association (NWWDA)
1. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 (1997) Voluntary Guide Specifications for
Aluminum, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass
Doors
H. Society Of Automotive Engineers International (SAE)
1. SAE AMS 3110 (2001) Primer, Zinc Chromate.
I. The Society For Protective Coatings (SSPC)
1. SSPC Paint 101 (2004) Aluminum Alkyd Paint Leafing (Type I) and Non-
Leafing (Type II)
2. SSPC Paint 12 (2005) Paint Specification No. 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt
Mastic (Extra Thick Film)
J. Federal Specification
1. DD-G-451D; Glass, float or plate, sheet, figured (flat, for glazing, mirrors
and other uses)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessories: Mullions, interior trim, clips, anchors, fasteners, weather-stripping,
insect screens and other necessary components required for complete fabrication and
installation of window units.
B. Uncontrolled Water: Water not drained to the exterior, or water appearing on the
room side of the window.
A. Design and Performance Requirements: Provide products/systems capable of
withstanding design loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for
Project and pass AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Structural Load Test:
2. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Product
from basic wind speed indicated in kilometer per hour or meters per second
at 10 meters above grade, according to ASCE, Section 6, based upon mean
heights indicted on Drawings.
3. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass
edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 19 mm, whichever is less, at
design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA
101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations.
4. Lintel Deflection: Accommodate deflection of lintel without damage to
components, deterioration of seals, or movement between window and
perimeter framing.
5. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder
throughout assembly.

6. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit thermal expansion and
contraction of components to match perimeter opening construction.
7. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 1.68L/s /m² of wall
area, measured at reference differential pressure across assembly of 299 Pa
as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.
8. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with
test pressure difference of 290 Pa as defined by AAMA 101.
9. All glass shall be select quality complying with FS DD-G-451 D.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
1.6 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 Section - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Minimum of 1/2 full scale types of windows on project.
2. Identifying parts of window units by name and kind of metal or material,
show construction, locking systems, mechanical operators, trim, installation
and anchorages.
3. Include glazing details and standards for factory glazed units.
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Window.
2. Sash locks, keepers, and key.
D. Certificates:
1. Certificates as specified in paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2. Indicating manufacturers and installers qualifications.
3. Manufacturer's Certification that windows delivered to project are identical
to windows tested.
E. Test Reports:
1. Copies of test reports as specified in paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE.
F. Samples: Provide 150 mm length samples showing finishes, specified.
A. Approval by contracting officer is required of products or service of proposed
manufacturers and installers.
B. Approval will be based on submission of certification by Contractor that:
1. Manufacturer regularly and presently manufactures the specified windows as
one of its principal products.
2. Installer has technical qualifications, experience, trained personnel and
facilities to install specified items.
C. Provide all extruded aluminum windows from one source of manufacture.

D. Quality Certified Labels or certificate:
1. Certificates in lieu of label with copy of recent test report (not more than 4
years old) from an independent testing laboratory and certificate signed by
window manufacturer stating that windows provided comply with specified
requirements and AAMA 101/I.S.2 for type of window specified.
A. Protect windows from damage during handling and construction operations before,
during and after installation.
B. Store windows under cover, setting upright.
C. Do not stack windows flat.
D. Do not lay building materials or equipment on windows.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Furnish a written guarantee to the Employer, in an approved form, warranting that the
anodized finish will be non-fading, nonconvertible, and will remain permanently a
part of the metal surface for a period of warranty and 25 years design life after
acceptance of the building. State in the guarantee that any item showing failure
during the guarantee period will be replaced or refinished to the original condition, at
no cost to the Employer.
A. Field Measurements: Verify opening dimensions by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B. Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM B 221/ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-
T52
C. Stainless Steel Components: Conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304
D. Principal Frame and Sash Members: Aluminum Extrusions shall be 6063-T6 alloy
and tempered.
1. 1.8 mm minimum wall thickness.
E. Weather-strips: AAMA 101/I.S.2.
F. Interior Trim: The trim system shall be extruded. Roll formed or formed aluminum
materials shall not be acceptable.
1. The interior trim system shall consist of a mill finish aluminum clip
(minimum wall thickness 2.3 mm to anchor the window to the window
opening) and a finished aluminum cover (minimum wall thickness 1 mm).
The cover shall snap fit onto the clip, concealing all anchorage fasteners.
G. Insect Screening:
1. Regular mesh, 18 by 18, AAMA 101/I.S.2.

2. Aluminum with dark bronze anodized finish unless specified otherwise.
H. Fasteners: AAMA 101/I.S.2. Screws, bolts, nuts, rivets and other fastening devices to
be non-magnetic stainless steel.
1. Fasteners to be concealed when window is closed. Where wall thickness is
less than 3 mm thick provide backup plates or similar reinforcements for
fasteners.
2. Stainless steel self tapping screws may be used to secure Venetian blind
hanger clips, vent guide blocks, friction adjuster, and limit opening device.
3. Attach locking and hold-open devices to windows with concealed fasteners.
Provide reinforcing plates where wall thickness is less than 3 mm thick.
I. Hardware:
1. Locks: Two position locking bolts or cam type tamperproof custodial locks
with a single point control located not higher than five feet from floor level.
Locate locking devices in the vent side rail. Fastenings for locks and keepers
shall be concealed or non-removable.
2. Locking Device Strikes: Locate strikes in frame jamb. Strikes shall be
adjustable for locking tension. Fabricate strikes from Type 304 stainless steel
or white bronze.
3. Fabricate hinges of noncorrosive metal. Hinges may be either fully
concealed when window is closed or semi-concealed with exposed knuckles.
All exposed knuckle hinges shall have hospital tips, at both ends. Surface
mounted hinges will not be accepted.
4. Guide Blocks: Fabricate guide blocks of injection molded nylon. Install
guide block fully concealed in vent/frame sill.
5. Hardware for Emergency Ventilation of Windows:
a. Provide windows with a hold open linkage for emergency
ventilation.
b. Hold open hardware shall provide for maximum six inches of
window opening and shall include an adjustable friction shoe to
provide resistance when closing the window.
c. Handles shall be removable.
6. Hardware for Maintenance Opening of Windows: Opening beyond the six
inch position shall be accomplished with a window washers key. The release
device shall capture the key when window is in the open position.
7. Design operating device to prevent opening with standard tools, coins or bent
wire devices.
8. Aluminum accessories color shall match the windows.
J. Factory Glass and Glazing:
1. Tempered glass shall be factory glazed: Fully tempered glass ASTM C 1048,
(uncoated), Type 1 (transparent glass, flat). Quality q3 (glazing select).
Provide products complying with requirements indicated below for glass,
thickness, and manufacturing process that have been tested for surface and

edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength
according to 16 CFR, Part 1201 for Category II materials.
2. Thickness: 6 mm/12 mm/6 mm (double glass).
3. Color: Clear.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently
marked with certification label acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Hinges: Self-closing molded polymer with no external springs showing. UV-
stabilized material, self-lubricating, and weather-resistant. Adjustable self-
closing tension. Hinges meet pool barrier general codes.
6. Locks: Self-Latching Latch (key-lockable) OR Magnetic Knob Latch (key
lockable).
K. Aluminum Finish:
1. Electrostatic Powder Coating Finish.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication to exceed or meet requirements of Physical Load Tests, Air Infiltration
Test, and Water Resistance Test of AAMA 101/I.S.2.
B. Glazing:
1. Windows re-glazable without dismantling sash framing.
2. Design rabbet to suit glass thickness and glazing method specified.
3. Glaze from interior except where not accessible.
4. Provide removable extruded aluminum glazing beads.
C. Trim:
1. Trim includes casings, closures, and panning.
2. Fabricate to shapes shown of aluminum not less than 1.6 mm thick
3. Extruded or formed sections, straight, true, and smooth on exposed surfaces.
4. Exposed external corners mitered and internal corners coped; fitted with
hairline joints.
5. Reinforce 1.6 mm thick members with not less than 3 mm thick aluminum.
6. Except for strap anchors, provide reinforcing for fastening near ends and at
intervals not more than 305 mm between ends.
7. Design to allow unrestricted expansion and contraction of members and
window frames.
8. Secure to window frames with machine screws or expansion rivets.
9. Exposed screws, fasteners or pop rivets are not acceptable on exterior of the
casing or trim cover system.
D. Mullions: AAMA 101.
E. Sub-sills and Stools:

1. Fabricate to shapes shown of not less than 2 mm thick extruded aluminum.
2. One piece full length of opening with concealed anchors.
3. Sills turned up back edge not less than 6 mm. Front edges provide with drip.
4. Do not perforate for anchorage, clip screws, or other requirements.
F. Insect Screens:
1. AAMA 101/I.S.2.
2. Aluminum.
2.3 CASEMENT WINDOWS
A. AAMA 101/I.S.2; Type: // C-H65 // C-AW65//.
B. AAMA certified product to the AAMA 101/I.S.2. - 97 standard.
2.4 PROJECT-OUT/AWNING WINDOWS
A. AAMA 101/I.S.2; Type: // C-H65 // C-AW65//.
2.5 FIXED WINDOWS
A. AMMA 101/I.S.2; Type FW-AW80
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Windows shall be set plumb, level to a tolerance of not more than 1.5 millimeter in
3000 millimeter and in alignment without frame distortion and securely anchored in
place as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and the
approved drawings.
B. Fasteners shall be concealed except for specifically indicated mullion covers,
window-operating hardware, screen attachment hardware, and similar surface-applied
trim.
C. Ventilators and operating parts shall be protected against cement, lime, plaster,
adhesives, and other building material after installation and until completion.
D. Steel work shall be drilled and tapped for the attaching window units, trim, and
accessories. Where window units are set in prepared masonry openings, anchorage
items shall be placed during wall construction. Anchors and fasteners shall be
welded or bolted securely to the frame and shall be built-in, anchored, or bolted to the
building construction with sufficient anchors to hold each window unit firmly in
place. Anchors shall be not more than 460 mm on center at heads, jambs, and sills.
E. Fasteners, clips, fittings, aluminum trim, closures, and shapes shall be provided as
indicated and as required to provide a complete installation.
F. Joints shall be sealed between sash units, aluminum sills, mullions, and covers and
similar metal-to-metal contact surfaces with sealant or tape as recommended and
furnished by the window manufacturer. Installations shall be weather tight.

3.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
A. Aluminum shall be kept from direct contact with steel or other dissimilar materials by
painting, non-absorptive tape, gasket, or other approved system as recommended by
the manufacturer and as specified.
B. Aluminum surfaces in contact with steel shall be given one coat of zinc-chromate
primer, applied to a dry-film thickness of not less than 0.038 mm or one coat of a
suitable non-hardening joint compound capable of excluding moisture from the joint
during prolonged service.
C. Steel surfaces in contact with aluminum shall be given one coat of zinc-chromate
paint, applied to a dry-coat thickness of 0.038 mm and two or more coats of
aluminum paint, aluminum alkyd, Type II, applied to a dry-film thickness of 0.038
mm for each coat and a total dry-film thickness of 0.076 mm.
D. Corrosion-resistant, aluminized, or hot-dip galvanized steel placed in contact with
aluminum need not be painted.
E. Aluminum surfaces placed in contact with wood, concrete, or masonry construction
shall be given one coat of bituminous paint conforming to SSPC Paint 12, applied to
a thickness of at least 1.5 mm.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
A. After the sash is erected and glazed, ventilators shall be lubricated and adjusted for
smooth weather-tight operation. Guides shall be waxed or lubricated and balances
shall be adjusted for the proper tension.
B. Weather-stripping shall make weather tight contact around the entire weather-
stripped area when ventilators are closed and locked. Weather-stripping shall not
cause the sash to bind or prevent closing and locking the ventilator.
3.4 FEELER-GAGE FIELD TEST
A. Windows shall be tested after installation, glazing, and adjustment for metal-to-metal
contact between ventilators and frames by feeler-gage tests in accordance with SWI-
SWS.
B. Windows failing to meet the requirements of the feeler-gage tests shall be corrected
as required to meet the tests. Such windows shall be retested and, if they fail the tests
again, shall be removed and replaced.
3.5 CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Interior and exterior metal surfaces of windows shall be cleaned of mortar, plaster,
paint spattering or spots, and other foreign matter, and washed with soap and water,
brushed with a fiber brush, and thoroughly rinsed with clear water. Acid solutions,
steel wool, or other harsh abrasives shall not be used.
B. Stained or discolored windows shall be cleaned in accordance with the window
manufacturer's recommendations. Windows that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned and
windows with abraded, stained, or defective surface finish that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced.
4.1 General

1. Setting of window frames, fitting and hanging of window leaves including all
fixing materials, i.e. anchorage, bolts etc.
2. Costs of all tests shall be included in the unit price rates.
3. External Q. C. by Third Party.
4. Certifications.
6. Adjusting, cleaning and protection until final hand-over.
7. Removal and storage of window leaves when so directed by the Engineer.

SECTION 08 6200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Architectural Aluminum Skylight System, including perimeter trims, accessories,
shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of skylight framing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Flashing and Sheet Metal.
B. Glazing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA):
1. AA M12C22A41 - Anodized Plus Finish.
2. AA M12C22A32/A34 - Color anodized: Class II, Color Anodic Finish.
B. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and
Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM E283 - 04(2012) Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air
Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Difference.
4. ASTM E330 / E330M – 14 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance
of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference.
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
6. ASTM B633 - 15 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of
Zinc on Iron and Steel.
Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.
8. ASTM C864 - 05(2015) Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric
Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
1.4 Performance Requirements
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 6200 Unit Skylight

A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as
determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated
for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation,
or other defects in construction.
1. Glazed aluminum skylights shall withstand movements of supporting
structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening,
long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated
live loads. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
d. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum skylights, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Wind loads: Provide Skylight system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding
wind load design pressures to satisfy ECP requirements.
D. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (.0003 m3/s·m2) at a static air
pressure differential of 6.24 PSF (300 Pa) or CAN/CSA-A440 fixed rating.
E. Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM E 547. There shall be no leakage at static air pressure differentials of 15 PSF
(718 Pa) minimum or CAN/CSA-A440 B7 rating.
F. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 40 PSF (1916 Pa) shall be applied in the
positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no
deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At
structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or
permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall
occur or CAN/CSA-A440 C5 rating.
G. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the
condensation resistance factor shall not be less than 67frame and 65glass (clear).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
3. Indicate materials, finishes and installation procedures recommended by
manufacturer.
4. Indicate compliance with specified design criteria.
5. Indicate compliance with performance requirements.
6. Include product specific glazing details.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate material types, gauges and finishes, fabrication details and
installation details.
2. Show glazing types, methods of attachment and thermal movement
provisions.
C. Indicate compliance with specified structural design criteria.
1. Submitted design calculations shall bear seal of a professional engineer
licensed in the State in which the skylight is to be installed.
2. Certify that engineer has reviewed shop drawings.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size
150 mm square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Skylight manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years experience in
design, fabrication and installation of custom aluminum skylight systems.
C. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer shall be trained and approved by manufacturer.
2. Installer shall have five years experience with skylight type, size and
complexity.
D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.9 WARRANTY
D. Performance Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written warranty of (5) years
covering skylight work. Warranty shall cover defective materials, workmanship and
performance. Warranty shall be limited to repair or replacement of work described in
this section and shall not provide for repair or replacement of work by others.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by glazed aluminum
skylight manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required
finish and each framing member shall provide structural strength to meet specified
performance requirements and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and
temper.
B. Aluminum sheet alloy: Shall meet the requirements of ASTM B209.
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-
corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors,
and other components.
D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-
coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633, or other suitable zinc coating;
provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
E. Pressure Plate: Pressure plate shall be aluminum and fastened to the mullion with
stainless steel screws.
F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-
plated steel complying with ASTM B 456, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying
with ASTM B 633, or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to
withstand design pressure indicated.
G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated skylight system, provide
permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint size and movement.
H. Thermal Barrier: Thermal separator shall be extruded of a silicone compatible PVC
(Poly Vinyl Chloride).
I. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional
dimensions of glazed skylight members are nominal and in compliance with AA
Aluminum Standards and Data.
2.2 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Division 08 Section “Glazing”.
1. Performance data: 6 mm Tempered glass/ 16 mm air space/ 8 mm laminated
clear glass with 2 layers of PVB.
B. Glazing Gaskets: Gaskets to meet the requirements of ASTM C864.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene
material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.
E. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General Cleaning: Installer shall remove all protective coverings from frames and
domes and shall leave installation free from debris and sealant markings.
B. Final Cleaning: Final cleaning in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Cleaning instructions shall be located on manufacturer's label.
3.5 PROTECTION
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes furnishing and installation of door hardware for doors specified in
“Hardware Sets” and required by actual conditions. Including screws, bolts,
expansion shields, and other devices for proper application of hardware.
B. Where items of hardware are not specified and are required for intended service, such
omission, error or other discrepancy shall be submitted to Architect fourteen calendar
days prior to bid date for clarification by addendum.
C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
(ANSI)
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006 Butts & Hinges
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2011 Bored & Preassembled Locks and Latches
3. ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2008 Exit Devices
4. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls-Closers
5. ANSI/BHMA A156.5 - 2014 Cylinders And Input Devices For Locks
6. ANSI/BHMA A156.6 - 2012 Architectural Door Trim
7. ANSI/BHMA A156.7-2009 Template Hinge Dimensions
8. ANSI/BHMA A156.8 - 2010 Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders
9. ANSI/BHMA A156.12-2013 Interconnected Locks & Latches
10. ANSI/BHMA A156.13 - 2012 Mortise Locks
11. ANSI/BHMA A156.14-2013 Sliding and Folding Door Hardware
12. ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2013 Auxiliary Hardware
13. ANSI/BHMA A156.17-2010 Self Closing Hinges & Pivots
14. ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2012 Materials & Finishes
15. ANSI/BHMA A156.21-2014 American National Standard For Thresholds
16. ANSI/BHMA A156.22 - 2012 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems
17. ANSI/BHMA A156.24-2012 Delayed Egress Locks
18. ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Continuous Hinges (2006)
19. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Keying Systems (2007)
20. ANSI/BHMA A156.29 Exit Locks and Alarms (2007)
21. ANSI/BHMA A156.30 High Security Cylinders (2003)
22. ANSI/BHMA A156.31 Electric Strikes (2007)
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 7100 Door hardware

23. ANSI/BHMA A156.32 Integrated Door Assemblies (2008)
24. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel
Frames (2006)
25. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood
or Steel Frames (2006)
26. ANSI/BHMA A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant
Components for Swinging Door Assemblies (2003)
B. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute
(ICC/ANSI)/ADA:
1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities (2009).
2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies
2. UL 1784 Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies
D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):
1. DHI Publication – Keying Systems and Nomenclature (1989)
2. DHI Publication – Abbreviations and Symbols
3. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
4. DHI Publication – Sequence and Format of Hardware Schedule (1996)
E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (2011)
2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective’s (2010)
3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code (2009)
4. NFPA 105 Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies (2010)
F. Building Codes
1. IBC 2009 International Building Code
2. Local Building Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Administrative
Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Hardware schedule shall be organized in vertical format illustrated in DHI
Publications Sequence and Formatting for the Hardware Schedule. Include
abbreviations and symbols page according to DHI Publications
Abbreviations and Symbols. Complete nomenclature of items required for
each door opening as indicated.
2. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of hardware.

3. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), as certified by DHI, who shall
affix seal attesting to completeness and correctness, shall review hardware
schedule prior to submittal.
C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheet on design, grade and function of items listed in
hardware schedule. Identify specific hardware item per sheet, provide index, and
cover sheet.
D. Coordination:
1. Distribute door hardware templates to related divisions within fourteen days
of receiving approved door hardware submittals.
E. Closeout Submittals: Submit to Owner in a three ring binder or CD if requested.
1. Warranties.
2. Maintenance and operating manual.
3. Maintenance service agreement.
4. Record documents.
5. Copy of approved hardware schedule.
6. Copy of approved keying schedule with bitting list.
7. Door hardware supplier name, phone number and fax number.
A. Door hardware manufacturing company shall be headquartered in the United States
of America.
B. Hardware supplier shall employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as
certified by DHI and a member of the seal program who shall be available at
reasonable times during course of work for Project hardware consultation.
C. Door hardware shall conform to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks and operating devices: Shape that is easy to
grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or
twisting of the wrist.
D. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated,
provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C, unless otherwise
indicated. UL and UL10B listings not acceptable.
E. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke and draft control door
assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of
assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
F. Door hardware shall be certified to ANSI/BHMA standards as noted, participate and
be listed in BHMA Certified Products Directory.
G. Substitution request: Refer to Division 1Substitutions for procedures to submit
products meeting the requirements in this Section.
H. Pre-installation Meeting: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project
Meetings.”

1. Convene meeting seven days before installation. Participants required to
attend: Contractor, installer, material supplier, manufacturer representatives,
electrical contractor, security consultant and fire alarm consultant.
2. Include in conference decisions regarding proper installation methods and
procedures for receiving and handling hardware.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of
materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
I. Within fourteen days of receipt of approved door hardware submittals contact Owner
with representative from hardware supplier to establish a keying conference. Verify
keyway, visual key identification, number of master keys and keys per lock. Provide
keying system per Engineer’s instructions.
J. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in performing installation of this Section and
shall have five years minimum documented experience.
A. Provide a clean, dry and secure room for hardware delivered to Project but not yet
installed.
B. Furnish hardware with each unit marked and numbered in accordance with approved
finish hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each type of hardware.
C. Pack each item complete with necessary parts and fasteners in manufacturer’s
original packaging.
D. Deliver permanent key, cores, access control credentials, software and related
accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to Owner shall be established at “Keying Conference.”
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be an addition and run concurrent with other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract documents.
B. Special Warranty: Warranties specified in this article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights. Contractor, hardware supplier, and hardware installer shall be
responsible for servicing hardware and keying related problems.
1. Lifetime for manual door closers.
2. Lifetime mortise, auxiliary and bored locks.
3. Lifetime for exit devices.
4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
C. Products judged defective during warranty period shall be replaced or repaired in
accordance with manufacturer’s warranty at no cost to Owner. There is no warranty
against defects due to improper installation, abuse and failure to exercise normal
maintenance.
D. Maintenance Tool and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, removal
and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGES
A. Hinges, continuous hinges, electric hinges, shall be of one manufacturer as listed for
continuity of design and consideration of warranty.
B. Standards: Products to be certified and listed by the following:
1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1
2. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7
3. Self-Closing Hinges: ANSI/BHMA 156.17
4. Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26
C. Butt Hinges:
1. Hinge weight and size unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:
a. Doors up to 36” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a
minimum thickness of .134” and a minimum of 4-1/2” in height.
b. Doors from 36” wide up to 42” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide
hinges with a minimum thickness of .145” and a minimum of 4-
1/2”” in height.
c. For doors from 42” wide up to 48” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick
provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .180” and a minimum
of 5” in height.
d. Doors greater than 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum
thickness of .180” and a minimum of 5” in height.
e. Width of hinge is to be minimum required to clear surrounding trim.
2. Base material unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:
a. Exterior Doors: 304 Stainless Steel.
b. Interior Doors: 304 Stainless Steel
c. Fire Rated Doors: 304 Stainless Steel materials.
d. Stainless Steel ball bearing hinges shall have stainless steel ball
bearings. Steel ball bearings are unacceptable.
3. Quantity of hinges per door unless otherwise stated in hardware sets:
a. Doors up to 60”in height provide 2 hinges.
b. Doors 60” up to 90” in height provide 3 hinges.
c. Doors 90” up to 120” in height provide 4 hinges.
d. Doors over 120” in height add 1 additional hinge per each additional
30” in height.
e. Dutch doors provide 4 hinges.
4. Hinge design and options unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:
a. Hinges are to be of a square corner five-knuckle design, flat button
tips and have ball bearings unless otherwise indicated in hardware
sets.

b. Out-swinging exterior and out-swinging access controlled doors shall
have non-removable pins (NRP) to prevent removal of pin while
door is in closed position.
c. When full width of opening is required, use hinges that are designed
to swing door completely from opening when door is opened to 95
degrees.
d. Provide mortar boxes for frames that require any electrically
modified hinges if not an integral part of frame.
e. When shims are necessary to correct frame or door irregularities,
provide metal shims only.
2.2 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS
A. Flush bolts shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
consideration of warranty.
B. Standards: Manufacturer to be listed by the following:
1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16
C. Labeled openings: Provide automatic or constant latching flush bolts per hardware
schedule for inactive leaf of pairs of doors. Provide dust proof strikes for bottom
bolt.
D. Non-Labeled openings: Provide two flush bolts for inactive leaf of pairs of doors per
hardware schedule. Top bolt shall not be more than 78” centerline from floor.
Provide dust proof strike for bottom bolt.
E. Coordinators: Provide for labeled pairs of doors with automatic flush bolts or with
vertical rod exit device with a mortise-locking device per hardware schedule.
Provide filler piece to extend full width of stop on frame. Provide mounting
brackets for closers and special preparation for latches where applicable.
2.3 FLUSHBOLTS FOR ALUMINUM DOORS
A. Flush bolts shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Provide two-point flush bolt for inactive leaf of pairs of doors with locked and
unlocked indicator. Match cylinder height of lock on active leaf with indictor.
Provide stainless steel top and bottom bolts.
2.4 REMOVABLE MULLIONS
A. Keyed and non-keyed removable mullions shall be of one manufacturer as listed for
B. Standards: Manufacturer to be listed by the following
1. UL10C/Warnock Hersey for fire rated pairs of doors up to 8 feet tall x 8 feet
wide opening.
C. Material and Design:
1. For use with rim exit devices on non-rated and fire rated pairs of doors.
Mullion 2”x 3”x 11 gage steel tube.
2. Top Fitting:

a. Mullion shall be locked in place without use of a key.
b. Deadlock on fire rated device
2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES (GRADE 1 MORTISE)
A. Locks and latches shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Standards: Product to be certified and listed by following:
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000 Certified to Grade 1 for Operational and
Security.
2. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated.
3. ICC/ANSI A117.1.
C. Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in
hardware sets.
D. Material and Design:
1. Lock cases from fully wrapped, 12 gauge steel, Zinc dichromate for
corrosion resistance.
2. Non-handed, field reversible without opening lock case.
3. Break away spindles to prevent unlocking during forced entry or vandalism.
4. Levers are to be Zinc cast, Forged Brass or Stainless Steel and plated to
match finish designation in hardware sets.
5. Sectional Roses are to be of solid Brass or Stainless Steel material and have a
minimum diameter of 2-7/16”.
6. Escutcheons are to be of solid Brass or Stainless Steel material.
7. Armor fronts are to be self-adjusting to accommodate a square edge door or a
standard 1/8” beveled edge door.
E. Latch and Strike:
1. Stainless Steel latch bolt with minimum of ¾” throw and deadlocking for
keyed and exterior functions.
2. Strike is to fit a standard ANSI A115 prep measuring 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” with
proper lip length to protect surrounding trim.
3. Deadbolts to be 1-3/4” total length with a minimum of a 1” throw and ¾”
internal engagement when fully extended and made of Stainless Steel
material.
2.6 DEADBOLTS (GRADE 1)
A. Deadbolts shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:
1. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Grade 1
2. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated

C. Deadbolt function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in
hardware sets.
1. Latch bolt 1”throw, material brass with concealed harden steel roller to
prevent sawing or cutting.
2. Freewheeling collar design to help resists against vandalism.
3. Non-handed, field reversible.
2.7 DEADBOLT FOR ALUMINUM STILE DOORS
A. Dead bolts for aluminum doors shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity
of design and consideration of warranty.
1. Pairs of doors shall incorporate a threshold and header bolt. Turning key 360
degrees will retract or throw deadbolt for single doors and retract or
throw threshold a header bolt for pairs of doors.
B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet the following:
1. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA Certified A156.5
Grade 1.
1. Lock chassis: Zinc dichromate for corrosion resistance.
2. Armored faceplate 1” x 6” and to match aluminum door edge.
D. Latches and Strike:
1. Dead bolt 1-3/8” throw, eight ply laminated stainless steel. Center ply
Alumina-Ceramic core to defeat hacksaw attach.
2.8 EXIT DEVICES (GRADE 1)
A. Exit Devices shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
1. Touch pad type, finish to match balance of door hardware.
B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified and or listed by the following:
1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.3 Grade 1
2. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated
3. UL 305Listed for Panic Hardware
1. Touch pad shall extend a minimum of one half-door width. Freewheeling
lever design shall match design of locks levers. Exit device to mount flush
with door.
2. Latch bolts:
a. Rim device – ¾” throw, Pullman type with automatic dead-latching,
stainless steel

b. Surface vertical rod device – Top ½” throw, Pullman type with
automatic dead-latching, stainless steel. Bottom ½” throw, Pullman
type, held retracted during door swing, stainless steel.
3. Fasteners: Wood screws, machine screws and thru-bolts.
D. Lock and Latch Functions: Function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer’s
series and lever styles indicated in door hardware sets.
2.9 NARROW STILE EXIT DEVICES
1. Touch pad type, finish to match balance of door hardware.
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1
2. U.L.305 Listed Panic Exit Hardware
3. U.L10C. Listed Fire Exit Hardware.
1. Touch pad: Shall extend a minimum of one half-door width.
2. Mounting shall be minimum 2” stile width.
D. Lock and latch functions: Function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer’s
series and lever styles indicated in door hardware sets.
2.10 DELAYED EGRESS EXIT DEVICE
1. Touch pad type, finish to match balance of door hardware
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.24 Grade 1 Delayed Egress
3. UL10C listed Panic Hardware.
C. Exit Device function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in
hardware sets.
1. Stainless steel, ¾” throw deadlocking latch bolt
2. Audible arming indictors with 100dB alarm
3. On board logic control with battery back-up and low battery alert
4. Touch pad shall extend a minimum of one half-door width. Freewheeling
lever design shall match design of locks levers. Exit device to mount flush
with door.
2.11 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Cylinders shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet the following:
1. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5
2. DHI Handbook “Keying systems and nomenclature” (1989)
C. Cylinders:
1. Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, seven-pin IC core.
2. Shall be furnished with cams/tailpieces as required for locking device that is
being furnished for project.
D. Keying:
1. Copy of Owners approved keying schedule shall be submitted to Owner and
Architect with documentation of which keying conference was held and
Owners sign-off.
2. Provide a list to Owner of combinations as established, and expand to twenty
five percent for future use or as directed by Owner.
3. Key into Owner’s existing keying system if applicable.
4. Keys to be shipped to Owner’s representative, individually tag per keying
conference.
5. Provide visual key control identification on keys.
6. Provide interchangeable cores with construction cores as required per
hardware schedule.
2.12 PUSH/PULL PLATES AND BARS
A. Push and pull plates shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design
and consideration of warranty.
B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:
1. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6
2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
C. Push plates: .050” thick, square corner and beveled edges with counter sunk screw
holes. Width and height as stated in hardware sets.
D. Pull plates: .050” thick, square corner and beveled edges. Width and height as stated
in hardware sets, ¾” diameter pull, with clearance of 2-1/2” from face of door.
E. Push Pull Bar Sets: 1” round bar stock with 2 ½” clearances from face of door.
Offset to be 3”, 90-degree standard. Center to center size should be door width less 1
stile width.
2.13 CLOSERS (ALUMINUM BODY GRADE 1)
A. Closers shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Unless otherwise indicated on hardware schedule, comply with manufacturer’s
recommendation for size of closer, depending on width of door, frequency of use,
atmospheric pressure, ADAAG requirements, and fire rating.

2019
C. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:
1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.4 Grade 1
2. ADA Complaint ANSI A117.1
3. UL10C Positive Pressure Rated
1. Provide aluminum non-handed bodies with full plastic covers.
2. Closer shall have separate staked adjustable valve screws for latch speed,
sweep speed, and back check.
3. Provide Tri-Pack arms and brackets for regular arm, top jamb, and parallel
arm mounting.
4. Double heat-treated steel, tempered springs.
5. Precision machined, heat-treated steel piston.
6. Triple heat-treated steel spindle.
7. Full rack and pinion operation.
E. Mounting:
1. Out swing doors shall have surface parallel arm mount closers except where
noted on hardware schedule.
2. In swing doors shall have surface regular arm mount closers except where
noted on hardware schedule.
3. Provide brackets and shoe supports for aluminum doors and frames to mount
fifth screw.
4. Furnish drop plates where top rail conditions on door do not allow for
mounting of closer and where backside of closer is exposed through glass.
F. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility (ADDAG). Comply
with following maximum opening force requirements.
1. Interior hinged openings: 5.0 lbs.
2. Fire rated and exterior openings shall have minimum opening force
allowable by authority having jurisdiction.
G. Fasteners: Provide self-drilling and tapping wood screws, machine screws and sex
nuts and bolts for each closer.
2.14 PROTECTIVE TRIM
A. Protective trim shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Size of protection plate: Single doors, size two inches less door width (LDW) on
push side of door, and one inch less on pull side of door. For pairs of doors, size one
inch less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and ½ inch on pull side of door.
1. Kick plates 10” high or sized to door bottom rail height
2. Mop Plates 4” high.
3. Armor Plates 36” high.

2019
C. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for:
1. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6
2. UL10C Listed
1. 0.050” gage stainless steel
2. Corners shall be square. Polishing lines or dominant direction of surface
pattern shall run across the door width of plate.
3. Bevel top, bottom and sides uniformly leaving no sharp edges. Edges shall be
de-burred.
4. Countersink holes for screws. Screws holes shall be spaced equidistant eight
inches CTC, along a centerline not over ½ inch in from edge around plate.
End screws shall be a maximum of 0.53 inch from corners.
E. UL label stamp required on protection plates when top of plate is more than 16 inches
above bottom of door on fire rated openings. Verify door manufactures UL10C
listing for maximum height and width of protection plate to be used.
2.15 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and holders shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Wall Stops: Provide door stops wherever necessary to prevent door or hardware from
striking an adjacent partition or obstruction. Provide wall stops when possible. Door
stops and holders mounted in concrete floor or masonry walls shall have stainless
steel machine screws and lead expansion shields.
D. Overhead Stops and Holders:
1. Provide overhead stops and holders for doors that open against equipment,
casework sidelights and other objects that would make wall stops/holders and
floor stops/holders inappropriate.
2. Provide overhead stops and holders with an adjustable arm to accommodate
various door widths and applications.
3. Provide sex bolt attachments for mineral core wood door applications.
E. Standards: Manufacturer shall be certified by the following:
1. Overhead Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Grade 1
2.16 DOOR GASKETING AND WEATHE-RSTRIP
A. Door Gasketing and weather-strip shall be of one manufacturer as listed for
B. Provide continuous weather-strip Gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound Gasketing where indicated on hardware schedule. Provide non-
corrosive fasteners for exterior applications.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door
and frame.
2019
2. Meeting stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors
are in closed position.
3. Door bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold or floor
when door is in closed position.
4. Sound Gasketing: Cutting or notching for stop mounted hardware not
permitted.
5. Drip Guard: Apply to exterior face of frame header. Lip length to extend 4”
beyond width of door.
1. Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems: ANSI/BHMA A156.22
2. Shall be BHMA certified for door sweeps, automatic door bottoms, and
adhesive applied Gasketing.
D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 105 listed, labeled, and acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control indicated.
1. Provide smoke labeled Gasketing on 20 minute rated doors and on smoke
rated doors.
E. Fire-Rated Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 80 listed, labeled, and acceptable to
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.
2.17 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of sealant with lead
expansion shields and stainless steel machine screws. Notched in field to fit frame by
hardware installer. Refer to Drawings for special details.
C. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:
1. Thresholds: ANSI/BHMA A156.21
2.18 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. Sliding door hardware shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design
and consideration of warranty.
B. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets of rails, hangers, supports, bumpers,
floor guides, and accessories indicated.
C. Standards: Manufacturer shall conform to:
1. Sliding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14
D. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 150 lbs.
E. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 250 lbs.
1. Provide Pocket door kit for pocket doors. Kits are to include header
assembly, split studs, hangers, door hanger plates, bumper, guides, floor
plate, and end bracket.
2.19 SILENCERS

2019
A. Silencers shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Where smoke, light, or weather seal are not required, provide three silencers per
single door frame, two per double door frame and four per Dutch door frame.
2.20 KEY CABINET
A. Provide key cabinet, surface mounted to wall.
B. Key control system:
1. Include two sets of key tags, hooks, labels, and envelopes.
2. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked enamel finish.
3. Capacity shall be able to hold actual quantities of keys, plus 25
percent.
4. Provide tools, instruction sheets and accessories required to complete
installation.
5. Key Control
2.21 SIGNAGE
A. Signage shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for:
1. Signage: ANSI/BHMA A156.16
2. Grade 2 Braille Translation conforming to section 4.3 requirements
C. Materials and Design: Provide 0.125” thick plastic. Size of sign to be 6” x 8”
fastened with double-sided pressure sensitive tape.
2.22 FINGER GUARDS
A. Finger guards shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and
B. Standards: Manufacturer to be UL10C listed for use on fire doors rated up to 3 hours
for metal door and 1 hour for wood doors.
C. Materials and Design: Provide aluminum tube with internal spring mechanism that
maintains constant tension against the fabric that prevents fingers from entering area
behind edge of door on hinge side.
D. Finishes: Available in clear anodized aluminum with white polyethylene material or
dark bronze anodized aluminum with black polyethylene material.
2.23 FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if within range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples.

2019
B. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by ANSI/BHMA
A156.18 designations in hardware schedule.
C. Finish Code Numbers
Code Description Material
621 Nickel Plated, Blackened, Relieved, Brass, Bronze
622 Flat Black Coated Brass, Bronze
623 Light Oxidized Statuary Bronze, Bronze
624 Dark Oxidized Statuary Bronze, Bronze
625 Bright Chromium Plated Brass, Bronze
626 Satin Chromium Plated Brass, Bronze
627 Satin Aluminum, Clear Coated Aluminum
628 Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized Aluminum
629 Bright Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 300 Series
630 Satin Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 300 Series
688 Satin Aluminum, Gold Anodized Aluminum
689 Aluminum Painted Any
MIL Mill Finish Aluminum
CLR Clear Anodized Aluminum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and
floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with:
1. NFPA 80.
2. NFPA 105.
3. ICC/ANSI A117.1.
4. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel
Frames
5. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood
or Steel Frames
6. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
7. UL10C/UBC7-2
8. Local building code.

2019
9. Approved shop drawings.
10. Approved finish hardware schedule.
B. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates
involved. Set unit level, plumb and true to line location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
A. Material supplier to schedule final walk through to inspect hardware installation ten
business days before final acceptance of Owner. Material supplier shall provide a
written report detailing discrepancies of each opening to General Contractor within
seven calendar days of walk through.
3.4 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjustment: Adjust and check each opening to ensure proper operation of each item of
finish hardware. Replace items that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly
or as intended for application at no cost to Owner.
B. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished
hardware per manufacturer’s instructions after final adjustments has been made.
Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer’s level of finish quality at no
cost to Owner.
C. Demonstration: Conduct a training class for building maintenance personnel
demonstrating the adjustment, operation of mechanical and electrical hardware.
Special tools for finished hardware to be turned over and explained usage at this
meeting.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Leave manufacturer’s protective film intact and provide proper protection for all
other finish hardware items that do not have protective material from the manufacture
until Owner accepts Project as complete.
3.6 HARDWARE SETS
A. The schedule of hardware sets shall be considered a guide only. Furnish door
hardware to meet required codes.
4.1 GENERAL
A. Hardware which is specified to be supplied with doors and windows will not be
measured separately, unless mentioned clearly in the bill of quantities.
A. Hardware will be measured by sets as defined in the hardware schedule.
B. The keying system will be measured as defined in schedule.
5.1 GENERAL
material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labor,

2019
samples and mock-ups, co-coordinating work with other trades, checking,
examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
1. Cleaning and protection until final handing.

2019
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Glass and glazing required for this work includes, but is not
necessarily limited to tempered glass, related glazing materials, and accessories
specified apply to factory or field glazed items.
A. All glazing shall comply with requirements of safety.
B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E90 - 09 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
2. ASTM C509 - 06(2015) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular
Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material
3. ASTM C716 - 06(2015) Standard Specification for Installing Lock-Strip
Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials
4. ASTM C864 - 05(2015) Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric
Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
6. ASTM C1036 - 11e1 Standard Specification for Flat Glass
7. ASTM C1048 - 12e1 Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully
Tempered Flat Glass
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI Z97.1-2009 Forward, Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
C. Glass Association of North America (GANA):
1. Glazing Manual (2004) Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC)
Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials – codified at Title 16,
Part 1201 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 16 CFR 1201
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. U-Value: The heat flow rate through a given construction is expressed in W/m2/°C.
The lower the U-Value, the less heat is transmitted through the glazing material.
Values given for summer daytime are calculated for outside air temperature at 32°C,
outside air velocity at 12 km/h, inside air temperature of 24°C and a solar intensity of
790 W/m2. Winter night time U-Values are calculated for outside air temperature at -
18°C, outside air velocity at 24km/h, and a solar intensity of 0 W/m2.
B. R-Value: Thermal resistance of a glazing system expressed in Hr•ft2•F/Btu. It is the
reciprocal of U-Value, R=1/U. The higher the R-Value, the less heat is transmitted
through the glazing material.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 08 8000 Glazing

C. Shading Coefficient (SC): The ratio of solar heat gain through a window to the solar
heat gain through a single light of 3 mm clear glass under the same set of conditions.
Dimensionless and varying between 0 and 1, the smaller the number, the better the
window is at stopping the entry of solar heat.
D. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): The fraction of incident solar radiation which
enters a building as heat. It is based on the sum of the solar energy transmittance plus
the inwardly flowing fraction of absorbed solar energy on all lites of the glazing.
Dimensionless and varying between 0 and 1, the smaller the number, the better the
glazing is at preventing solar gain. It is preferred over the shading coefficient since it
can be used for solar incidence angles other than normal to the glass surface.
E. Relative-Heat Gain (RHG): The total amount of heat gain through a glazing system
at NFRC/ASHRAE specified summer conditions, incorporating the U-Value and the
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. The conditions are 726 W/m2, outdoor temperature of
32°C, indoor temperature of 24°C and 12 km/hr wind.
F. Ultraviolet Light: In the solar spectrum (300 to 380 nm), ultraviolet light is
considered the energy that accounts for the majority of fading of materials and
furnishings.
G. ISO – CIE Damage Function: In the solar spectrum (300 to 700 nm), the
International Standards Organization (ISO) developed a weighting function,
recommended by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE) that takes into
account not only the UV transmission but also a portion of the visible light spectrum
that can cause fading of materials and furnishings.
H. Krochmann Damage Function: This function attempts to account for the fading
potential of all damaging radiation which can be transmitted through glass. It covers
a spectral range from about 300 to 600 nm and weighs each wavelength in relation to
the potential damage it can cause to typical materials. Visible Light Transmission In
the visible spectrum (380 to 760 nm), the percentage of light that is transmitted
through the glass relative to the C.I.E. Standard Observer.
I. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: In the visible spectrum, the percentage of light
that is reflected from the glass surface(s) relative to the C.I.E. Standard Observer.
J. Visible Indoor Reflectance: The percentage of visible light that is reflected from the
glass surface(s) to the inside of the building. It is better to have a low visible indoor
reflectance to enhance visibility when viewing objects outdoors in overcast or night
time sky conditions.
K. Solar Energy Transmittance: In the solar spectrum (300 to 2500 nm), the
percentage of ultraviolet, visible and near infrared energy that is transmitted through
the glass.
L. Solar Energy Reflectance: In the solar spectrum, the percentage of solar energy that
is reflected from the glass surface(s).
M. LSG: Light to solar gain ratio. The ratio of visible light transmittance to solar heat
gain coefficient.
N. Loå: Low Emissivity Coatings, Loå Coatings applied to glass which reflects long
wave room side infrared energy back into the room reducing the U-Value. Emissivity
varies from 0 to 1 and the lower the emissivity, the lower the resultant U-Value.

O. Loå2: Second generation of Loå coatings which provide a high visible light
transmission while offering a significant decrease in solar heat gain coefficient and
shading coefficient. These products have two silver layers in the coating stack.
P. Loå3: Third generation of Loå coatings which provide the best solar heat gain
coefficient and shading coefficient with a high visible light transmission. These
products have three silver layers in the coating stack.
1.5 SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY FOR GLASS:
A. To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials
produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass
indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type
and class required.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Sections and details of glass installation.
B. Manufacturer's descriptive data of glass and glazing materials and recommended
installation instructions, including certificates stating that tempered glass, meet
requirements for safety glazing material as specified in ANSI Z97.1
C. Submit sample warranties with shop drawings for review and approval. These sample
warranties shall comply with the requirements of the WARRANTY section below.
D. Samples:
1. Two 300mm x 300mm pieces of each type of glass.
2. Two 300 mm lengths of each type of gasket employed.
3. One bead, approximately 6mm wide and 75mm long of each sealant employed, indicating color
or set of cured material.
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. Do not remove labels until glass has
been installed.
B. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass.
C. Deliver glazing compounds and sealants in manufacturer's unopened, labelled
containers.
A. Compatibility of Materials: All components of the glazing system shall be
manufactured or recommended by one manufacturer to assure the compatibility of
materials.
B. Safety Glazing Material: Type indicated, meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1 with
label on each piece.
C. Certification:
1. Affidavit by the material supplier, certifying type and quality of glass
furnished.
2. Wired Glass: Affidavit by the material supplier, certified as bearing the
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) classification marking for fire resistance.

D. Noise-Reducing Glass: Labeled to show certified test for required STC rating per
ASTM E 90
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard
form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined
as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form
in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is
defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage
or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Defects include edge separation, de-lamination materially obstructing
vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced
laminated-glass standard.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form
in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is
defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture,
or film on interior surfaces of glass.
A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with glazing materials manufacturer's written
recommendations regarding environmental conditions under which glazing materials
can be installed.
B. Glazing channel dimensions shown are intended to provide for necessary minimum
bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate glazing material thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances. Provide correct glass size for each opening, within the
tolerances and necessary dimensions required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS TYPES
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass, Type I (transparent
glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), Class as specified, 6 mm minimum thickness
for windows and 8 mm thick for window doors, or as per drawings and directed by
Engineer
B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with ASTM
C1048 requirements, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type,
quality, class, and, if applicable, form, finish, and pattern.

1. Heat-Treated, clear, sand blasted pattern. Glass door 10/12 mm thick or as per
drawings and directed by Engineer
2.2 Sizes:
A. Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances
and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide
thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass
manufacturer for application indicated.
2.3 LABELS
A. Temporary labels:
1. Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or
brand and glass type, quality and nominal thickness.
B. Permanent labels:
1. Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 label requirements.
2. Locate in the corner for each pane except as noted.
a. Tempered glass.
2.4 GASKETS & GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Cellular elastomeric, ASTM C509.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility
with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A Durometer hardness.
D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required
for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by
glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with
glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-
walking) of glass.
2.5 SEALANT
A. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other
materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation
and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
B. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for
selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics
suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.
C. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,
elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920
requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. Colors: Black.
1. One-Part Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS, Class
25; Use G; low or medium modulus.
2. One-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25, Use G.

D. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard
solvent-free butyl-Polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent;
complying with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and non-
migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper
on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by
manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Check that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities and debris.
B. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections.
C. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory, including
acceptable temperature range for application of sealant as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
D. Glazier shall inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of
minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery.
Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove
lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.
B. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of
manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
C. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time
of installation.
D. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block
in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with
metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or
drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge
which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of
opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other
imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance
and appearance.
E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as
determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
3.3 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width
from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 150 mm from corner,
unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for

heel bead use.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except
where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing.
Provide 3 mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard,
except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by
sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel
weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of
sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
"wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass.
Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to
eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
A. Cure glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and
surface durability.
B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by installing two
marking decals on each transparent glass door, and on each transparent glass sidelight
which is wider than 50 cm between stiles. Locate decals midway between stiles 80
cm and 160 cm above the floor line
C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into
contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
D. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a
month, for build-up of dirt, scum alkali deposits or staining. When examination
reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
E. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
F. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash
glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

4.1 GENERAL
A. For glass the rebate size shall be taken as basis for measurement.
B. For pre-glazed units, the glass will not be measured separately.
A. Glass panes will be enumerated. Setting of glass will be included within the
items.
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including but not limited to
furnishing all material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water,
power, for all labor, samples and mock-ups, coordinating work with other
trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and
protecting.
A. The following ancillary works shall be included in the unit price rates and will
not be measured separately:
1. Setting of glass including all setting material i.e. setting blocks, spacers,
glazing tape etc.
2. Cleaning and protection until final handing over.


SECTION 08 8300 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the work of:
1. Silvered mirrored glass.
B. Related Sections: The following sections include requirements which relate to work
section:
1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry”.
2. Division 10 Section “Toilet and Bath Accessories”.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations
in NAAMM's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the
Care and Handling of Mirrors."
B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR
1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published product data, or, if non-existent,
manufacturer's specially prepared written description of materials, quality and
process used to produce mirrors including source of glass, silver, copper coating,
protective coating, edge sealer and quality control provisions.
B. Samples: Submit 300 mm square samples of each type of mirror glass required,
including:
1. Edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges of samples
2. Mirror clips
3. Mirror trim 300 mm long
C. Certificates: Submit test reports from an organic protective coating manufacturer
indicating that mirror mastic has been tested for compatibility and adhesive with
organic protective coating.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for installation and details, include
elevations, sections, details and attachments to other Works.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide products obtained from one source for the
type of mirror indicated.
B. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Glass Coating Compatibility Test: Submit mirror
mastic products to manufacturer of protective organic coating for testing and
determining compatibility of adhesive with mirror glass coating.
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for transporting, storing and handling mirror
glass, and as needed to avoid deterioration of silvering, damage to edges and abrasion
of glass surfaces and applied coatings.
B. Store indoors, away from activities of other trades, protect from moisture including
condensation, temperature changes and direct exposure to sun.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 08 8300 - MIRRORS


1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty to Employer signed by mirrored glass manufacturer for 5
years against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors which
deteriorate or develop visible defects within warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Provide mirrored glass that shall not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass
breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication and
installation; defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
2.2 GLASS FOR MIRROR PRODUCTION
A. Primary glass for mirror production shall be float glass of the following types:
1. Clear Float Glass (Transparent): Class 1 quality q2, flat, clear transparent
glass, shall comply with requirements of ES No. 353 and shall not be less
than 5 mm thick.
2.3 MIRROR GLASS PRODUCTION AND FABRICATION
A. Glass Coating: Coat second surface of glass, unless otherwise indicated, with glass
coating system consisting of three successive layers of chemically deposited silver,
electrically or chemically deposited copper and manufacturer's standards protective
organic coating.
B. Glass Thickness and sizes: 5 mm thick unless otherwise indicated. After application
of glass coating, cut mirror glass to final sizes and shape to suit
C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Beveled exterior (upper) edge of width as shown on
Drawings. If not required round, polish edge.
1. Perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to
final sizes to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of backing and
silver deterioration at glass edges.
A. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass
manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
B. Mastic Adhesive Silicone: An adhesive setting compound produced specifically for
setting mirrors by spot application, certified by organic protective coating
manufacturer and approved by mirror manufacturer. Compatible with glass coating
and substrate on which mirrored glass shall be installed.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene 70 to 90 Store A hardness.
2.5 SUBSTRATES (BACKING)
A. Provide mirror backing and support system which shall permit rigid, tamper proof
glass installation and prevent accumulation of moisture.
B. Mirrors shall be mounted to blackboard wood siding or to wood furring as indicated
on Drawings and as specified in Division-6, Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" or
provide a galvanized steel backing sheet of not less than 0.75 mm thick for full
mirror size with non-absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an
acceptable filler material.
2.6 METAL FRAMED MIRROR
A. Stainless Steel Type-304 size 13 x 13 x 13mm channel with 6mm return at rear with
bright satin finish. One piece frame with 90 degree mitered corners.


2.7 MOUNTING DEVICES
A. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. Screws, bolts and other devices of same material of accessories unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install mirrors to comply with printed directions of mirror manufacturer. Mount
mirrors in-place to avoid distorting reflected images.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Protect mirror edges from damage during handling and installation.
B. Identify and inspect surfaces over which mirrors are to be mounted. Comply with
manufacturer's printed installation directions for preparation of mounting surfaces
including coating with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.
C. Require glazer to inspect substrates and obtain his report listing conditions
detrimental to mirror glass work. Do not allow pasting of mirror glass to proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or eliminated.
D. Apply barrier coat to mirror glass backing where approved by manufacture(s) of
mirror and backing material.
E. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of
mounting surface (backing).
F. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's printed direction and
allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting
surface.
G. After mastic is applied, align mirrored glass units and press into place while
maintaining a minimum air space of 3 mm between back of mirrored glass and
mounting surface.
H. Mount mirrored glass accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected
images.
I. Mastic is not enough to support mirror glass.
J. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers
device.
K. Provide permanent means of support at bottom and top edge of mirror to withstand
mirror weight and clips along top of mirror glass from coming away from wall along
top edges.
L. For bottom supports provide setting blocks 2 mm thick by 100 mm long at quarter
points.
M. Set units level, plumb and square at location indicated.
3.3 MIRRORS-UNIT HANGERS
A. Where required provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper and
theft resistant installation as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall hanger device with spring action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts
and requiring special tool to remove.
B. Where indicated install bottom, top and sides trim, fabricate trim in single lengths to
fit and cover all edges of mirrored glass unit.

A. Clean surface of mirror by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence
of spillage of adhesive silicon.
B. Protect mirror glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations.
C. Do not permit edges of mirror to be exposed to standing water.
D. Maintain environmental conditions which will prevent mirror from being exposed to
moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
E. Wash mirror not more than 4 days prior to date schedule for inspection intended to
establish date for substantial completion. Wash mirror by methods recommended by
manufacturers using water or glass cleaners free from substances capable of
damaging mirror edges or backing.
F. Apply cleaners to cloth and not directly to mirror glass.
G. Clean-up of all materials from work area is the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to finish schedule for mirror type and extent of mirror glass is indicated on
Drawings.

5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment, tools,
storage facilities, water, power, for all labor, samples, co-coordinating work with other trades,
checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
1. Taking measurements for installation from established lines and levels.
2. All supports and fixings for installation on site.
3. Frames and opening portions.
4. Ironmongery and fitting.
5. Surface treatments and preservative.
6. Finishes.
7. Priming backs of frames and the like
8. Sub - frames, packing, bearers and the like
9. Fixing and fastening, bedding, jointing and pointing including providing materials
10. Cutting and fitting around obstructions.


FOR
DIVISION 09: FINISHES
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 09 Finishes

SECTION 09 2400 - CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the work of plastering as required by the Contract.
1. Portland cement plaster
2. Facing coat for external stucco plaster.
3. Plaster accessories
B. Extent of each type of plaster work is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing Tables.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. ASTM C841 - 03(2013) Standard Specification for Installation of Interior
Lathing and Furring
2. ASTM C847 - 14 Standard Specification for Metal Lath
3. ASTM C926 - 14a Standard Specification for Application of Portland
Cement-Based Plaster
B. Portland Cement Association (PCA)
1. Plaster (Stucco) Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data including test results and
certificates of compliance.
B. Samples: Representative samples of all materials and color chart.
C. Three 1 meter square panels as samples for each type of plaster finish.
D. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing location of different kinds of plaster,
materials or textures, relation with different surfaces, finishing, and other units of
work.
1.4 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Metals shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter and shall be
protected from corrosion.
B. Cementatious materials shall be stored in their original, unbroken packages or
containers in a weather tight and dry place, until ready for installation.
C. Immediately upon receipt at the Site, cement shall be stored in dry, weather tight
properly ventilated structures.
D. Sand shall be piled in a manner that shall provide good drainage and prevent
intermixing with foreign matter and damage from construction traffic and other
causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MATERIALS
A. The contractor shall ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give consistent
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 09 2400 Cement plaster

and uniform color to surface finishes which are not to be painted.
B. CEMENT
1. Gray standard brand of Ordinary Portland Cement
2. White cement
C. LIME
1. High calcium hydrated lime containing not less than 90% by weight of
calcium oxide
D. LIME PUTTY
1. Quick lime properly slaked and screened through a 3 mm mesh sieve, stored
and properly protected for 15 days before using.
E. COLOR PIGMENTS
1. Approved manufacturer, lime-proof, non fading.
F. SAND
1. Natural siliceous sands from approved pits, hard, durable, clean and free from
adherent coating such as clay and from any appreciable amount of clay in
pellet form. It shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, salts,
coals or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials,
flaky or elongated particles in such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect
adversely the hardening, strength, durability or appearance of any material in
contact with it. The various sizes of particles of which sand is composed shall
be uniformly distributed throughout the mass and shall be graded within the
following limits:
Percent Passing (by Weight) Sieve Size
95 8
75-90 16
30-55 30
10-35 50
0- 7 100
2. Except as otherwise indicated, for finish coat of cement plaster, use sand
passing No. l2 sieve. For floated finish coat use sand passing No. 16 sieve.
For troweled finish coat use sand passing No. 20 sieve.
G. WATER
1. Drinking water or water of chemical composition acceptable for drinking,
except for bacteriological limits and shall be clean water free from oil, salt,
acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter.
2.2 PLASTER ACCESSORIES
A. Galvanized steel furring, lathing and other plaster accessories shall conform to the
material provisions of ASTM C 841. Plaster accessories shall include but not limited
to the following:

1. Metal Corner Beads: Fabricated from galvanized sheet, 5 mm radius bead
with 38 mm wide expanded type flanges.
a. Type: Bull nose, radius 19 mm minimum, with expanded flanges, at
external corners only to the height of 2.20 meters.
2. Strip Reinforcement: Smooth edge strips of expanded metal lath fabricated
from galvanized steel sheet, with uncoated steel painted after fabrication.
3. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with short or expanded flanges to suit
kinds of plaster bases galvanized steel.
4. Curved Casing Beads: Square-edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated
with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated on the Drawings.
5. Control Joints: Prefabricated, galvanized steel one-or two-piece type as
required. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints.
6. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large mesh diamond lath fabricated
from welded wire mesh from 1.2 mm diameter galvanized wire, specially
formed to reinforce corners of Portland cement plaster where exposed while
allowing full plaster encasement.
7. Expanded Metal Lath: Galvanized steel diamond mesh complying with
ASTM C 847 and shall have a minimum weight of 1.85 kg/m².
B. Coordinate the depth of accessories with the thickness and number of plaster coats
required in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by
Engineer.
2.3 FINISH COAT FOR EXTERNAL STUCCO PLASTER
A. Premixed Stucco: Colored Coat, trowel applied decorative finishing render, to provide
various textures. Consists of white Portland cement, special chemical additives, silica
sand and graded marble fillers (0 - 3.5mm)
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: The whole of the work shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any work rejected through non-compliance with the
specification shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall commence work when instructed and shall clear all unused materials
and plaster waste from Site when the work is complete.
B. Surfaces of masonry walls or concrete shall be well cleaned by wire brush; joints on
masonry shall be raked out at least 15 mm.
C. Projections, loose mortar and concrete fins shall be hacked off.
D. All surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with water before spatter-dash is applied.
E. Spatter-dash after application shall be sprayed with water for a period of 5 days.
F. Dots and bands shall be used to produce plaster surfaces level and true. Dots shall be
plumb of 50 x 100 mm dimension and thickness as required but not less than 15 mm
and shall be made of cement/sand mortar (using gypsum is not permitted) at
intervals not exceeding 2.0 m in horizontal and vertical directions, to cover the entire

surface to be plastered.
G. Dots shall be also at intersection of ceiling with walls and corners.
H. Bands shall extend in a horizontal or vertical direction between dots and be formed of
the same mortar as that of the coat applied. The side of the bands shall be left rough to
bond with plaster.
I. Plaster base coat shall be applied between bands to cover the entire work surface.
J. All faces shall be true and flat and angles shall be straight, level, and plumb.
K. Surface of undercoats shall be well scratched horizontally to provide a key for
finishing coats and left to cure. Surfaces indicated as floated shall be finished with a
wood or felt float to a flat surface free from trowel marks.
L. Surfaces indicated as troweled smooth shall be finished with a steel trowel to a smooth
surface free from trowel marks.
M. Beads and stops shall be fixed plumb, square and true to line and level, plaster shall be
flat with opening's frames.
N. Samples: Samples shall be prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer
for finishing coat of different items.
3.2 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all accessories required for a complete finished installation.
B. Set accessories plumb or level, and true to line. Use shims where necessary. Align
joints with concealed splices and tie plates. Attach accessories to substrate at not
more than 25 cm centers. Beads and screeds shall be in one piece where straight run
does not exceed 3 m.
C. Install continuous corner beads at all external corners of plaster.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, install continuous casing beads to terminate plaster at head
and jambs of doors and windows, at each side of expansion joints, and at internal
corner junctions of load bearing and non-load bearing elements.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install screeds at control joints and along top of wainscots.
3.3 MEASURING PLASTER MIX
A. Ingredients of the plaster mix shall be proportioned and measured by means of
calibrated clean boxes or containers or manufacturer’s packages so that the quantities
can be readily and accurately checked.
3.4 MIXING OF PLASTER
A. Mixing shall be by machine. The plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed
together and no more shall be mixed at one time than can be properly incorporated in
the work within 1/2 hour after mixing. The mixing shall continue for such time as
shall ensure uniform distribution of materials and uniform color and consistency. It is
important to note that the quantity of water used shall be carefully controlled. Do not
use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
B. Do not re-temper or use re-tempered plaster and all plaster which has begun to stiffen
shall be discarded.
C. No material shall be allowed to remain overnight in the mixers. Tools and implements
used in mixing or transporting plaster shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use, and

kept clean and free from previous mixes.
3.5 CURING
A. All plaster coats made of mortar containing cement shall be kept in a constant
moistened condition by being sprayed as often as required for five (5) days.
3.6 DRYING
A. Protect plaster from too rapid drying and provide air circulation when drying is too
slow.
B. For exterior plastering the Contractor shall provide a protective covering with
tarpaulins or canvas rolls which must be hung so that it is clear of the finished surface.
Any defects caused by inadequate protection shall be remedied at the Contractor's
expense.
3.7 COMPOSITION AND APPLICATION OF PLASTER
A. General
1. All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water and free water allowed to
disappear before plaster is applied.
2. Unless otherwise specified or indicated by the Engineer, plaster coat shall be
two-layer work, except for ceiling. Each coat shall be applied to each wall
and ceiling surface in one continuous operation and shall be applied at full
thickness down to floor level.
3. The mix of each successive layer or coat must never be richer in cement than
the mix used for the coat to which it is applied.
4. Two coats having the same mix properties can only be applied successively if
the second coat is thinner than the first.
5. The type and mix of plaster shall be for each location as indicated on
Drawings and on finishing table. Adjust mix proportions below within limits
to attain workability.
B. Interior Plastering for Walls
1. Spatter-dash (Tartasha): Shall be done by forcibly throwing on wet mix of
Portland cement and coarse sand in the proportion of 450 kg cement to 1 m3
sand and shall be kept wet with a fine water spray until set and shall be
allowed to harden before the next coat is applied.
2. Base Coat 1st Layer shall be applied to a thickness of l5 mm (including dash
coat) unless otherwise mentioned. The surface shall be brought to true planes
with all angles and corners to a right angle with rod and darby, well scored,
combed or cross-scratched in two directions to prepare a good mechanical key
for the following coat.
3. As soon as base coat has setup enough to carry two coats, the second coat
shall be applied to the depth required.
4. When plastering is applied in one coat the scratching shall be omitted.
5. Base coat mix shall be proportioned as follows:
3
a. 1 m sand
b. 250 kg ordinary cement
6. Finishing Layer (Float Coat): Shall be 5 mm thick of same proportions of 1st
layer and shall be applied as soon as 1st layer has set firmly bonded to the
background and can carry the second layers brought to a true even plane.
Steel trowel to uniformly smooth surfaces or wood float as directed, except
where other finish is required.
C. Interior Plastering for Ceiling
1. Spatter-dash coat and one 15 mm thick coat as specified herein before.
D. Exterior Plastering
1. Spatter-dash coat and one 15 mm thick coat as specified herein before.
2. Base Coat: Shall be 15 mm thick and proportioned as follows:
a. 300 kg ordinary Portland cement 1 m3 sand
b. Lime may be added as required.
c. Base coat shall be finished as per Clause 3.7.B.
d. Finishing Coat: Shall be either:
3. Proportioned as base course in Clause 3.6.B. applied by hand and the finish
shall be smooth, done by either steel troweling, wood floating, or by sponge to
give a smooth texture (to be ready for exterior paint application), or
4. Shall be proportioned as follows:
a. White cement
b. Marble or stone powder
c. Lime
5. Colored finish coat plastering shall be colored by the addition of coloring
agents and pigments to the engineer approval.
6. Finish shall be smooth or rough texture or pebble-dash (sprayed finish) as
required.
7. Smooth rendering shall be done by either steel toweling or wood floating.
Textured rendering shall be done by using special tools, cork, carpet float
hacks and blades or the edge of steel trowels.
8. Pebble dash (sprayed finish) shall be applied with an approved machine hand
operated or mechanically operated to give a honeycomb finish of even texture
and thickness. The sprayed finish shall be applied in an approved number of
separated coats allowing time for drying between coats.
9. Application in one continuous spraying operation to obtain a thick layer shall
not be permitted.
3.8 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Prior to start painting operations, damaged portions of plaster shall be repaired.
Patching and repairing shall be neatly and accurately done and shall match the finish
of the adjoining work.
B. Where plaster surfaces are marred, discolored, stained or otherwise damaged, patching
and repairing shall be carried to the limits as determined and where necessary, the
finish coat shall be removed and be replaced with new acceptable work. Patching,

repairing and joining work shall be neatly done.
C. Cut out broken or damaged portions of plaster and repair with new work. Cut out
cracks not less than 2.5 mm wide and plaster full and smooth.
D. Moisten edge of patch area before new plaster is applied. Match plaster patches to
adjacent existing work that is to remain.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of plastering work, sweep and clean floors throughout, including
ledges or other surfaces carrying plaster droppings.
4.1 GENERAL
drawings.
B. Plaster and rendering will be measured separately by type of plaster or rendering.
C. Work will be measured on the exposed surface.
D. Where work is measured geometrically by area, all non-plastered areas will be
deducted, but no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding 0.50 m2.
E. Plaster thickness will be measured from the face of the solid backing to the outer
surface exclusive of texture variations
F. On metal lath the thickness of plaster will be measured from the face of the lath.
G. The spatter-dash (Tartasha) shall not replace one of the specified numbers of coats.
A. Work measured by area (m2) will be classified as follows:
1. Walls and columns
2. Soffits, ceilings including sloping ceilings
3. Sides and soffits of beams
B. Plaster beads will not be measured separately unless it is clearly mentioned in the bill
of quantities
C. Plaster beads will be measured by length (m) separate for each type.
D. Metal lath will be measured by area (m2), rate includes suspension, metal mesh and all
plaster layers.
E. Covings, cornices and similar decorative items will be measured by length (m)
5.1 GENERAL
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labor, mixing, samples and
mock-ups, coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality
assurance, cutting and patching, cleaning and protecting and including but not limited
to the following ancillary works.
B. Material, which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at

C. No payment will be made for un-authorized operations.
removed and replaced on contractor’s expense.
1. Plastering around openings, connections to adjacent components including
sealing the joint.
2. Preparation of backgrounds.
3. Metal angle beads, stop beads and the like including working thereto.
4. Dubbing out.
5. Suspension system, panels and framed members including method of fixing,
and any depth of suspension system.
6. Support work and accessories for fittings including bridging.
7. Layout and treatment of joints and expansion joints, including extra material
for laps
8. Edge trims, angle trims and fire barriers,
9. Work of any width, height or girth

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3. Gypsum board bonded adhesively to interior concrete and masonry substrates.
4. Interior gypsum board ceilings and soffits.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants
1.3 REFERENCES
1. ASTM A568 / A568M - 15 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,
Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
Requirements
2. ASTM A641 / A641M - 09a (2014) Standard Specification for Zinc–Coated
(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
3. ASTM A645 / A645M - 10(2016) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel
Plates, 5 % and 51 2 % Nickel Alloy Steels, Specially Heat Treated
4. ASTM A653 / A653M - 15e1 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
5. ASTM C11 - 16 Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building
Materials and Systems
6. ASTM C1396 / C1396M - 14a Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
7. ASTM C475 / C475M - 15 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint
Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board
8. ASTM C514 - 04(2014) Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of
Gypsum Board
9. ASTM C645 - 14e1 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing
Members
10. ASTM C665 - 12 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing
11. ASTM C754 - 15 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products
12. ASTM C834 - 14 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 09 2900 - Gypsum Board

13. ASTM C840 - 16 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board
14. ASTM C919 - 12 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
15. ASTM C954 - 15 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in.
(0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness
16. ASTM C1002 - 16 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws
for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs
or Steel Studs
17. ASTM C1047 - 14a Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard
and Gypsum Veneer Base
18. ASTM D226 / D226M - 09 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic
Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
19. ASTM D4397 - 16 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for
Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
20. ASTM E90 - 09 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
21. ASTM E119 - 16a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials
22. ASTM E336 - 16 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound
Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings
23. ASTM E413 - 16 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
Concrete Elements
B. Gypsum Association (GA)
1. GA-214 - 10 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
2. GA-216-13 Application Finishing Gypsum Panel Products
3. GA - 219 Recommendations For Installation Of Steel Fire Door Frames In Steel
Stud-Gypsum Board Fire-Rated Partitions
4. GA-600-12 Fire Resistance Design Manual
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms
for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.5 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were
determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a
qualified independent testing agency.
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion
joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other
units of Work.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components
certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this
Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved,
authorized, or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible
to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and
addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum
board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and
other panel products from a single manufacturer.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from
either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from
a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies
are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following
requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire
Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance
Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Engineer.
2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire
resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to Engineer.
3. Deflection and Fire-stop Track: Top runner provided in fire-resistance-rated
assemblies indicated is labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer.
F. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated,
according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified
independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire
Resistance Design Manual." Ratings shall be as indicated on drawings:
a. STC rating of 54 or more, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.
G. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Assemblies: Provide and install moisture- and mold-
resistant glass-mat gypsum shaft-wall panel and wallboard products with moisture-
resistant fiberglass mat faced surface where indicated on Drawings and in all locations that
might be subject to limited moisture exposure during construction.
H. Mockups: Prior to finishing gypsum board assemblies, construct mockups of at least 9 m2
in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well as qualities of materials
and execution. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of Work.
1. Construct mockups for each of the following applications:
a. Wall surfaces indicated to receive non-textured paint finishes.
b. Ceiling surfaces indicated to receive non-textured paint finishes.
2. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of Work.
a. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Engineer.
b. Notify Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when
mockups will be constructed.
c. Construct the mockup room in accordance with the approved shop
drawings and manufacturer literature and recommendations. Field
measure the air borne sound transmission of the mockup room in
accordance with ASTM E 336. Use the field-test value to modify the
constructional details to achieve the required rating.
d. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
e. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
f. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed
condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
g. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or
gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain
not less than 4 °C. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not
less than 10 °C for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry, and not
more than 35 °C.

C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid
drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED & FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling
construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Chemical anchor.
2. Expansion anchor.
C. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.6 mm thick.
D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.1-mm diameter.
E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
G. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22.2 mm wide, formed from 1.6-mm-
thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653M, Z 180 coating designation,
with bolted connections and 8-mm diameter bolts.
H. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 1.5-mm minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 11.1
mm wide flanges, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 50.8 mm deep, 88 kg/100 m, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Furring Channels: 19 mm deep, 45 kg/100 m, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653 M, Z180 hot-dip galvanized corrosion resistant
coating, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90
degrees and doubled over to form 5-mm- wide minimum lip (return), and complying with
the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.84 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 63.5 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Protective Coating: Z180 hot-dip galvanized corrosion resistant coating hot-dip
galvanized coating.
J. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 22.2 mm, and minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653M, Z180 hot-dip galvanized corrosion resistant
coating.
K. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce
sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653M or ASTM
A 568M to form 13 mm deep channel of the following configuration:

1. Single- or Double-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face
connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web) or hat-shaped channel,
with 38 mm wide face connected to flanges by double-slotted or expanded-metal
legs (webs).
L. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard
direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross-furring members
that interlock to form a modular supporting network.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653M, Z180 hot-dip galvanized corrosion resistant
coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees
and doubled over to form 5-mm-wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the
following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.84 mm as follows:
a. For head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and other
openings.
b. Where indicated.
2. Depth: 92.1 mm, unless otherwise indicated and directed by Engineer.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner designed to prevent cracking of
gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of the structure above
fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653M or ASTM A 568M. Thickness
as indicated for studs, and width to accommodate depth of studs, and of the following
configuration:
1. Top Runner with Compressible Flanges: 63.5 mm deep flanges with V-shaped
offsets that compress when pressure is applied from construction above.
D. Deflection and Fire-stop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads to expand
and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining continuity of the
assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except configuration, of thickness
indicated for studs and width to accommodate depth of studs indicated with flanges offset
at midpoint to accommodate gypsum board thickness.
1. Offset Configuration: Shadow-line design with offset projecting out from depth of
stud.
E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of
base (uncoated) metal as follows:
2. Depth: 38.1 mm.
F. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel
sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.84
mm, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for
furring.

G. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce
sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653M or ASTM
A 568M to form 12.7 mm deep channel of the following configuration:
1. Single- or Double-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face
connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web) or hat-shaped channel,
with 38 mm wide face connected to flanges by double-slotted or expanded-metal
legs (webs).
H. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or
non-slotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653M or ASTM A
568M; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.45 mm, face flange of 31.8
mm, wall-attachment flange of 22.2 mm, and of depth required to fit insulation thickness
indicated.
I. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel, 1.5-mm minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
metal and 11.1 mm wide flanges, 38.1 mm deep, 45 kg/100 m, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with
ASTM A 653M or ASTM A 568M, length and width as indicated, and with a minimum
base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.45 mm, unless otherwise indicated and directed by Engineer.
K. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members
securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturers for applications indicated.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will
minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 1200 mm.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Foil backed where indicated.
3. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
4. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
5. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for pre-filling.
7. Thickness: 15.9 mm where indicated.
C. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s) for Multilayer Applications: Gypsum wallboard, ASTM C
1396, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Foil backed where indicated.
3. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
4. Type: Proprietary type matching that indicated for face layer and as required for
specific fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
5. Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Thickness: 15.9 mm.
D. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396, with manufacturer's standard edges, of type
and thickness indicated below:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where
indicated.
E. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where
indicated.
F. PVC Gypsum Board ceiling tiles, ASTM C1396:
1 Material:Plasterboard,non asbestos,sulfate free
2 Surface:High quality PVC
3 Backside: High quality PET aluminized foil Dimension: 595 x 595 mm /
603x603mm, Thickness: 12.5mm.
4 Thickness: 0.5 mm
5 Edge: Square
6 Packing:7mm: 9pcs / 8mm: 8pcs/ 9.5mm: 6pcs /
12.5mm: 5pcs in carton wrapped and foiled
7 NRC: 0.1. - 0.3
8 Light reflection:0.75
9 Chemical& Microbial:PVC facing and PET aluminized foil provide excellent
resistance to chemicals and microbes
10 Humidity resistance: Up to 95% relative humidity
2.4 STC-RATED ASSEMBLIES:
Number of Layers of Wallboard on

Each Wall
Surface 1+1 1+2 2+2
Wall construction 90 mm steel studs 45 49 56
150 mm load-bearing steel studs with 58 60 63
resilient metal channels on one side
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner-bead, edge trim, and control joints complying
with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following
requirement:
a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Corner-bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive
joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
c. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint
compound. Use L-bead where indicated.
d. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without
application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening.
B. Accessory for Curved Edges: Corner-bead formed of metal, plastic, or metal combined
with plastic, with either notched or flexible flanges that are bendable to curvature radius.
C. Accessories for Exterior Installations: Corner-bead, edge trim, and control joints formed
from steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc complying with ASTM C
1047.
1. Corner-bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Edge trims complying with shapes LC-bead, unless otherwise indicated.
3. One-piece control joint formed from rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable
strip covering slot opening.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape
with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum
board and joint treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed,
chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or
for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint
compounds applied over it.
2. For pre-filling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum
board manufacturer.
3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board
behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer.
4. For topping compound, use sand-able formulation.
D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based
products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over
fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories.
b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
c. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping
compounds.
2. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site.
a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over
fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories.
b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
c. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping
compounds.
2.7 MARMOX BOARDS

A. Provided in different thickness from 4mm to 50mm (ontractor shall provide a complete
structural calculation sheet to reflect actual loading and wind loading criteria according to
opening size, movement type, and number of panels and wind loads and to propose the
corresponding section that retain such loads and to submit to Engineer for review and
approval)
Compressive strength DIN 53421 300 KN/m2

at 10% deflection
Water absorption (Capillary) DIN 53428 0.2 % by vol.
Water absorption (submerged) DIN 53428 Negligible
Fire property BS476 part 6.7 – Class 0 –
DIN4102 B1
Thermal expansion ASTM D - 696 10 - 6 x 30
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard complying
with ASTM C 834 and Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with
referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating
gypsum panels.
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting
hollow metal door frames.
D. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum
panels to steel framing.
E. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.84 mm thick.
2. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel
members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
G. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514.
H. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, non-perforated.
I. Foam Gaskets: Closed-cell vinyl foam adhesive-backed strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 3.2 mm thick, in width to suit metal stud size
indicated.
J. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by
combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with
ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
K. Thermal Insulation: Material indicated below, of thickness and width to fill voids formed
by Z-furring members:
1. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket
insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without
membrane facing).
a. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock
wool.
L. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating
as follows:
1. 0.15 mm, 7.5 ng/Pa x s x m2.
M. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow
metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation
of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages
to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their
full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.
B. Before sprayed-on fireproofing is applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners
(tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. Where offset anchor
plates are required, provide continuous units fastened to building structure not more than
600 mm o.c.
C. After sprayed-on fireproofing has been applied, remove only as much fireproofing as
needed to complete installation of gypsum board assemblies without reducing thickness of
fireproofing below that is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect
remaining fireproofing from damage.
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and
with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, and heavy trim, grab bars, toilet
accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States
Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of
loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
a. Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
b. Install deflection and fire-stop track top runner at fire-resistance-rated assemblies
where indicated.
 Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud
clip.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension
system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset
resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental
suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eyes-crews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise
fail.
4. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are
secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in
a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less
than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 1200 mm o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1200 mm o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 400 mm o.c.
4. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 600 mm o.c.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that
cross-furring or grid suspension members are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m as measured
both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as
indicated.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members
to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. For exterior soffits, install cross-bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift
according to details on Drawings.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum
board stud assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips
or foam gaskets between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening
surfaces do not vary more than 3 mm from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent
framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1. Cut studs 13 mm short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain
ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below
floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to
make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated.
1. Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 400 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Construction: Space studs 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each
gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. For curved partitions, install steel framing as follows:
1. Cut top and bottom runners through leg and web at 50-mm intervals for arc length.
In cutting lengths of runners, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 300
mm at ends of arcs.
2. Bend runners to uniform curve of radius indicated and locate straight lengths so
they are tangent to arcs.
3. Support outside (cut) leg of runners by clinching a 25 mm high by 0.55 mm thick
steel sheet strip to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.
4. Attach runners to structural elements at floor and ceiling with fasteners located 50
mm from ends and spaced 600 mm o.c.
5. Attach runners to suspended ceilings with toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors
located 50 mm from ends and spaced 406 mm o.c. in between where attached to
suspended ceilings.
6. Attach runners to suspended ceilings with toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors
located 50 mm from ends and spaced 400 mm o.c. in between where attached to
suspended ceilings.
a. Screw runners directly to suspension grid of suspended acoustical tile
ceilings where runners intersect grid.
7. Position studs vertically with open sides facing in same direction and engaging
floor and ceiling runners. Begin and end each arc with a stud and space
intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended by gypsum
board manufacturer for radii indicated. Attach studs to runners with 9.5-mm- long
pan head framing screws. On straight lengths at ends of arcs, place studs 150 mm
o.c. with last stud left free standing.
H. Frame door openings to comply applicable published recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either
directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for
cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 12.7 mm
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.
3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or
roof structure above where directed by Engineer.
I. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none
indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match
framing required above door heads.
J. Install thermal insulation as follows:
1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members' spaced 600
mm o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to
wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-
driven fasteners spaced 600 mm o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of
furring channel to web of attached channel. Start from this furring channel with
standard width insulation panel and continue in regular manner. At interior corners,
space second member no more than 300 mm from corner and cut insulation to fit.
4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 250 mm staples
fabricated from 1.6 mm diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of
member.
K. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor
transmission. Secure in place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend
vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those
filled with loose mineral-fiber insulation.
2. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall
studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter
of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners 400 mm o.c.
3. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and
similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape.
4. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it
with the installation of gypsum board or other construction.
3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to
comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels
unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints
and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end
joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp
panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1.5
mm of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do
not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides
of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where
possible.
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and
doors over 813 mm wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert
gypsum panels into frames.
I. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space
between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum
panels.
J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally.
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 0.7 m2
in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other
structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut
gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural
members; allow 6.4-to 9.5-mm- wide joints to install sealant.
L. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments,
except floors, as detailed. Provide 6.4 to 12.7 mm wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
M. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer,
install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.
N. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters,
behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of
acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C
919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-
flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings.
O. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 304.8 mm o.c. for vertical applications.
P. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 203.2 mm o.c.
3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with
no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin-set ceramic tile and similar
rigid applied wall finishes, comply with the following:
1. Install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels at showers, tubs, and where
indicated. Install with 6.4-mm open space where panels abut other construction or
penetrations.
2. Install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce
a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive
water-resistant panels.
C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers
and gypsum wallboard face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers
located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring
member with base-layer joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
1. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face
layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to
framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints
of base layer over furring members.
D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Apply base layers of gypsum panels and face layer to base
layers as follows:
1. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
F. Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a
substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply
with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten
gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
G. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to
supports, with end joints staggered over supports.
1. Install with 6.4 mm open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
H. For curved partitions, install gypsum panels as follows:

1. Select gypsum panel lengths and cut them as required to produce one unbroken
panel covering each curved surface plus 300 mm long straight sections at ends of
curves and tangent to them.
2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed when panels are
installed over a curve and where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply
with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations relative to curve radii,
wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede
installing wetted gypsum panels.
3. Apply gypsum panels horizontally with wrapped edges perpendicular to studs. On
convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and
fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around the curve. On concave
side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel
ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 300 mm o.c.
4. For double-layer construction, apply gypsum board base layer horizontally and
fasten to studs with screws spaced 400 mm o.c. Center gypsum board face layers
over joints in base layer and fasten to studs with screws spaced 300 mm o.c.
5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners
used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory
manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install corner-bead at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge
trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are
indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and
back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are
installed.
3. Install U-bead where indicated.
D. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and
in specific locations approved by Engineer for visual effect.
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, and flanges of corner-bead, edge trim,
control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
B. Pre-fill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint
compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having
flanges not requiring tape.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as
recommended by trim accessory manufacturer.

E. Use one of the following joint compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels
specified:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat:
Setting-type joint compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Sand-able, setting-type joint
compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat:
Setting-type joint compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-
purpose or topping compound.
4. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping
compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping
compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping
compound.
F. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply
first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface. For skim coat, use joint compound specified for third coat, or a product specially
formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Touch up and
sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects,
tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration.
H. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound.
I. Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting-type joint compounds to pre-fill joints
and embed tape, and for first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats, with the last coat being
a sand-able product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need
for sanding. Sand between coats and after finish coat.
1. Painting exterior gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in
another Division 9 Section.
J. Finish water-resistant gypsum backing board forming base for ceramic tile to comply with
ASTM C 840 and gypsum board manufacturer's directions for treatment of joints behind
tile.
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Engineer will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to
installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do
not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies
have been corrected.
1. Notify Engineer one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project, or
part of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation.
2. Prior to notifying Engineer, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum
board ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping
systems.
c. Installation of air duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that
ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
5.1 GENERAL

A. The following ancillary works will be included in the unit price rates:
1. Plasterboard linings and partitions
a. Providing openings in walls.
b. Reinforcing of door openings.
c. Cut-outs for electrical and mechanical components and mounting of
equipment in co-operation with the respective trades.
d. Provision of wall angles for suspended ceilings.
e. Filling of joints within plasterboards and sealing of joints with penetrating
elements (pipes, etc.).
f. Fixings including head and sole plates, studs, stiffening sections, firings
and channels, fixings for heavy fittings, and other fixing materials,
g. Forming blank openings, door openings and window openings and the
like, including additional materials
h. Jointing including fair joints, jointing battens, fillets, beads and the like,
joint and reinforcing tape
i. Finishing including plaster for dabs, filling and finishing
j. Work at any height above floor level
k. Work of any width, height or girth
l. Working overhand
m. Working over and around obstructions, integral services, into recesses and
the like, including additional materials
n. Angles, junctions, abutments and ends of linings of partitions
2. Suspended ceilings
a. Suspension system and framed members including method of fixing, and
any depth of suspension system

b. Support work and accessories for fittings including bridging
c. Layout and treatment of joints including expansion joints
d. Edge trims, angle trims and fire barriers

e. Work of any width, height or girth
f. Working over and around obstructions and integral services including
additional materials
g. Access panels and holes for pipes, services and the like including collars

SECTION 09 3013 – CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per
ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per
ASTM C 499).
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C499 - 09(2014) Standard Test Method for Facial Dimensions and
Thickness of Flat, Rectangular Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile
2. ASTM E303 - 93(2013) Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface
Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI 137.1 Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) 2012
2. A108.1A Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland
Cement Mortar - 2013
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Tile patterns and locations.
2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
tiles or sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and
construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations,
include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at
least 300 mm square, mounted on braced cementatious backer units, and with
grouted joints using product complying with specified requirements and
approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Engineer.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished
comply with requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names of architects and owners, and other
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 09 3013 Ceramic tiling

information specified.
G. Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-
purpose tile with specified requirements.
H. Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of
tile-setting and -grouting products with specified requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and
variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same
production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a
uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single
manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.
D. Mock-up: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and
finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply
with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mock-up in the location and of the size as directed by Engineer.
2. Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of
Work
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
6. When directed, demolish and remove mock-up from Project site.
7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, foreign matter, and other
causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact
bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated
for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures,
patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials
complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Engineer's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors,
textures, and patterns for products of type indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories as selected by the Engineer from
manufacturer’s full range.
C. All tiles are to be of ribbed keyed back surfaces.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Tiles and Fittings: For floors and walls shall conform to requirements of
ANSI A-137.1, with characteristics suitable for use, and as follows:
1. Floor tiles: Unglazed with non-slip finish for floor tiles size as indicated on
drawings, colors and patterns to be selected by the Engineer, water
absorption E < 3%, ANSI A-137.1.
2. Wall tiles: Satin glazed with cushion edges and spacer, size as indicated on
Drawings, colors and patterns to be selected by the Engineer if not indicated,
3% < E ≤ 6%, ANSI A-137.1.
3. Coefficient of friction (COF)
a. COF ˃ 0.5 for residential
b. COF ˃ 0.6 for commercial
4. Specific gravity: 2.5 - 2.6 g/cm3.
5. Floor slip resistance (The Pendulum slip resistance tester- ASTM E303)
a. External ramps ≤ 54
b. External walkways and pedestrian crossings ≤ 45
c. Shopping center food courts ≤ 35
d. Elevator lobbies ≤ 25.
6. Listello trim tile borders with cushion edges and spacer, size as indicated on
Drawings, colors and patterns to be selected by the Engineer.
7. Glazed wall tile trim shapes: coved base, straight base, bull nose cap,
surface bull nose cap, bull nose external corner and/or surface bull nose
external corner as per drawings and directed by Engineer.
8. Ceramic mosaic trim shapes: coved base, bead (bull nose) cap, surface bull
nose cap, bead (bull nose) external corner, surface bull nose external corner,
coved internal corner ,tapered transition as per drawings and directed by
Engineer.

9. Quarry tile trim shapes: coved base, coved base with surface bull nose top,
surface bull nose cap as per drawings and directed by Engineer.
10. Accessories for glazed wall tile: soap and paper holder, as per drawings and
directed by Engineer.
11. Thresholds: granite, marble, slate, solid polymer, as per drawings and
12. Waterproofing: PVC sheet, fabric-reinforced, modified-bituminous sheet,
fabric-reinforced, fluid-applied rubber, urethane waterproofing and tile-
setting adhesive, as per drawings and directed by Engineer.
13. Crack-suppression membranes: fabric-reinforced, modified-bituminous
sheet, fabric-reinforced, fluid-applied rubber, unreinforced, fluid-applied
rubber, urethane waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive as per drawings and
14. Elastomeric Sealants: One-part, mildew-resistant silicone, Chemical resistant
as per drawings and directed by Engineer.
B. Color body Porcelain Tile
1. Tile size, color and texture: As per drawings and directed by Engineer.
2. Moisture Absorption: Less than 0.5 percent.
2.3 MORTAR FOR SETTING TILE
A. Tiles shall be installed with mortar consists of 4:1 Sand and Cement mix.
B. Portland cement shall comply with Egyptian Standard Specifications (ESS No. 373).
C. Sand conforming to Egyptian Standard Specifications (ESS No. 1108).
D. Water: Water shall be clean, potable and free of deleterious quantities of acids,
alkalis, and organic materials.
E. Admixtures: The use of admixtures including color pigments, accelerators, retarders,
water repellent agents, or other admixtures shall not be permitted except as specified
or as directed by the Architect.
A. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming
tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated
by tile and grout manufacturers.
2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing
time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy
films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by
referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations
indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint
locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Engineer.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain
soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a
terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a
heavy-duty wire brush.
B. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to
types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile
installation schedules.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or
built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,
fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the
Engineer. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the
same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or
on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths,
E. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
F. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (latex-Portland cement grouts), comply with
ANSI A108.10.
3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor

Installation Schedule and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.
1. Spread sand bed on concrete substrates; set tiles with thick semi-dry mortar
bedding and 1 to 2 mm thick slurry coat to cover the still-plastic mortar
bedding. Place reinforcing wire fabric at mid-height of bedding. Grout tiles
with prefabricated prepackaged latex Portland cement grout.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Paver Tile: 3.0 mm.
2. Use plastic spacers to maintain joint widths.
3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Place fresh mortar on back of tile, press, push and pull the tile in to achieve as near
100% coverage and contact of tile with setting material and substrate as possible. The
coverage shall be sufficiently distributed to give full support of the tile. Make sure
that all corners and edges are well backed with mortar. Leave no hollow corners or
edges.
B. Ensure there is a minimum 2 mm or mortar between tile and substrate after tile has
been beaten into place. Grout tiles with prefabricated prepackaged latex Portland
cement grout.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces
so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile
and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days
after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing
fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before
and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating
manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and
remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,
broken, un-bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Engineer,
that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile
work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after
grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from
tile surfaces.

4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid will be measured in place or determined from drawings
B. When measured in place, work will be measured on the exposed surface.
exceeding 0.10 m2
D. Tiled surfaces that join into skirting coved skirting, coved beads or rounded moldings
shall be measured from the top of those pieces.
characteristic, for ceilings, walls and floors, including internal and external angles,
stop and return fittings.
B. Coves and decorative strips will be measured by linear m.
C. Floor channels will be measured by linear m including outlets, corners, stop ends and
the like.
D. Stair and step treads will be measured by linear m.
E. Wall copings, sills and the like will be measured by linear m
F. Sanitary fittings such as towel bars, soap holders and the like will be enumerated.
G. Separation layers will be measured by m2. No allowance will be made for
measurement of overlapping joints. No deductions will be made for voids not
exceeding 0.10 m2.
H. Division strips will be measured by linear m.
5.1 GENERAL
samples, supervision, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the
site and including ancillary works.
C. No payment will be made of unauthorized operations.
A. The unit price rate for tiling shall include tiling around openings, connections to
adjacent components, laid to pattern, falls and cross falls, bay jointed, sloped and
curved surfaces, cuttings to angles, boundaries, junctions, cuttings to holes for pipes,
sockets, switches, outlets and the like, fixing templates for sanitary fittings, delivery
and installation of trim units, preparation of backgrounds including priming if
required by manufacturer's instructions, all protection measures, grouting and
cleaning.

B. The unit price rate for tiling shall include preparation of all movement joints
including structural expansion joints, cleaning, priming, joint filling and sealing.
C. Work at any height above floor level
D. Any width, height, girth, size or shape of slab or feature
E. Bedding and fixing including bedding mortars, adhesives and fixing materials
F. All cutting and internal and external angles, intersections and joints
G. Layout and treatment of joints including grouting
H. Movement joints
I. Cleaning, sealing and polishing
J. Working over and around obstructions
K. Working overhead

SECTION 09 6340 - STONE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Dimension stone flooring.
2. Dimension stone stair treads and risers.
3. Stone thresholds.
4. Stone bases.
A. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive-hardness value of 12, as determined
per ASTM C 241.
B. Static Coefficient of Friction: values as follows:
1. Level Surfaces: A minimum of 0.6.
2. Step Treads: A minimum of 0.6.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM C241 / C241M - 15e1 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance
of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
2. ASTM C503 / C503M - 15 Standard Specification for Marble Dimension
Stone
3. ASTM A1064 / A1064M - 16a Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire
4. ASTM D1752 - 04a (2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge
natural stone and mosaic wall tiling in normal internal condition
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and other manufactured
products specified.
1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include data on physical
properties required by referenced ASTM standards.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of stone paving and
flooring, including dimensions and profiles of stone units; arrangement and details of
jointing; and details showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of related
work.
1. Include large-scale details of decorative surfaces and inscriptions.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 09 6340 Stone flooring

C. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard samples of actual
products showing the full range of colors available.
D. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of
stone required; not less than 300 mm square. Include 2 or more samples in each set
showing the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in
completed Work.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and
owners, and other information specified.
F. Maintenance Data: For stone paving and flooring to include in the maintenance
manuals specified in the Special Conditions of the Contract. Include Product Data for
stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and the names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of local sources for products.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed stone
paving and flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project
that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in producing stone paving and
flooring similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from
a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties and to cut and finish material without delaying the Work.
1. Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry, whether specified in this
Section or in another Section of the Specifications.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material,
grout, admixture, stone accessory, sealant, and other material from a single
manufacturer for each product.
E. Mock-up : Before installing stone paving and flooring, construct mock-up to verify
selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-up to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mock-up in the location indicated or as directed by Engineer.
2. Build mock-up: Approximately 2400 mm square.
3. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will
be constructed.
4. Maintain mock-up during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. Approval of mock-up does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mock-up, unless such deviations
are specifically approved by Engineer in writing.
b. When directed, demolish and remove mock-up from Project site.
c. Approved mock-up in an undisturbed condition at the time of
Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other
causes.
1. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with non-staining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone.
Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
2. Store cementations materials off ground, under cover, and in dry location.
3. Store aggregate materials covered and in dry location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE SOURCES
A. Available Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, stone
varieties that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those
indicated in the Drawings.
2.2 STONE, GENERAL
A. Match samples approved by the Engineer for variety, color, finish, and other stone
characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. Types of stone are indicated on the
Drawing.
1. Where 2 or more stone types listed in the Drawings are identical except for
finish, provide the same variety from the same source for each type.
B. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural integrity or
function.
C. Provide stone from a single quarry for each variety of stone required.
1. Provide matched blocks extracted from contiguous locations in a single bed
of quarry stratum unless stone from blocks randomly selected for aesthetic
effect is approved by Engineer.
D. Quarry stone in a manner to ensure as-quarried block orientations yield finished stone
with required characteristics.
E. Make quarried blocks available for examination by Engineer for appearance
characteristics.
2.3 MARBLE
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C503 / C503M.
B. Type: To be the best quality of types indicated on the Drawings.
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS
A. General: Provide stone thresholds free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing
structural integrity or function and from one source for each stone type and quality
specified.
B. Size and Profile: As indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent
floor finishes.
2.5 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: E.S.S. 373 for natural color and E.S.S. 1031 for white, or a blend to
produce mortar color indicated
B. Aggregate: E.S.S. 1108 and as indicated below:
1. For joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing 1.18-mm sieve.
2. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing 1.18-
mm sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, white sand or ground, white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, colored sand or ground marble,
granite, or other sound stone, as required to match Engineer's sample.
C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory
performance in stone mortars.
D. Water-Emulsion Latex Additive: Add at Project site to cement-sand mortar mix as
recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
E. Water: Potable.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: Resilient plastic shims, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint
thicknesses.
B. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded-wire fabric, 50.8 by 50.8 mm by 1.6-
mm- diameter wire, complying with ASTM A1064, except for minimum wire size.
C. Control-Joint System: Is to be prefabricated, heavy-duty EPDM rubber section
reinforced with stainless steel angles and confirming to the requirements of BS 5385:
Part 3. Select depth of section to comply with depth of stone slabs or tiles and
bedding mortar according to manufacturer's details.
D. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
E. Cleaner: Provide stone cleaners specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and
applications indicated as recommended by stone producer and sealer manufacturer if
a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds
containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
F. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer not affecting color or physical
properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application
indicated.
G. Sealants: Comply with Division 7, Section “Joint Sealants”.
2.7 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone paving and flooring in sizes and shapes required to comply
with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. Cut stone to fit stone pattern as indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Produce
units to minimize field cutting for thickness, face sizes, and within fabrication

tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source.
1. Thickness of Stone Units: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than
thickness recommended by stone manufacturer or supplier and the following:
a. Nominal thickness for flooring tiles or slabs: 20 mm.
b. Nominal thickness for stair treads: 40 mm
c. Nominal thickness for stair risers: 20 mm
d. Nominal thickness for bases: 20 mm.
2. Stone Edges:
a. Square for floor tiles or slabs.
b. Comply with details indicated on Drawings: for bases, treads and
risers.
3. Cut stone to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated.
a. Joint Width: 1.5 mm.
4. Clean sawn backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other
natural markings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural
markings occur.
2. Arrange units in pattern indicated on Drawings.
3. Arrange units in blend pattern; where no pattern indicated on Drawings.
D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in
place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units
match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in
approved samples and mock-up .
E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for
finish under each type of stone required and to match approved samples and mock-up
.
1. Polished Finish: Grind exposed surfaces and edges in the workshop to a high
luster with reflection.
2. Honed Finish: is obtained by grinding in the workshop to a low luster
without reflections.
3. Flamed Surface Finish: is obtained in the workshop by factory application of
high temperature flames to spall the surface resulting in textured dull finish.
2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written
instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar and grout of uniform
quality and with optimum performance characteristics.

1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementatious materials, water, and
aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard
mortar and grout when they have reached initial set.
B. Latex-Modified-Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix Portland
cement, aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with latex additive
manufacturer's written instructions and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a
moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone. Minimum cement content shall be
30 kg per each cubic meter of sand. For latex-modified-Portland cement setting-bed
mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water according to latex additive
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cement-Paste Slush Coat: Mix slush coat to a consistency similar to that of thick
cream and consisting of either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water.
1. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix
Portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply
with latex additive manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Pointing Mortar: Provide pointing mortar mixed to match Engineer's sample and
complying with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and
the following:
1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement
ratio of 1:10, by weight.
E. Adhesive Bedding: For fixing stone slabs or tiles over plywood and steel substrates is
to be white, two-component, urethane-based adhesive certified by manufacturer to be
applicable for exterior and interior applications and for setting ceramic tiles over
exterior grade plywood and steel substrates. Tensile strength at break is to be 0.42
MPa minimum. Cured adhesive is to be non-flammable and non-toxic. Grout is to be
compatible material as recommended by manufacturer. Colour is to be selected by
the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive stone paving and flooring and conditions under which
stone will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone paving
and flooring.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of stone paving and flooring.
2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.

B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond,
including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean stone surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and
foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fibre
brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that
contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
A. Execute stone paving and flooring installation by skilled mechanics and employ
skilled stone fitters at the site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
B. Use power saws to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges eased
slightly to prevent snipping.
C. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings. Match for color and pattern
by using units numbered in sequence as indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce tight and neat
joints.
E. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings
and Shop Drawings. Joint-sealant materials and installation are specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Line: For position shown in plan for edges of steps or treads, changes in
color or finish, and continuous joint lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm, 6 mm
in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
B. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m,
or 10 mm maximum from level or slope indicated, gradual variation.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or one-
fourth of the nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8 mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.5 INSTALLING STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement-paste slush coat over surface of concrete about 15 minutes before
placing setting bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out before placing
setting bed. Do not exceed 1.5-mm thickness for cement-paste slush coat.
C. Apply mortar setting bed over cement-paste slush coat immediately after slush coat
has been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at sub-grade
elevations required for accurate setting of stone to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only as much mortar setting bed as can be covered with stone before
initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that have
reached initial set before placing stone.

1. Place reinforcing wire fabric, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and
supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Do not butt
edges against vertical surfaces.
E. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing stone on
setting bed, apply uniform 1.5-mm- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each
stone unit with a flat trowel.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with
setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit
in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and
disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints
flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
H. Movement (Control) Joints in Floors: Divide floor areas into controllable bays with
movement (Control) joints as recommended in BS 5385: Part 1, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings. Also install movement joints around columns, stairs, lift
wells and wherever movement is anticipated including at junctions with walls.
I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints in stone floors coinciding on those in the
underlaying slabs on grade or structural slabs. Comply with details indicated on
Drawings. Expansion joints in floors overlaying slabs on grade are to include
aluminum frames, filler as specified in this section and preformed seal.
3.6 INSTALLING STONE THRESHOLDS
A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of setting
bed as abutting stone flooring, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in thin-set, latex-Portland cement mortar at locations where
mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above other adjacent flooring.
B. At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, cut back and discard any setting bed
material from the other finish side and leave mortar surface uniform with surface of
threshold.
3.7 STONE FINISH TO METAL COVERS
A. Adhere stone using epoxy-based setting and grouting adhesive certified by
manufacture to be applicable to metal surface.
B. Joint width is to be 1.50 mm.
C. Comply with adhesive manufacturer’s printed instructions.
A. Remove and replace stone paving and flooring of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be
repaired if methods and results are approved by Engineer.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone paving, flooring, and joints not matching approved samples and mock-
up.
4. Stone paving and flooring not complying with other requirements indicated.

B. Replace in a manner that results in stone paving and flooring's matching approved
samples and mock-up, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence
of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone paving and flooring as work progresses. Remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Clean stone paving and flooring after setting and pointing are complete. Use
procedures recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
E. Apply sealer to cleaned stone flooring according to sealer manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect stone paving and flooring during construction with non-staining Kraft paper.
Where adjoining areas require construction work access, cover stone paving and
flooring with a minimum of 19 mm untreated plywood over non-staining Kraft
paper.
4.1 GENERAL
drawings.
B. Work will be measured on the exposed surface
exceeding 0.50 m2
characteristic.
B. Coves, decorative strips etc. will be enumerated.
C. Floor channels will be measured by linear m including outlets, corners, stop ends and
the like.
D. Stair treads and risers (step is one unit consists of tread and riser) will be measured
by linear m for each specified type, grade and surface characteristic.
E. Separation layers will be measured by m2. No allowance will be made for
measurement of overlapping joints. No deductions will be made for void not
exceeding 0.50 m2.
5.1 GENERAL
equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, labour, mixing,
samples, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the site and
contractor’s expense.

C. No payment will be made for unauthorized operations.
A. The unit price rate will include tiling around openings, connections to adjacent
components, laid to pattern, falls and cross falls, bay jointing, sloped surfaces,
cuttings to holes for pipes, sockets, switches, outlets and the like, fixing templates,
preparation of backgrounds including priming, grouting, protecting and cleaning.
B. The unit price rate for tiling will include all movement joints including structural
expansion joints, cleaning, priming, joint filling and sealing.
C. Any width, height, girth, size or shape of slab or feature.
D. Bedding and fixing including bedding mortars, adhesives, wax and fixing materials.
E. All cutting and internal and external angles, intersections and joints.
F. Layout and treatment of joints including grouting.
G. Movement joints.
H. Cleaning, sealing, waxing and polishing.
I. Working over and around obstructions.
J. Protection by any satisfactory means approved by Engineer.

2019
SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, specifications, and installation
instructions for each material specified except primer.
B. Samples:
1. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: 12 inch square sections, each pattern and color
required.
2. Solid Vinyl Sheet Flooring: 12 inch square sections, each pattern and color
required.
3. Base: 12 inch long sections, each size and color required.
4. Edge Strips: 12 inch long sections, each type and color required.
5. Color Samples: Manufacturer's standard patterns, colors and textures for
resilient flooring, bases, and edge strips.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates: Certificates required under Quality Assurance Article.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Maintenance Data: Deliver 2 copies, covering the installed products, to the
Director's Representative.
A. Compatibility of Materials: Associated materials which are required for the
installation of sheet flooring shall be made by or recommended by the flooring
manufacturer.
B. Certifications: Furnish certification from flooring installer that the substrate surfaces
have been examined and are acceptable for installation of the Work of this Section.
A. Environmental Requirements: Continuously heat spaces to receive flooring to a
temperature of 68 degrees F for at least 48 hours prior to flooring installation, during
the installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
B. Environmental Requirements: Make arrangements thru the Director's Representative
for having the temperature in the spaces to receive flooring maintained at 20 degrees
C for 48 hours prior to flooring installation, during the installation, and for 48 hours
after installation.
C. Condition flooring materials by placing them in the spaces where they will be
installed for at least 48 hours prior to installation.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: through-wearing- surface pattern; 180 cm wide rolls,
minimum 2 mm overall thickness.
1. Patterns and Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard patterns and
colors, or as indicated on the Drawings
2. Backing: Inorganic.
B. Solid Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous vinyl composition, non-layered and non-
backed construction, pattern and color extending through total thickness of flooring,
and meeting the wear layer gage and composition, flexibility, indentation and
solvent-resistance requirements of FS L-F-475, Type II, Grade A.
1. Thickness: 0.080 inch.
2. Roll Width: Minimum 6 feet.
3. Patterns and Colors: As selected from the manufacturer's standard patterns
and colors.
4. Patterns and Colors: As indicated on the Drawings.
C. Vinyl Base: FS SS-W-40, Type II; 4 inches high, 0.080 inch gage, with matching
preformed external corner units.
1. Style: Standard top-set cove base.
2. Style: Standard straight (carpet) base.
3. Adhesive and Filler/Wall Patch: As recommended by the base manufacturer
for the type of substrate indicated.
4. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
D. Integral (Flash) Cove Strip: Wood or plastic cove support stick having a minimum
radius of 7/8 inch.
E. Integral (Flash) Cove Cap Strip: Metal binding strip selected from flooring
manufacturer's standard cap strips.
F. Resilient Edge Strips: Not less than one inch wide, tapered bullnose edge, thickness
and color matching flooring.
G. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum, mill finish; butt type for concealed
anchorage; countersunk stainless steel fasteners, with anchors suitable for type of
subfloor indicated.
H. Underlayment:
1. Mastic Type: Flooring manufacturer's recommended type.
2. Felt: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt.
I. Primer for Porous or Dusty Concrete: Flooring adhesive manufacturer's
recommended primer for preparation of porous or dusty concrete.

J. Flooring Adhesives and Joint Materials: Sheet flooring manufacturer's recommended
water resistant materials, formulated for application on type of subfloor and grade
level indicated.
K. Floor Finish: FS P-W-155, heavy traffic water emulsion floor wax, minimum 16
percent total solids; or floor finish recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine substrate surfaces to receive the Work of this Section for defects
that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
a. Concrete Subfloor Bond Tests: Check for surface moisture and
coatings on concrete subfloor by bond tests as recommended by the
flooring manufacturer.
2. Do not install the Work of this Section until after all other finishing
operations, including painting, have been completed unless otherwise
indicated or directed by the Director's Representative.
a. Where movable partitions are indicated, install flooring before
partitions are erected without interrupting floor pattern.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, follow the materials manufacturers' instructions.
B. Remove dirt, grease, oil, paint, varnish, wax, sealers, and other contaminants which
may impair the full bonding of the materials.
C. Concrete Subfloor:
1. Remove trowel marks and other projections by grinding or sanding.
2. Level uneven surfaces with smooth troweling of mastic underlayment. Fill
cracks, grooves, and holes with mastic underlayment. Follow underlayment
manufacturer's application and curing instructions.
3. Provide a substrate surface with not more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0" variation
from level or required slope.
4. If recommended by flooring manufacturer, treat porous and dusty concrete
with primer after vacuum cleaning the surface. Apply primer at the rate
recommended by the primer manufacturer.
D. Wood Strip Subfloor:
1. Renail loose boards. Remove broken and rotted boards and provide
replacement boards.
2. Remove surface irregularities such as cups and warps by sanding.
3. Vacuum clean the entire subfloor.
4. If recommended by flooring manufacturer, apply felt underlayment to the
entire subfloor, at right angles to the direction of the boards, with tight butt
joints. Fit felt to the floor area. Fully cement the felt with linoleum paste or
other approved adhesive. Press felt with a heavy roller to attain full adhesion
and eliminate trapped air and voids.
E. Immediately before application of the flooring adhesive, vacuum clean the prepared
subfloor surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install the Work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
B. Install sheet material with the fewest seams possible, consistent with economical use
of the material. Match shading and patterns at adjoining sheets in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Avoid cross-seams. Finish seams flush to the flooring
and free of voids, recesses, and raised areas.
1. Install integral (flash) cove, of dimension shown on the Drawings,
constructed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Support cove
with cove strip and bind top edge with cap strip.
C. Install vinyl base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install base on

walls, partitions, columns, and permanent fixtures unless otherwise indicated. Install
base in as long lengths as practicable, with preformed external corner units. Miter
internal corners. Scribe and fit base to door frames and other interruptions.
1. On masonry and other irregular surfaces, fill voids behind base with
filler/wall patch.
D. Install resilient edge strips at unprotected edges of flooring, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Install metal edge strips where indicated. Securely fasten in place.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove any excess adhesive and other surface soiling from face of installed
materials with cleaning agents recommended by the manufacturer of the material
being cleaned.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed flooring from traffic and damage. Apply non-staining kraft paper
covering where necessary. Maintain covering until directed to remove it by the
Director's Representative.
3.06 FINISHING
A. Prior to the final inspection, when directed by the Director's Representative,
thoroughly clean flooring and accessories. Apply 2 coats of floor finish and buff to
finish. Comply with the flooring manufacturer's recommended cleaning, finishing,
and buffing procedures.

5.1 GENERAL
samples, supervision, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the
site and including ancillary works.
C. No payment will be made of unauthorized operations.
A. The unit price rate for tiling shall include tiling around openings, connections to
adjacent components, laid to pattern, falls and cross falls, bay jointed, sloped and
curved surfaces, cuttings to angles, boundaries, junctions, cuttings to holes for pipes,
sockets, switches, outlets and the like, fixing templates for sanitary fittings, delivery
and installation of trim units, preparation of backgrounds including priming if
required by manufacturer's instructions, all protection measures, grouting and
cleaning.
B. The unit price rate for tiling shall include preparation of all movement joints
including structural expansion joints, cleaning, priming, joint filling and sealing.
C. Work at any height above floor level
D. Any width, height, girth, size or shape of slab or feature
E. Bedding and fixing including bedding mortars, adhesives and fixing materials
F. All cutting and internal and external angles, intersections and joints
G. Layout and treatment of joints including grouting
H. Movement joints
I. Cleaning, sealing and polishing
J. Working over and around obstructions
K. Working overhead

SECTION 09 6616 - TERRAZZO FLOOR TILES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour and materials
and performing all operations in connection with terrazzo and natural stone flooring
for units no greater than 40 mm in thickness. Unless otherwise indicated, all
provisions in this section shall apply equally to internal and external work.
B. Section Includes
1. Terrazzo tiles and fittings
1.2 REFERENCES
2. ASTM C150 / C150M - 16 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
Concrete
4. ASTM C241 / C241M - 15e1 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance
of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
1. BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008Aggregates for concrete
2. BS EN 13139:2002 Aggregates for mortar
3. BS EN 1278:2010 Chemicals used for treatment of water intended for human
consumption. Ozone
4. BS EN 13748-1:2004 Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for internal use
5. BS EN 934-2:2009+A1:2012 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout .
Concrete admixtures. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and
labelling
6. BS EN 12004:2007+A1:2012 Adhesives for tiles. Requirements, evaluation
of conformity, classification and designation
7. BS 8204-4:2004+A1:2011 Screeds, bases and in situ floorings. Cementitions
terrazzo wearing surfaces. Code of practice
8. BS EN 12878:2014 Pigments for the colouring of building materials based
on cement and/or lime. Specifications and methods of test
natural stone and mosaic wall tiling in normal internal conditions. Code of
practice
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Abrasive Hardness (Ha) - value for abrasion resistance. Refers to the wearing
qualities of stone for floors, stair treads and other areas subjected to abrasion by foot
traffic. (see ASTM C 241)
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 09 6616 Terrazzo floor tiles

B. Arris - the corner or angle formed by the meeting of two surfaces, especially in
mouldings; it can be moulded, unfinished, bevelled, rounded or otherwise shaped.
C. Gritted - grinding a surface with grit stones.
D. Grout - a thin mortar to fill the joints
E. Marble chips - marble granules screened to various sizes.
F. Monolithic terrazzo (thin bed terrazzo) - cementations terrazzo topping poured on a
cementations base.
G. Polished - the finest and smoothest glossy finish on natural stone.
H. Precast terrazzo - terrazzo fabricated in moulds and finished in shop or factory (e.g.
treads and risers), by compression or vibration.
I. Rustic terrazzo - a surface variation where in lieu of grinding and polishing, the
surface is washed with water or otherwise treated to expose the natural stone
chipping.
J. Terrazzo - derived from the Italian "Terrace" and Terrazzo". Terrazzo consists of
marble, granite, or if agreed with the purchaser of other natural stone chipping
embedded in cement mortar and cured ground and polished to expose the aggregate
and provide a smooth hard finish. Typically used as a finish for floors either as
precast tiles or poured in place.
K. Wear - the removal of material or impairment of surface finish through friction or
impact.
L. Weathering - natural alteration by either chemical or mechanical processes due to the
action of constituents of the atmosphere, surface water, or to temperature change.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In compliance with conditions of contract the following shall be submitted thirty (30)
days before terrazzo and natural stone flooring is scheduled to commence.
B. Product Data
1. Complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to
be furnished and installed under this section including manufacturer's colour
charts showing full range of colours, textures, pattern, and trim units
(fittings) available for each type and composition of tile as indicated for
initial selection purposes.
C. Shop drawings
1. Shop drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections of units, arrangements
and provisions for jointing, and other details showing relationship with, and
attachment to related work.
D. Samples
1. Samples of each item, prepared on samples of adequate size and
construction, in sets showing full range of variations expected.
E. Quality Control Submittals
1. Documented experience of Contractor’s site supervisor(s).

A. Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor or
supplier if necessary.
B. Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than
three (3) days after testing and checking.
C. Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure
traceability.
D. Arrangements shall be made and time allowed in Contractor’s work schedule for
checking and testing as indicated.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
1. Contractor's internal Q. C. shall include but not be limited to:
a. Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for
tiles and all other material delivered to the side prior to first delivery
to conform compliance to specifications.
b. Checking supplier’s delivery tickets of each delivery for
completeness and compliance with supply order and specification.
c. Checking correct storage of materials at least every 2 weeks.
d. Examination of backgrounds to receive tiling.
1. Delivery, storage and handling shall be so arranged as to minimise handling.
2. Adequate precautions shall be taken to guard against the possibility of
damage.
3. When delivered to the site, tiles shall be palletised and packaged shrink-
wrapped and edge protected by polystyrene wrapping or wooden casings and
stored in a clean and dry lockable storage.
4. Terrazzo tiles shall not be transported and delivered to the site until a period
of at least 7 days after pressing has elapsed and shall not be installed earlier
than 28 days after pressing.
5. Sensitive Material (e.g. adhesive, grout, sealant etc.) shall be labelled
with date of manufacture, service life, instructions for proper storage and use,
and any necessary precaution related to toxicity and flammability.
1. Tiles shall be stored in a clean and dry lockable storage.
2. Tiles shall be stored off ground and air shall be allowed to circulate around
tiles to avoid staining.
3. Terrazzo tiles shall be vertically stacked face to face. Thin battens shall be
inserted between rows of tiles.

4. Cement and lime shall be stored under dry conditions and used in order of
delivery. Cement or lime, which contains air set lumps, shall not be used and
discarded.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TERRAZZO TILES
A. Terrazzo tiles shall be made from aggregate and cement with two-part mixes (one for
base layer and one for facing layer) and shall be hydraulically pressed before curing.
Marble powder may be added if appropriate.
B. The edges of the tile shall be perpendicular to the surface. The planes of the upper
and lower surfaces shall be parallel and adjacent vertical edges of square tiles shall be
at right angle to each other. All arises shall be sharp and true.
C. The minimum transverse (flexural) strength shall be 3 N/mm2 and the total water
absorption shall not exceed 8%. The water absorption of the tile-face shall not exceed
0,4 g/cm2 when sampled and tested in compliance with BS 4131.
D. Aggregate for base layer shall consist of naturally occurring materials such as
crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone, natural sand or crushed gravel sand and
E. Facing Layer
1. The facing layer shall be formed as an integral part of the tile and shall be not
less than 6 mm after grinding and shall be free from projections, depressions,
flakes and crazes.
2. Cement for the facing layer shall be gray, white or tinted Portland cement
3. If pigments are used they shall comply with requirements of BS EN 12878 or
shall be certified otherwise as suitable for the intended use.
4. Aggregate for facing layer shall be graded marble chipping of adequate
hardness, angular in shape as distinct from elongated and flaky,
2.2 TILE BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Cement
1. Cement used for bedding mortar shall be Ordinary Portland cement and shall
comply with ASTM C 150.
B. Sand
1. Sand used for bedding mortar shall be building sand (0-3 mm) from natural
sources in accordance with BS EN 12620or an equivalent standard.
C. Water
1. Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will not be allowed
for mixing water.
2.3 GROUT
A. Grout shall have low shrinkage and appropriate adhesion and shall be suitable for the
conditions to be met.
B. Cement: Sand Grout

1. Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve:
a. White joints, or
b. Coloured joints as approved by the Engineer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Units (Fittings)
1. All trim units (fittings) shall match the tiles and shall be from the same
source unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type, size, colour and pattern shall be as indicated.
B. Division Strips
1. Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be made
of:
a. Extruded aluminium
b. Stainless steel
2. With integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless
3. Dimension of division strips shall be suitable for the intended use.
2.5 MIXES
A. General
1. Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition
controlled.
2. Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be
measured by volume using suitable containers of fixed, measurable
measurement.
3. When mortar is mixed by hand, it shall be done on a clean non-absorbent
surface.
4. No water shall be added once mixing has been completed.
5. Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be
removed
6. Admixtures shall only be used when certified by the manufacturer as suitable
for the intended use.
7. Mixes shall comply with BS 5385.
B. Bedding Mortar Mixes
1. Cement: sand semi-dry mix shall be 1:3,5 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6
by weight)
2. The water-cement ratio shall be between 0,55 and 0,60.
C. Grouting Mixes
1. The proportions of cement: sand shall be 1: 1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm,
1: 2 for joints between 3-6 mm and 1: 3 for joints wider than 6 mm.

A. All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, contamination, and any potentially deleterious material
prior to commencing floor-tiling work.
B. All surfaces to receive floor tiling shall be level and true. Where falls have been
incorporated in the base, they shall be examined for correctness.
C. Where floor tiles are to be bonded to concrete floors by cement: sand mortar bed on a
separating layer, the concrete surface shall be steel trowel finished.
D. Installation works shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
E. The tiling Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions
that will prevent a satisfactory tile installation.
A. Before installation commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for any cementations
base to dry out.
B. Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before
the application of floor tiles begins i.e. installation of anchors, electrical, mechanical
and sanitary installations, and similar items located in or below tiled areas.
C. Bases not built accurately or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be corrected
and additional time shall be allowed for setting and curing
D. Any laitance on the surface of the background and contamination by oil, grease wax,
dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion of the tiles or may cause staining
shall be removed.
E. All loose material on the surface of backgrounds shall be removed by suitable
professional tools.
F. The finished floor level shall be established and properly marked in each room or
area to receive tiling.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required,
surfaces to receive floor tiling shall be centred and balanced.
2. Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under equipment and fixtures
to form a complete covering without interruptions.
3. Tiles shall be closely fit to piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that
plates, collars or covers overlap tiles.
4. Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts
shall be positioned on the outer edges of surfaces.
5. All joints shall be straight and of even width.
6. All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface shall
be true, when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap found shall not
exceed 2 mm and the straightedge shall not be obstructed.

7. No greater area of mortar shall be applied than can be worked before setting.
8. Before any fixing, colour and shade variations shall be checked. Variegated
tiles shall be thoroughly mixed.
9. Temperatures in tiled areas shall be maintained at 10 °C or more during
installation and for at least 7 days after completion, unless higher
temperatures are required by referenced standards or manufacturer's
instructions.
10. Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be
continuous with structural movement joints.
11. Additional movement joints shall be positioned where floor tiles abut
restraining surfaces such as walls, columns, door frames, pipes, where tiling
is continuous across of junctions of different backgrounds. In addition,
surfaces exceeding 25 m2 shall be bay jointed unless otherwise indicated.
B. Terrazzo Floor Tiles
1. Cement: Sand Semi-Dry Mix Bedding
a. The dryness of the mix shall result in less adhesion between the bed
and the concrete base that cleavage can occur.
b. Before the semi-dry mix is laid, the base shall be swept clean and
slightly dampened.
c. The semi-dry mix shall then be spread to a thickness of about 10 -
15% thicker than the final bed thickness and shall be partially
compacted, leaving the surface true and flat to the required level; the
final bed thickness shall be at least 25 mm.
d. A slurry of thick, creamy consistency (cement: fine sand 1: 1) shall
be applied either to the back of each tile before placing or
alternatively on the partially compacted mortar bed.
e. The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position by using
professional tools (e.g. rubber mallet) with regular and straight joints
between 2 mm and 3 mm wide. Full contact between slurried tile
backs and mortar bed shall be ensured.
f. Any surplus bedding material, which may have risen to the surface,
shall be removed and the surface washed and tiles completely
cleaned.
2. Cement: Sand Mortar bonded to Base
a. The clean and properly prepared concrete slab shall be kept wet for
several hours prior to placing the mortar bed.
b. Within a period of 30 min. before placing the mortar bed, a thin layer
of neat cement shall be spread on the concrete surface and brushed to
a thin uniform coating.
c. The stiff, plastic mortar bed shall be applied immediately over the
thin cement coating between wooden fillets while the slurry is still
wet and shall be levelled, tamped and fully compacted. Slurry of neat
cement and water shall be applied to the back of the tiles.
Alternatively, the levelled mortar bed shall be dusted with a thin dry

cement layer sprinkled with a fine sieve and lightly trowelled
assuring that the cement becomes dampen.
d. The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position with regular
and straight joints between 2 mm and 3 mm wide.
e. The final bed thickness shall be 15 - 25 mm except for units greater
than 500 x 500 mm when the bed thickness shall be 30 - 50 mm
thick.
f. Any surplus bedding material, which may rise to the surface, shall be
removed and tiles completely cleaned.
3. Grouting
a. Grouting shall not start until the mortar bed has set.
b. Joints shall be grouted with white or grey cement as indicated.
Pigments shall not exceed 5% by mass.
c. Joints shall be completely filled by squeegee until settlement ceases.
d. Excess grout shall be removed leaving filled joints flush with the tile
surface.
e. After grouting, terrazzo tiles shall be thoroughly washed with clean
water.
4. Grinding
a. Grinding and polishing shall commence after the grouted joints are
thoroughly hardened but no sooner than 3 days after grouting.
b. The tiled surface shall be mechanically ground to remove surplus
grout and to correct any unevenness between adjacent tiles.
c. All grinding residues and dust shall be washed off and voids shall be
filled with similar grout.
d. After 24 hours, the surface shall be re-ground.
e. Finally, the surface shall be wet polished to receive
 Its final finishes as indicated.
 A non-slip safe walking surface of 0,5 anti-slip coefficient of
friction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Areas to receive terrazzo or a natural stone finish shall be scheduled as late as
possible in the building program in order to reduce danger from damage and
contamination.
B. During the laying operation, tiled areas shall not be accessible except for the tiling
operatives.
C. Completed tiling shall not be subject to traffic for at least seven (7) days unless
otherwise recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
D. For general protection, the completed areas shall be covered by a heavy Polyethylene
sheeting of type that will not stain or discolour the finished surface.

E. When equipment or other heavy loads has to be removed over finished surfaces,
special precaution shall be taken e.g. use of timber planking. However, moving tackle
and the protection itself shall not damage the finished surface.
F. Stair finishing, nosing and other vulnerable constructions shall be protected by
temporary casings.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not
exceeding 0,1 m2.
A. Flooring according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
B. Skirting will be measured according to type and material by length (m).
C. Provision of joints will be measured according to type and width by length (m).
5.1 GENERAL
and protecting.
1. Preparation of the underlayment to obtain a good bonding ground.
2. Cutting and fitting around door frames, pipes and the like.
3. Grouting.
4. Grinding and polishing.
5. Securing the works against undesired trespass until the surface or surface
treatment can no longer be damaged.
6. Providing certificates from authorised and independent laboratories or
agencies.

SECTION 09 7500 - STONE FACING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section “Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing masonry inserts
for anchoring interior stone facing.
2. Division 09 Section "Stone Flooring" for stone flooring.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. 1. ASTM A36 Specifications for Structural Steel
2. ASTM A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
3. ASTM A276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
4. ASTM A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
5. ASTM C59 Specification for Gypsum Plaster and Gypsum Molding Plaster
6. ASTM C97 Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of
Natural Stone
7. ASTM C99 Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone
8. ASTM C119 Definitions of Terms Relating to Natural Building Stone
9. ASTM C121 Test method for Water Absorption of Slate
10. ASTM C170 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Natural Building
Stone
11. ASTM C241 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to
Foot Traffic
12. ASTM C295 Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete
13. ASTM C880 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimensional Stone
14. ASTM C1242 Guide for Design, Selection, and Installation of Exterior
Dimension Stone Anchors and Anchoring Systems
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Advise installers of other work about requirements relating to placement of
inserts and other similar items needed during stonework installation for
anchoring and supporting stone. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing such items.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 09 7500 - STONE FACING

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s literature describing stone facing system products to
be provided, including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations
b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions and methods
d. Independently tested data listing performance criteria
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit scaled shop drawings prepared specifically for Project to illustrate
details, dimensions, and other data necessary to fully describe fabrication and
installation of stone facing.
a. Show layout, thickness, jointing, anchoring details, dimensions and
setting numbers of each piece of stone, and other similar
information.
b. Show all stone needed, giving overall piece sizes and section through
each condition.
c. Where needed, full size sections shall be drawn to show curved,
molded, or shaped sections.
d. Indicate location of fixtures and other similar items that affect
placement of stone.
e. Show adjacent or related portions of Work in a complete manner.
2. No final sizing of stone shall be done until submittal has been approved.
3. Shop drawings shall be prepared under supervision of a registered
professional engineer, licensed to practice in District of Columbia and shall
bear engineer's seal.
4. Furnish copies of approved shop drawings to other trades as needed for
coordination relating to placement of inserts, flashing reglets, and other items
to be used by stonework installer.
5. Show adjacent or related portions of Work in a complete manner.
C. Samples:
1. Submit not less than 3 sample sets of each stone and finish selected for use
on Project. Sample sets shall demonstrate color variation expected in final
work.
2. Sample sets shall consist of not less than 3 samples in each set to indicate
range of appearance. Samples shall represent approximately shade, markings,
characteristics of stone variety, and finishes selected.
a. Sample Size: Not less than 300 x 300 mm; full thickness needed
b. Where needed to show variations in color and markings, larger
samples shall be submitted.

c. For stone indicated to be matched, submit not less than 2 sets, each
containing 4 matched samples showing proposed veining and range
of color in each set.
3. Samples shall be actual material; photographs or other reproductions shall
not be acceptable. Architect shall return one sample upon acceptance.
4. Samples designating finished face shall be clearly labeled on back with name
of stone, group classification for soundness and use for which stone is
intended.
5. If samples are rejected, new samples shall be submitted until approved. No
work represented by samples shall be fabricated until Architect has approved
samples.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Installation of stone shall be in compliance with industry standards and
practices.
B. Qualifications:
1. Fabricator Qualifications:
a. Fabrication shall be performed by a shop that employs skilled
workers who custom-fabricate interior stone facing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-
service performance.
2. Installer Qualifications:
a. Engage a qualified installer for stone facing system to assume
complete responsibility for design, fabrication, and installation of
stone cladding system to comply with specified requirements.
b. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and
procedures of stone and shall demonstrate not less than 3 years
successful experience in such installation.
c. Installer shall have completed stone facing projects similar in
material, design, and complexity to that indicated for this Project that
have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Pre-Construction Stone Verification:
1. Provide transportation and lodging expenses as needed for 2 representatives
selected by Engineer to travel to site of quarry to select stone for Project.
2. Fabricator’s Facility Visits:
a. Provide for visits to fabricator facilities to review a full-size mock-
up, dry layout of stone facing prior to shipment of first container to
establish compliance with accepted range and to confirm exact
layout of installation. Stones shall be marked to identify location and
orientation prior to shipping to Site.

A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
1. Finished stone shall be carefully packed and loaded for shipment, using
reasonable and customary precautions against transit.
2. No material that may cause staining or discoloration shall be used for
blocking or packing.
3. Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened packaging with labels
intact.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Materials stored on-site shall be placed in a clean, well-drained area, away
from construction activities. Upon receipt on-site or storage yard, stone shall
be stacked on timber or platforms at least 4” above ground.
2. Exercise care to prevent staining or discoloration during storage. If storage is
to be for a prolonged period, polyethylene or other suitable plastic film shall
be placed between wood and finished surfaces of completely dry stone.
3. Polyethylene or other suitable plastic film shall be used as an overall
protective covering. Lewis holes shall be plugged during freezing weather to
prevent accumulation of water. Salt shall not be used for melting of ice
formed in Lewis holes or on pieces, or for purpose involving contact with
stone.
4. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breaking, soiling or other damage.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. For purposes of this specification normal temperature shall be considered to
be any temperature between 40°F and 90°F. Cold shall be considered to be
any temperature below 40°F and hot shall be considered to be any
temperature above 90°F.
2. Maintain temperature at not less than 50°F during installation and for 7 days
following completion.
3. Comply with safety requirements of ANSI A10.20 and manufacturer’s
recommended safety precautions, including those pertaining to ventilation.
a. Vent temporary heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to
stone work.
4. Spaces to receive stone shall be uniformly heated with no hot spots. Heater
units shall not blow directly onto freshly placed work.
5. Illuminate work area during installation, providing same level of illumination
as will be available for final inspection.
6. Shade work area from direct sunlight during installation to prevent rapid
evaporation caused by excessive heat.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field dimensions prior to fabrication. Manufacturer shall be
responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and
shall indicate, on shop drawings, field measurements beyond his/her control.
Contractor and manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these
field dimensions.
2. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid construction delays.
3. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE FACING
A. Single Source Responsibility:
1. Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of stone from a single
quarry. Stone shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and
facilities to meet Project requirements.
2. Quarry shall provide material of a consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties, and include capacity to cut and finish material without
delaying progress of Project.
3. Stone members shall be cut from matched blocks. Use of blocks chosen at
random, though similar in general character and color to approved stone will
not be permitted, except by express written approval of Architect.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Design Requirements for stone anchors and anchoring shall comply with
ASTM C1242.
C. Performance Criteria:
1. Fabricate and install stonework to withstand loads from wind, gravity,
movement of building structure, and thermally induced movement as well as
to resist deterioration under conditions of normal use without failure.
2. Provide stonework that is engineered, fabricated, and installed based on
safety factors as follows applied to stone’s average ultimate strength as
established by testing to determine allowable working stresses:
a. Stone Flexural Safety Factor (FSF):
 Granite: 3
 Marble: 5
b. Stone Anchorage Safety Factor (ASF): ASF FSF x 1.4
3. Provide hand-set (field installed) anchoring system, including connections to
building structure capable of sustaining forces generated by gravity loads,
and stresses induced by thermal movement, acting separately or in
combination within parameters as follows:
a. Stone (without exceeding allowable working stresses of stone:
 Determined by dividing stone’s average ultimate strength, as
established by testing, by stone’s safety factor

b. Metal Components without exceeding allowable stresses established
for following:
 Structural Steel Anchors: AISC Specification for Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
 Stainless Steel Anchors in tension, shear, and compression:
54% of yield stress
c. Post-Installed Anchors in Grouted CMU: Capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to six times loads imposed by stone
cladding system
d. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms
of corrosion as well as staining by insulating metals and other
materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use
materials that are non-staining to exposed surfaces of stone and joint
materials.
4. Stone panel supports and anchors shall be designed and installed to
uniformly distribute loading and stresses. Panels shall be independently
supported and shall not transfer loads to adjacent panel (top, bottom, or side)
or other construction materials and installations and conversely no loads by
other construction shall be transferred to stone panels. Supports and anchors
shall be compatible with stone and other components of wall systems and
stable and non-reactive. Stone panel supports, anchors, and tie backs where
attached to a differential metal support system, such as steel framing, shall be
designed to accommodate differential thermal expansion
2.2 STONE
A. General Requirements:
1. Stone shall be free of cracks, seams or starts that may impair structural
integrity or function. Variations characteristic of quarry from which stone is
obtained will be acceptable.
B. Stone Cladding (thin stock stone):
1. Stone Types, Colors, and Varieties: As selected by Architect
2. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings
3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 2 cm.
4. Surface Finish: As selected by Architect.
2.3 SETTING AND ANCHORING MATERIALS
A. Stone Anchoring Systems: Stainless steel; ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304
1. Anchors and anchoring devices coming in contact with stone shall be
stainless steel.
2. Plates, Washers, and Packing Shims:
3. Setting Buttons: Load bearing plastic; 8,000 psi working load
4. Dowels: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304
5. Wire Tiebacks: 3 mm diameter, stainless-steel wire
B. Molding Plaster: ASTM C59

C. Bonding Stone Adhesive:
1.
2-part, epoxy-resin or polyester-resin stone adhesive with an initial set time
of not more than 2 hours at 70°F
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Joint Materials:
1. Joint Backing:
a. Type of filler material shall be non-staining, compatible with sealant
to be applied, and in compliance with sealant manufacturer
recommendations.
b. Bond breaker tape width shall be equal to joint opening.
c. Backer rod shape shall be rounded at surface to contact sealant.
2. Sealants:
a. Type: Single-component, non-sag, urethane sealant
2.5 FABRICATION
1. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated to comply
with fabrication and construction tolerances specified for faces, edges, beds,
and backs. Provide minimum stone thickness as follows unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings:
2. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearances
indicated between backs of stone and surfaces or projections of structural
members, fireproofing, back-up walls, and other work behind stone.
a. Minimum Clearance: 25 mm
3. Dress joints straight and true, and at 90° angle to face unless otherwise
indicated. Joints shall be 6 mm wide unless otherwise indicated.
4. Form bevels, quirk miters, bull-nose, and other shapes as indicated on
Drawings.
5. Cut and drill holes in stone for anchors, supports, and lifting devices.
6. Shape beds to fit supports.
7. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate
adjacent work.
8. Produce moldings with abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of
molding shape.
9. Miter moldings at corners with edges of miters slightly eased at outside
corners.
10. Cut stone base to lengths based on field measurements.
11. Clean sawn backs of stone to remove rust stains and free iron particles.
12. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to match stone finish.
B. Incidental Cutting and Drilling:
1. Drill, cut, and sink provisions within stone to receive anchors, fasteners,
supports, and lifting devices provided in compliance with accepted shop

drawing to properly handle and attach stone in place. Allow room for
expansion of anchoring devices where necessary.
2. Holes for other purposes shall be provided only when specifically shown on
Drawings.
3. Where liners are needed on back of panels, secure by means of mechanical
fasteners. Use of adhesives as primary means of attachment shall not be
permitted.
C. Wall Base:
1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 2 cm.
2. Top-Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at corner unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings
3. Ends: Butt ends into casings
4. Joints: 1/16” wide grouted joints
D. Trim:
1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 2 cm
2. Top-Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at corner unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings
E. Profiled Trim:
1. Profile: Match profiles indicated on Drawings
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Thickness: (gauging tolerance)
a. Thin Stock:
 Finished One Face: ± 1.6 mm
 Finished Two Faces: + 0; - 1.6 mm
b. Cubic Stock:
 Finished One Face: ± 3.0 mm
 Finished Two Faces: ± 1.6 mm
2. Face Dimensions: ± 1.6 mm
3. Squareness: ± 1.6 mm
B. Anchorage Tolerance:
1. Centers of back anchors cut into stone shall be within ± 6 mm of location
indicated on shop drawings. Dimension of back anchor sinkages shall be as
indicated on shop drawings within a tolerance of ± 1.6 mm.
2. Thickness of slots or kerfs cut into edge of stone for anchorage purposes
shall be within ± 1.6 mm of dimension indicated on shop drawings.

3. Location across stone thickness of centers of slots or kerfs cut into edge of
stone shall be within ± 1.6 mm of dimension indicated on shop drawings.
4. Depth of kerfs, rebated kerfs, or anchor holes shall be + 3.0 mm /- 1.6 mm of
dimension indicated on shop drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine areas and conditions under which installation of interior stone
veneer shall be performed.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and
responsibility for satisfactory performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Construction:
1. At end of each day’s work, cover top of walls with a non-staining waterproof
covering. Protect partially finished work when not being worked on.
2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources.
Immediately remove such materials from stone without damaging stone.
3. Protect base of walls and floors from mud and mortar splatter by means of
coverings spread on floors, ground, and over wall surface.
4. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from droppings or mortar and sealants.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Preparatory treatments shall be in compliance with recommendations of
manufacturer whose setting products are to be used.
2. Prior to setting stone, clean surfaces to remove accumulated dirt and stains.
Clean thoroughly by scrubbing with non-metallic brushes followed by a
drenching with clean water. Use only mild detergents that do not contain
caustic fillers.
3.3 INSTALLATION
1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of each material and
approved shop drawings.
2. Layout and Veining Patterns:
a. Stone members shall be selected to harmonize in color, vein patterns,
and physical characteristics. Abrupt and unsightly variations shall
not be acceptable.
b. Stone shall be cut consecutively from same block from same quarry
and shall have same color, veining, and physical characteristics.
c. Stone shall be set with its veining organized in a consistent pattern
and as approved by Architect.
3. Lay stone in patterns as indicated on Drawings. Adjust to minimize stone
cutting to avoid unit’s less than one half sizes.
4. Coordinate stone setting with installation of related accessory items where
needed to provide neat installation with minimum cutting and symmetrical
conditions wherever possible. Perform cutting and drilling without marring
visible surfaces.
5. Extend stone work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures,
to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise
shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without
disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
6. Accurately form intersections and returns. Carefully grind edges of stone
abutting trim, finish or built in items. Fit stone closely to outlets, piping and
other penetration so that plates, collars, or covers overlap stone.
7. Provide chases, reveals, and openings as needed to accommodate contiguous
construction. Close up open spaces with same stonework as surrounding area
so enclosed areas match those already set.
B. Stone Veneer Panels:
1. Stone facing panels shall be installed by standard set method utilizing non-
staining anchors, dowels, pins, cramps, wire, and plaster spots
2. Exposed stone edges shall be gauged to precise thickness indicated.
3. Anchors, cramps, dowels, and pins shall be sized as needed for application,
as indicated on shop drawings. Anchors shall be securely attached to
substrate and to stone panel.
4. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or as
needed to secure stonework in place. Provide not less than 4 anchors for
panels up to 1 square meter in size, and 2 additional anchors for each
additional 8 square feet of surface area.
5. Shim and adjust anchors and supports to set stone in locations indicated with
uniform joint widths and with edges and faces aligned according to
established relationships and specified tolerances. Joint width shall be
maintained with shims or spacers.
a. Shims shall not intrude into depth required for sealant and backer
rod.
b. Place spacers at least a joint width back from stone face.
c. Install shims to shed water. Horseshoe and key-slot shim openings
shall face down.
6. Maximum variation of finished surface shall be no more than 3 mm
cumulative over 3 linear meter, with no more than 0.8 mm variation between
individual stone units.
C. Stone Soffits:
1. Soffits shall be independently anchored and installed.
2. Provide not less than 6 anchors for soffits up to 1 square meter in size, and 4
additional anchors for each additional 0.75 square meter of surface area.
3. Wires, dowels, and pins shall be sized as needed for application with plaster
spots, as indicated on shop drawings. Anchors shall be securely attached to

substrate and to stone soffit. Liners shall be employed when needed for
application.
4. Edge anchors shall be positioned as close as possible to front edge to reduce
risk of pull-out.
5. Do not cramp soffits to vertical fascia courses.
6. If soffit crosses over top of a wall or column facing, a joint shall be provided
at intersection, left open, raked clean, and sealed.
D. Stone Trim:
1. Set stone window stools on wood or metal framing or wood blocking in a full
bed of adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow
for grouting.
2. Adhere units to plywood backing with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy
adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for
grouting.
E. Sealant Joint Filler:
1. Seal joints according to sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Force sealant into joint and against side of joint to make uniform. Fill sealant
space completely with sealant; refer to Section 07 9200.
3. Tool joints to form smooth uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces
within 10 minutes after sealant application. Finished joint shall be uniform in
color, smooth, and without pinholes, voids, or low spots.
4. Back-up material shall fit neatly into joint without compacting and of such a
height to allow a sealant depth one-half of width of joint. Sealant shall not
bond to back-up material.
5. Stone edges to which sealant bond is needed shall be clean and dry.
6. Primer on stone edges is mandatory when recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Care shall be taken to keep primer off stone faces.
F. Tolerances:
1. Variations from Plumb:
a. In Lines and Surfaces of Columns and Walls:
 In 3 m : 6 mm
 In any story, or 6 m maximum: 10 mm
b. For External Corners, Expansion Joints, and Other Critical Lines:
 In any story, or 6 m maximum: 6 mm
2. Variations from Level on Lintels, Sills, Parapets, and Other Horizontal Lines:
a. In any bay, or 6 m maximum: 13 mm
3.4 REPAIR
A. Remove and replace interior stone facing of following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be
repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective stone facing

3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints
4. Stone facing and joints not matching approved samples and mockups
5. Stone facing not complying with other requirements indicated
B. Minor patching in small areas may be acceptable if repair does not distract from
overall appearance of finished stonework. Make repairs in a manner that results in
stone facing's matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other
requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
3.5 CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning:
1. Clean interior stone facing as work progresses.
2. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.
B. Cleaning following Installation:
1. Clean stone facing no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and
pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes.
2. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds
with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage
stone.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely
fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage.
1. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings
and clean surfaces.
PART 4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
4.1 GENERAL
drawings.
B. Work will be measured on the exposed surface
exceeding 0.50 m2
characteristic.
B. Coves, decorative strips etc. will be enumerated.
C. Separation layers will be measured by m2. No allowance will be made for
measurement of overlapping joints. No deductions will be made for void not
exceeding 0.50 m2.


5.1 GENERAL
ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, quality assurance,
cleaning, protecting and all necessary ancillary works .

SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Painting materials complete with primers, sealers, stains applied for
exterior and interior areas as indicated on Drawings and as specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM E84 - 16 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials
2. ASTM D522 / D522M - 13 Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of
Attached Organic Coatings
3. ASTM D562 - 10(2014) Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints
Measuring Krebs Unit (KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer
4. ASTM D1308 - 02(2013) Standard Test Method for Effect of Household
Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes
5. ASTM D1735 - 14 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of
Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus
6. ASTM D2486 - 06(2012) e1 Standard Test Methods for Scrub Resistance of
Wall Paints
7. ASTM D2805 - 11 Standard Test Method for Hiding Power of Paints by
Reflectometry
8. ASTM D3276 - 15 Standard Guide for Painting Inspectors (Metal Substrates)
9. ASTM D3359 - 09e2 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by
Tape Test
10. ASTM D4060 - 14 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of
Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser
11. ASTM D4062 - 11(2016) Standard Test Method for Leveling of Paints by
Draw-Down Method
12. ASTM D4400 - 99(2012)e1 Standard Test Method for Sag Resistance of
Paints Using a Multi-notch Applicator
13. ASTM D5324 - 10 Standard Guide for Testing Water-Borne Architectural
Coatings
14. ASTM D5894 - 16 Standard Practice for Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of
Painted Metal, (Alternating Exposures in a Fog/Dry Cabinet and a
UV/Condensation Cabinet)
15. ASTM D7073 - 05(2012) Standard Guide for Application and Evaluation of
Brush and Roller Applied Paint Films
16. ASTM D7234 - 12 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of
Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 09 9000 Painting and coatings

17. ASTM F2833 - 11 Standard Specification for Corrosion Protective Fastener
Coatings with Zinc Rich Base Coat and Aluminum Organic/Inorganic Type
18. ASTM G151 - 10 Standard Practice for Exposing Nonmetallic Materials in
Accelerated Test Devices that Use Laboratory Light Sources
1. ANSI Z535.1 Safety Colors (1991)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Coating: Liquid, liquefiable, or mastic composition that is converted to a solid
adherent film after application to a substrate as a thin layer and is used for decorating,
protecting, identifying or to serve some functional purpose such as the filling or
concealing of surface irregularities or the modification of light and heat radiation
characteristics and is intended for on-site application to interior or exterior surfaces
of residential, commercial, institutional or industrial buildings. For the purposes of
this standard, the definition of paint or coating does not include stains, clear finishes,
recycled latex paint, specialty (industrial, marine or automotive) coatings or paint
sold in aerosol cans.
B. Colorant: Concentrated color (dyes or pigments) that can be added to finished paints
or coatings to make specific colors. Unless specified otherwise, it is the maximum
amount of colorant recommended for use by the manufacturer.
C. DFT: Dry film thickness.
D. Flat: Paint or coating whose specular gloss registers less than 15 on an 85-degree
meter or less than 5 on a 60-degree meter according to ASTM Method D 523–89,
Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
E. Floor Paint: Opaque coatings that are formulated for or applied to flooring surfaces
that have a DFT of 10 mils (0.25mm) or less and are applied by roller or brush. For
the purposes of this standard, floor paints do not include epoxy or urethane flooring
systems that include coarse aggregates, color chips or flakes as part of a multi-part
flooring system. Floor paints also do not include floor finishes which are defined as
any product that leaves a protective wax, polymer or resin coating that is designed to
be periodically removed and reapplied.
F. Ingredient: Any constituent of a product that is intentionally added or known to be a
contaminant that comprises at least 0.01% by weight of the product.
G. Intentional Introduction: The act of deliberately utilizing a material in the formation
of a package or packaging component where its continued presence is desired in the
final package or packaging component to provide a specific characteristic,
appearance, or quality.
H. Non-Flat: Paint or coating whose specular gloss registers 15 or greater on an 85-
degree meter or 5 or greater on a 60-degree meter according to ASTM Method D
523–89, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss Paint.
I. Non-Elastomeric Reflective Wall Coatings: Latex and thermoplastic coatings
designed and intended for the modification of light and heat radiation characteristics
with a DFT of 5 dry mils or greater.
J. Paint: A pigmented coating. See definition for Coating.

K. Product: Product produced by manufacturer and does not include additives added at
the point-of-sale.
L. Primer or Undercoat: Coating that is formulated and recommended for one or more
of the following purposes: to provide a firm bond between the substrate and a
subsequent coating; to prevent a subsequent coating from being absorbed into the
substrate; to prevent harm to a subsequent coating from materials in the substrate or
to provide a smooth surface for application of a subsequent coating.
M. Recovered Material: Material that has been recovered from or otherwise diverted
from the waste generated after a material manufacturing process. Recovered material
may include post-consumer material, cuttings, trimmings, obsolete inventories, and
rejected unused stock, but does not include material capable of being re-used within
the process that generated it.
N. Topcoat: The outermost layer of paint or coating system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information including instructions for
thinning, mixing, curing and touch-up.
B. Manufacturer's standard color charts.
C. Test Reports and certificates of compliance.
D. Samples: Prior to beginning work, furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Submit
samples for the Engineer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material
and application for each coat of each finish sample.
1. 300 mm x 300 mm hardboard provides 2 samples of each color and material,
with texture to simulate actual conditions. Re-submit samples as requested by
the Engineer until acceptable sheen, color and texture are achieved.
2. Wood surfaces; provide 2 samples 100 x 200 mm of natural and stained
wood finish on actual wood types. Label and identify each as to location and
application.
3. Concrete masonry, provide two 100 mm square samples of masonry for each
type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish coat.
4. Actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components,
duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish
samples on at least 9 m² of surface, as direct, until required sheen, color and
texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-
place work.
5. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.
1.5 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original new and unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
3. Manufacturer's name.
4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area
and protect from moisture, direct sunlight and temperatures below 10°C and above
limits recommended by the manufacturer. Maintain containers used in storage of paint
in clean conditions, free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all
precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire
hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by
same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer,
and use only within recommended limits.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime
paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various
substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of
finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.
C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of various
coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not paint when air is dust-laden or when weather and temperature conditions are
unsuitable. Do not paint exterior surfaces in damp or rainy weather. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations with respect to application and drying period
temperatures.
B. Apply water-based paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 10°C and 32°C, unless otherwise permitted by
paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 7°C and 35°C, unless otherwise permitted by
paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
D. Do not apply paint when relative humidity exceeds 85% or to damp or wet surfaces;
even permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Paints and Coatings: All paints and coatings, including primers and undercoats, shall
meet the following performance requirements. All tests shall be performed on
product produced by the manufacturer and do not include additives at the point-of-
sale.
1. Adhesion: The product shall demonstrate a minimum of 50% or better rating
for wet and dry adhesion over the intended substrate, except concrete, as
determined by ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring

Adhesion by Tape Test. Products intended to be applied on concrete shall
demonstrate 200 psi failure in the concrete as determined by ASTM D7234.
2. Applicability (Flow and Leveling). The product shall demonstrate
applicability by either a minimum 6 rating for foaming, leveling, and spatter
resistance as determined by ASTM D7073 or a 12-14 minimum drawdown as
tested by ASTM D4400. Floor paints shall demonstrate a minimum 7 rating
as determined by ASTM D4062.
3. Hiding Power (Opacity). The product shall demonstrate a minimum 0.95
contrast ratio at 400 square feet per gallon as determined by ASTM D2805.
Compliance will be determined on dried film of the un-tinted white paint
having a minimum 80% reflectance.
B. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: In addition to the requirements listed in 3.1, anti-corrosive
coatings shall meet the following requirements:
1. Corrosion Resistance. Using manufacturer recommended minimum dry film
thickness and application to hot rolled steel panels3, the product shall have a
minimum rust rating of 9 per SSPC-VIS 2 Standard Method of Evaluating
Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces after 300 hours of exposure as
determined by ASTM D5894.
C. Floor Paints: In addition to the requirements, floor paints shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Alkali Resistance. The product shall show no signs of lifting, wrinkling,
disintegration or more than a slight color change after 16 hours exposure to
0.5N sodium hydroxide solution by spot test as determined by ASTM D1308.
2. Scrub-ability (Abrasion Resistance). Using a C-17 wheel and 500 gram
weight, the product shall demonstrate a wear index of 200 or less as
determined by ASTM D4060.
D. Interior Topcoats: In addition to requirements listed in 3.1, interior topcoats shall meet
the following requirements:
1. Scrub-ability (Abrasion Resistance). Using a shim, the product shall
demonstrate 400 scrub cycles before failure per Leneta Calibration Scrub
Panel Form P121-C as determined by ASTM D2486.
2. Wash-ability (Stain Removal). The product shall demonstrate the following
minimum requirements for stain removal as determined by ASTM 4828-91
Mechanical Method, Standard Test Method for Practical Wash-ability of
Organic Coatings.
a. Flat Topcoat 5 minimum rating
b. Non-Flat Topcoat 7 minimum rating
E. Exterior Topcoats. In addition to the requirements, exterior topcoats shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Fade Resistance. Using 4 oz of red iron oxide pigment, the product shall
demonstrate a minimum durability total color change of ΔE <5 of 1000 hours
using QUV-A bulbs with a moisture and/or condensation cycle following the
guidelines in ASTM G151.

2. Flexibility. The product shall show no signs of cracking, peeling or loss of
adhesion as determined by ASTM D522.
3. Water Resistance. The product shall show no signs of washing off, lifting or
wrinkling as tested by ASTM D1735.
F. Paints material (Internal and External)
1. Elastomeric crack-bridging, UV resistant acrylic resin.
a. Specific gravity : ≈ 1.6 gm/cm3
b. Solid content : ≈ 50%
c. Flash point : above 65 °C
2. Textured copolymer dispersion (External)
a. Specific gravity : ≈ 1.9 gm/cm3
b. Solid content : ≈ 85%
c. Flash point : above 65 °C
3. Acrylic paint
a. Specular Gloss: 2
b. Volume Solids: 35.0% @ 60° C
c. Solids by Weight: 53.0%
d. Dry Film Thickness: 2-3 mils
e. Pigment: 35.4%
f. Maximum VOC: 100g/liter
g. Thinner: Water
4. Cement paints (or coats): The ingredients in powdered form are weighed and
charged in the ball mill for grinding and mixing property:
a. White / Portland cement content: 50-60% by weight
b. Lime 10-15% by weight
c. Calcite /Titanium Dioxide 10-15% by weight
d. Calcium Chloride 2 - 5% by weight
e. Calcium /Aluminum stearate 5- 10% by weight
f. Alkali Resistance Pigment 3- 5% by weight
g. China Clay 10% by weight
G. Material Quality: Paints, coatings, and primers shall be ready-mixed at the
manufacturer's plant and shall be delivered in sealed containers, labeled and identified.
Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paints and finishes shall have Class A rating
in accordance with ASTM E 84. Materials without manufacturer's identification as a
standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. Use products of same manufacturer
for succeeding coats

H. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service
indicated.
I. Color and Texture:
1. Exterior Painting: Color and texture of the exterior paint shall be as indicated
on Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
2. Interior Painting: Colors, textures, and degree of luster will be as indicated
on Interior Design Drawings and Interior Design Specifications or as
approved by the Engineer. Color selection will include safety colors for
hazards in accordance with ANSI Z53.1 Safety Color Code for Marking
Physical Hazards. Tint prime and undercoats approximately to the shade of
the final coat but with sufficient variation to distinguish them from the
preceding coat.
J. Solvents and Thinners: As recommended by the paint manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrate and conditions under which painting will be performed. Proceed with
the work only when conditions are satisfactory.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting
fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide
surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting
operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and
adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area,
reinstall removed items.
2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments.
Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and
painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet,
newly-painted surfaces.
3. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions and as specified in this section, for each particular
substrate condition.
4. Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints, and other irregularities with
filler suitable for the purpose and, after setting sand to a smooth finish.
5. Prime surfaces not more than 8 hours after cleaning. Provide barrier coats
over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify the
Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified
coating systems with substrates primed by others.
B. Concrete, Masonry and Plaster Works: Prepare surfaces of concrete, concrete masonry
cement plaster and gypsum plaster to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust,
dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Use abrasive blast-
cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by
performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline
to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before
application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
2. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial
solution of muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean
water to neutralize acid, and allow drying before painting.
C. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with
scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished
surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and
apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended know sealer, before application
of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty
or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.
D. Ferrous Metals: Clean non-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove mortar, plaster, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale and other foreign
substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the
recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council, before priming coat is
applied.
E. Shop-Primed Ferrous Surfaces: Remove grease, oil and other foreign substances with
approved type of cleaner manufactured for the purpose. Exercise care to prevent damage
to shop coat. Touch-up abraded or marred shop coats with paint used for priming.
F. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Surfaces: Remove grease and oil with a cleaner manufactured
for the purpose. Treat surfaces with a chemical compound such as a phosphoric acid
wash. Remove the chemical compound completely with clean, fresh water.
3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain material before using.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for the type of material being applied. Do not exceed
manufacturers recommended coverage per gallon. Apply materials with care to a
uniform and proper film thickness, showing no runs, holidays, sags, crawls, or other
defects. Apply with a minimum of brush marks. Finish surfaces shall be uniform in
sheen, color and texture and match approved samples.
B. Allow coats to dry thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied; allow a minimum of
24 hours between applications on any one surface unless otherwise specified by the
paint materials manufacturer.
C. Sandpaper undercoats on interior metal thoroughly and uniformly to provide a smooth,
even surface for finish coats.

D. Apply paint by brush, roller, spray, or other acceptable practice in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied.
Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep wool as recommended by the paint
manufacturer for material and texture required.
E. Rush-out and work all brush coats into the surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness,
spotting, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable. Neatly draw all primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use
mechanical applicators.
F. Except as otherwise specified, apply a prime coat to material which is required to be
painted or finished.
G. Apply the first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
H. Number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the
application method. Sand between each enamel and varnish coat application with fine
sandpaper or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required to produce an even, smooth
surface in accordance with the paint manufacturer's directions.
I. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit thorough drying. Do not re-
coat until paint does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and the
application of loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
J. Paint type, color, surface treatment shall be as scheduled. Provide finish coats which are
compatible with prime paints used.
K. When undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Insure
that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive
a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
L. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime
coat only. Exposed surfaces are defined as those areas visible when permanent or built-
in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles and similar items
are in place in areas scheduled to be painted.
M. Where visible through registers or grilles, paint interior surfaces of ducts and void
spaces with a flat, non-Specular black paint.
N. Paint the back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match the
exposed surfaces.
O. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as the exterior faces,
P. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
Q. Dry Film Thickness: Provide dry film thickness for each finish type, including prime
and finish coats, not less than total dry film thickness as specified in painting schedule.
R. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surfaces
imperfections.

S. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface
of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
T. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film
of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for
final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
U. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove,
refinish or re-paint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.5 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Clean-Up:
1. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials,
rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day.
2. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-
spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing
and scraping, using care not to scratch otherwise damage finished surfaces.
B. Protection:
1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or
replacing, and re-painting, as acceptable by the Engineer.
2. Provide Wet Paint signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes.
Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of
their work, after completion of painting operations.
3. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged and/or
defaced surfaces.
3.6 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Paint Schedule:
1. Concrete, Plaster, and Masonry
a. Stucco Base Smooth Finish: Refer to Section 09 2400 - Portland
cement plastering.
b. Prime Coat: Acrylic Solvent Based Primer, flat.
c. Second Coat: Acrylic Emulsion, Dry Film Thickness 25 micron
(DFT).
d. Finish Coat: Same as for second coat.
2. Ferrous Metals:
a. Prime Coat: Polyamide Cured Epoxy Primer, 50 micron (DFT).
b. Second Coat: High Build Epoxy, 125 micron thick (DFT).
c. Finish Coat: Two-Component Polyurethane, semi-gloss, 50 micron
(DFT).
3. Zinc-Coated Metals:
a. Prime Coat: Acrylic Water Based Primer for GI.
b. Second Coat: Alkyd Enamel, semi-gloss, 30 micron (DFT).
c. Finish Coat: Same as for second coat.
4. Wood Paints:
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd Wood Primer + Wood Filler.
5. Natural Finish Wood:
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd Wood Stain.
b. Second Coat: Lacquer, semi-gloss, 25 micron (DFT).
c. Third Coat: Same as for second coat.
d. Finish Coat: Same as for second coat.
B. Interior Paint Schedule:
1. Concrete, Plaster, Gypsum Board and Masonry:
a. Prime Coat: Acrylic Solvent Based Primer, flat.
b. Second Coat: Acrylic Emulsion, Dry Film Thickness 25 micron
(DFT).
2. Ferrous Metals:
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd Primer.
3. Zinc-Coated Metals:
a. Same as specified for Exterior Paint Schedule.
4. Painted and Natural Finish Wood:
a. Same as specified for Exterior Paint Schedule.
5. Exposed Pipes, Ducts, and Metal work:
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd Primer.
4.1 GENERAL
B. Where work on walls and ceilings is measured by area no deductions will be made for
voids < 1.00 m2.
C. Decorative trim work (e.g. moldings, cornices etc.) will be measured over and
additionally measured separately.

D. Frames, beams etc. within areas of walls and ceilings, which are painted with a different
paint system and/or color, will be measured over up to 30 cm single width and
additionally measured separately .
E. Reveals of voids > 1.00 m2 will be measured separately.
F. The rear sides of recesses will be measured additionally, whatever size they are.
G. Doors measured by m2 will be measured both sides (when both sides are painted).
H. Window grilles, rolling shutters (grilles), railing with mainly vertical rods, grits, fences
will be measured one side only.
I. Surfaces of profiles, corrugated sheets etc. will be accounted according to
manufacturer’s tables, or the overall surface will be measured in case such tables do not
exist.
J. Where work on floors is measured by area, no deductions for voids < 1.00 m2.
A. Painting on walls, ceilings and floors will be measured by m2, separate for different
substrates and paint systems.
B. Reveals of openings > 2.00 m2 will be measured by m2.
C. Doors will be either measured by m2, or enumerated for different sizes and paint
systems.
D. Door frames will be measured by m2 with the girth of the surface, or enumerated for
each type, size and painting system.
E. Window grilles, rolling shutters (grilles), railing with mainly vertical rods, grits, fences
will be measured by m2.
F. Surfaces of profiles, corrugated sheets etc. will be measured by m2.
G. Railings out of pipes will be measured by m length separate for different diameters.
H. Stair stringers will be measured by m length separate for different sizes
I. Road marking will be measured by m length, separate for different width and colour.
PART 5 - Bases of Payment
5.1 GENERAL
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples, co-ordinating
work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and
protecting of finished work.
B. Unit prices for painting shall include primer, intermediate and finish coats.
1. Any preparation and cleaning of substrates prior to commence with painting,
including cleaning of untreated steel.
2. Internal and external work

3. Work of any girth
4. Work at any height above floor level
5. Preparatory work, including preparing existing decorated surfaces
6. Method of application
7. Rubbing down between coats
8. Work required to be carried out before fixing, whether on or off site
9. Priming backs of frames, edges of rebates and beads and bottoms of doors
10. Work in multi-colors, defined as the application of more than one color on an
individual surface or in one room
11. Gloss, semi-gloss, eggshell or flat finish
12. Extra girth of edges, moldings, panels, sinking, corrugations, flutings,
carvings, enrichments and the like
13. Panes of any size in work to glazed surfaces
14. Work to edges of opening lights and surrounding frame caused by opening
lights, cutting in next to glass, work on beads, hinges and fastenings in work
to glazed surfaces
15. Work on hinges and fastenings to doors, frames and linings in work to
general surfaces
16. Removing ironmongery from surfaces to be decorated and re-fixing
17. Masking adjacent surfaces.

FOR
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 10 Specialties

SECTION 10 1400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work under this Specification consists of project signage and installation, as shown on
Drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and
Usable By Physically Handicapped People
B. NFPA 101: 7.10.1.3
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign
material required.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of supports and signs.
Include plans, elevations, and large scale details of sign wording and lettering layout.
Include large scale sections of typical members and other components. Show fabrication
joints and fasteners. Show anchors, grounds, and reinforcement, accessories, layout, and
installation details.
C. Submit samples of all types of signage specified in this section showing material, size, and
color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
For installation use only personnel who are skilled in the work required.
Strictly follow manufacturer's instructions for installation.
1.5 PRODUCT ANDLING:
A. Protection:
1. Protect all items for signage before, during and after installation.
2. Replacements: In event of damage, make necessary replacements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace
signs that fail in materials, finishes or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 10 1400 - Signage

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated as required to produce
strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown or
accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials shown or specified for various components of work.
B. All materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability, and
appearance. No fabrication or installation materials or procedures shall be used that will in
any way change the usual quality or in any manner have an adverse effect on existing
materials and surfaces.
C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated
on Drawings, for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material,
finishes, and colors of signage.
D. Colors to be selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard color chart and ADA color
contrast chart and shall meet ADA requirements for contrast. Copy and background color
of all signs shall have eggshell non-glare finish. Braille shall be same color as background.
E. Refer to Drawings for letter height and letterform.
F. Refer to Drawings for quantity of signs.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and
with at least the strength and durability properties of alloy 5005-H15.
1. Thickness: Provide aluminum sheets and plates in sizes specified or indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Finish: Provide finish as specified or indicated on the drawings.
C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B,
exposed or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M, with steel sheet substrate
complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed.
1. For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smooth
surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
D. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated
on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating
E. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 0.076 mm with
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to glass doors.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Cut out acrylic letters indicating name logo and Symbol project from wall face.
1. Wall mounts as shown on drawings.

2. Use of individual letters/numbers as scheduled on the Drawings
3. Mounting: Concealed studs; stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated or
other non-corroding metal.
2.5 ALUMINUM BACK PLATE SIGNS WITH VINYL APPLICATION
A. Toilet sign (pictogram): Aluminum back plate with vinyl application stating male/female
with male/female Icon.
1. Door Mount (outside), refer to drawings for type and size.
2.6 DIE CUT STICKER
A. Custom die cut sticker vinyl decal.
1. High quality printing
2. Anti-UV for outdoor
3. Custom die cut sticker
3.1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE INSTALLATION
A. Interior signage shall be mounted adjacent to latch side of doors, 150 cm above finished
floor to centerline of sign.
B. In addition to manufacturer’s standard mounting tape, provide four (4) screws per sign.
Screws shall be stainless steel pan head sheet metal screws with “torx” head. Provide
plastic inserts at masonry walls.
C. Clean signs after installation.

5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment, tools,
scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples, co-ordinating work with
other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting of
finished work.


SECTION 10 2100 - COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES (HPL)
PART I - GENERAL
A. High-pressure decorative laminate for interior applications.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 08 1400 - Wood Doors.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. ANSI A208.2-2016 Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior
Applications
C. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWI).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including inspection, preparation,
fabrication, and installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of each pattern, grade, and finish of high-
pressure decorative laminate specified.
1. Sample Size: Minimum 50 by 75 mm inches
C. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials
comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.
D. Manufacturer’s Project References: Submit manufacturer’s list of successfully
completed high-pressure decorative laminate projects, including project name and
location, name of architect, and type and quantity of high-pressure decorative
laminate furnished.
E. Fabricator/Installer’s Project References: Submit fabricator/installer’s list of
successfully completed high-pressure decorative laminate projects, including project
name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of high-pressure
decorative laminate fabricated and installed.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance instructions. H.
Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.
G. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged, for past 10 years, in
manufacture of high-pressure decorative laminate of similar type to that specified.
B. Fabricator/Installer’s Qualifications:
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 10 2100 - compartments and cubicles


1. Fabricator/installer regularly engaged, for past 5 years, in fabrication and

installation of high-pressure decorative laminate of similar type to that
specified.
2. Employ persons trained for fabrication and installation of high-pressure
decorative laminate.
C. Material Source: Obtain high-pressure decorative laminate materials through single
source from single manufacturer
D. Mock-ups:
1. Construct mock-ups to:
a. Verify selection of pattern, grade, and finish of high-pressure
decorative laminate.
b. Demonstrate quality of workmanship of fabrication and installation.
c. Establish quality standards to be used for judging workmanship of
fabrication and installation.
2. Construct mock-ups using same materials for use in the Work.
3. Construct mock-ups at location determined by Architect.
4. Do not proceed until mock-ups are approved by Architect.
A. Delivery Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original,
unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and
manufacturer.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and
packaging until fabrication and installation.
3. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors.
4. Store materials out of direct sunlight.
5. Keep materials from freezing.
6. Store high-pressure decorative laminate horizontally with top face-down and
caulk board placed on top to protect laminate from damage and warping.
7. Store high-pressure decorative laminate and substrates at 24 °C and 45
percent to 55 percent relative humidity.
8. Protect high-pressure decorative laminate from moisture and from contact
with floors and exterior walls.
9. Protect corners of high-pressure decorative laminate from damage.
10. Protect materials during storage, handling, fabrication, and installation to
prevent damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate:
1. Use: Interior applications.


2. Conformance: NEMA LD 3.
3. Manufacturing Process:
a. Laminate phenolic resin-impregnated Kraft sheets with melamine
resin-impregnated decorative and overlay sheets
b. Perform lamination under a minimum pressure of 6900 kPa and at a
temperature of approximately 149 °C.
c. Sand pressed laminate to provide uniform thickness and to facilitate
adhesive bonding.
d. Contains no added urea-formaldehyde.
e. Thickness: 12 mm, or as indicated by engineer.
4. Fire Rating, ASTM E 84: Class I
5. Edge:
a. Solid edge.
B. Substrates:
1. Acceptable Substrates:
a. Medium-density fiberboard (MDF), ANSI A208.2.
b. High-density fiberboard (HDF).
2. Substrates Not Acceptable:
a. Plywood.
b. Plaster.
c. Gypsum board.
d. Concrete.
C. Adhesives: Use for bonding high-pressure decorative laminate to substrates.
1. Polyvinyl acetate resin (PVA) adhesive.
D. Backing Sheets:
1. Kraft-paper core sheets impregnated with phenolic resin.
2. As necessary to balance assembly and prevent warping.
2.2 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect high-pressure decorative laminate surfaces before lamination to
ensure they are sound, dry, clean, and free of surface defects.
2. Remove protective peel, if applicable, before inspection.
3. Correct defects before lamination.
B. Preparation:
1. Sand and prepare substrates and high-pressure decorative laminate as
required to provide a smooth and clean surface that is free of dirt, dust,
moisture, oil, grease, or other impurities that would interfere with adhesion.
2. Ensure substrates are uniform in thickness and free of defects.
C. Fabrication:
1. Ensure materials, equipment, and workmanship are in accordance with:

a. ANSI/NEMA LD 3.
b. AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
2. Bond high-pressure decorative laminate to substrates using adhesives in
accordance with adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.
a. Do not use pressure greater than 3 kg/cm2 to avoid starved glue line
or telegraphing of substrates.
3. Minimize excessive moisture imbalance between high-pressure decorative
laminate and substrates by acclimating materials for a minimum of 72 hours
before fabrication at same ambient conditions of approximately 24 °C and 45
percent to 55 percent relative humidity.
4. Provide air circulation around high-pressure decorative laminate and
substrates during preconditioning.
D. Cleaning:
1. Clean high-pressure decorative laminate promptly after fabrication in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage laminate.
E. Protection: Protect fabricated high-pressure decorative laminate from damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to other sections for installation of completed products made with fabricated
high-pressure decorative laminate described in this section.

5.1 GENERAL




SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Toilet, and bath accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
2. ASTM A269 / A269M - 14e1 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded
Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
3. ASTM B456 - 11e1 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of
Copper plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium
4. ASTM A794 / A794M - 12 Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS),
Sheet, Carbon (0.16 % Maximum to 0.25 % Maximum), Cold-Rolled
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function and
attachment methods.
B. Samples: Submit a sample of each component illustrating color and finish.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide
products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1 General Requirements.
B. Coordinate work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of
toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
C. Coordinate placement of toilet accessories with accessibility standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A794
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A794, Type 304.
C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
D. Adhesive: Two-component epoxy type, waterproof.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 10 2800 Toilet accessories

E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized tamper-proof and security type.
F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
A. Toilet Paper Holder:
1. Toilet Roll Holder without cover surface mounted, single-roll, stainless steel.
B. Towel Bar Holder:
1. Towel Bar Surface mounted, Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Surface mounted to wall, Capacity 1.4 L.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
1. Form surfaces flat without distortion.
2. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment
flanges.
1. Form bar with 38mm clearance from wall surface.
2. Knurl grip surfaces.
D. Shop assembled components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25-oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.
B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
C. Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy
baked enamel.
D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin finish.
E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
F. A back paint component where contact is made with building finishes preventing
electrolysis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Division I General Requirements.
B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer.
C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

D. If accessory locations conflict because of site conditions, notify contractor and/or architect
for clarification.
3.2 REPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough in measurements as required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.


SECTION 10 2819 - TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fixed Glass Panel
1. Section 08 8000 - Glazing
2. Section 10 2800 - Toilet Bath And Laundry Accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM A167 - “Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip”
2. ASTM A666 “Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar”
1. ICC/ANSl A117.1-2009 , “Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options
and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project.
B. Shop Drawings: For tub and shower doors and enclosures.
A. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed
in the same area.
B. Coordinate with Tub and Shower Surrounds.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of tub and shower enclosure as shown on Drawings.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Do not deliver components to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive
them.
B. Store all materials to prevent physical damage or wetting.
C. Maintain protective covers on all units until final clean-up.
D. Protection: Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during
installation of work of this Section.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 10 2819 Tub and shower encloses


1.6 WARRANTY
A. Work of this Section shall be jointly warrantied by the manufacturer and the installer for a period
of one year after final payment. Any material or workmanship that is judged defective during this
period shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Grade 302 stainless steel alloy of at least 22 gauge. Unless shown otherwise, all exposed stainless
steel to have a #4 Satin finish or Satin chrome finish where applicable with all elements of a unit
to have brushing in one direction.
B. Exposed surfaces to be protected with a factory applied PVC film to be left in place until final
clean-up.
C. Glazing: Safety glazing materials complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II, with permanently
etched identification acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Provide frameless glass panels with mounting and operating hardware of types and sizes required
to support imposed loads.
E. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Hot dip galvanized. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as
recommended by accessory manufacturer for component substrate.
F. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement.
2.2 FIXED GLASS PANEL AT SHOWER
A. Materials:
1. Glass Fixed Panel:
a. Clear, tempered, polished edges.
b. Size: Refer to Drawings for width and height.
2. U Channels for Fixed Panel: (One side of glass panel):
a. Finish: Polished Chrome (Bright Anodized)
3. Fasteners: All fasteners to be by the manufacturer.
4. Adhesives: Type as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
5. Sealant: Silicone type as per manufacturer’s recommendations
2.3 FINISHES
A. Exposed heads of fasteners shall match finish of accessory.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.
B. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surface without scratches or dents.
C. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
D. Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site and in appropriate time for building-in. Provide
templates and rough-in measurements as required.
B. Before starting work, notify Owner’s Representative in writing of any conflicts detrimental to
installation or operation of units.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels, and anchor
securely in place.
D. Fasten components securely in place, with provisions for thermal movement. Install with
concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install components to drain and return water to tub or shower.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
C. Install true, plumb, and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.

SECTION 10 7316 - CANOPIES AND TRILLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Pre-engineered metal canopies including fascia channels, decking, tension rods, and
attachment hardware.
B. Building supported metal awnings including framing, enclosure, and attachment
hardware.
C. Fixed exterior sunshades and attachment hardware.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1. ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads For Buildings and Other Structures
2. ASTM B429 / B429M - 10e1 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube
C. Aluminum Association AA DAF 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
1. AA DAF-45-2003 (R2009) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
D. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels.
2. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design members to withstand dead, live, wind and other applicable loads in
accordance with ASCE-7 and applicable code.
B. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authority and provide data as requested
authority having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
3. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system components, dimensions, attachments, and
accessories
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 10 7316 Canopies and trillies

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size
76 mm2, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include
recommendations for periodic checking and adjustment of cable tension and periodic
cleaning and maintenance of all railing and infill components.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section
with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
C. Design structural components, develop shop drawings, and perform shop and site
work under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this
Work and licensed at Project location.
D. Welder Qualifications: All welders must be AWS certified welders.
A. Store products with labels intact, in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready
for installation.
B. Handle materials so as to protect materials, coatings, and finishes during
transportation and installation to prevent damage or staining.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR CANOPY SYSTEM
A. Metal Canopies: Architectural Canopies Extruded System is a building supported,
pre-engineered metal canopy system provided with fascia channels, decking, tension
rods, and attachment hardware.
1. Aluminum Materials:
a. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 and ASTM B 429 6061-T6
alloy and temper.
b. Fasteners: Stainless steel or hot dip galvanized for corrosion
resistance.
2. Fascia:
a. Standard 200 mm, or
b. Standard 200 mm with 75 mm crown profile, or
c. Standard 200 mm with 100 mm crown profile, or
d. Standard 200 mm with 200 mm industrial profile, or
e. Standard 200 mm with 300 mm industrial profile, or
f. As per drawings and directed by Engineer.

3. Decking Profiles:
a. Flat Soffit Decking, or
b. 75 mm by 150 mm capped aluminum, or
c. 30 mm Standard Roll Formed, or
d. 45 mm Roll Formed, or
e. As per drawings and directed by Engineer.
4. Wall Plate Designs:
a. 75 mm diameter standard, or
b. 100 mm2, or
c. 150 mm Star, or
d. 150 mm Contemporary, or
e. As per drawings and directed by Engineer.
5. Framing:
a. Type: Extruded aluminum J channels.
b. Size: 203 mm by 3 mm thick.
6. Canopy Supports:
a. 76 mm by 63.5 mm by 6 mm Extruded Aluminum Canopy Support
"I" Beam.
b. Attachment: 25 mm diameter steel hanger rod finished to match
canopy
7. Accessories:
a. Anchors and Fasteners: Stainless steel or hot dip galvanized and
corrosion resistant.
8. Finish:
a. Clear Anodized: AA M12C22A31, Class I anodized to 18 micron
minimum thickness, clear, or
b. Powder coat: AAMA 2603 Thermosetting Polyester Resin-based
Powder. Color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's
standard range, or
c. As per drawings and directed by Engineer.
9. Simulated wood trim
a. PVC board, designed with a natural appearance to compliment fiber
cement and natural wood
b. Size: 1 inch nominal (3/4 inch actual) thick board.
c. Width.
 2 inches nominal (1-1/2 Inches actual).
 3 inches nominal (2-1/2 Inches actual).

 4 Inches nominal (3-1/2 Inches actual).
 5 Inches nominal (4-1/2 Inches actual).
d. Finish:
 Smooth/Smooth finish.
 Reversible with Smooth/Timber Ridge finish.
e. Accessories
 Fasteners: Stainless steel fasteners designed for wood trim
and siding
 Adhesives: Finishing System: Adhere simulated wood trim
to itself with PVC cement or cellular PVC adhesives to
prevent joint separation.
 Sealants: Urethane, polyurethane, polymer blends or acrylic
based sealants that do not contain silicone
2.2 FABRlCATlON
A. Fabricate system in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Field verifies dimensions of supporting structure and any openings at site of
installation prior to fabrication
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install components plumb and level, in proper plane, free from warp and twist.
C. Anchor system to building components; provide adequate clearance for movement
caused by thermal expansion and contraction and wind loads.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean all surfaces and restore any marred or abraded surfaces to original conditions
as approved by the Architect.
3.5 PROTECTION
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 12 FURNISHINGS

SECTION 12 3640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Performed by firm with 3 years minimum experience in type
work required for Project.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM A1008 / A1008M - 16 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
2. ASTM C 503 / C 503M - 15 Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone
3. ASTM D256 - 10e1 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics
4. ASTM D 570 - 98(2010) e1 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
5. ASTM D638 - 14 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
6. ASTM D 785 - 08(2015) Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
7. ASTM D 790 - 15e2 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
8. ASTM D 4690 - 12 Standard Specification for Urea-Formaldehyde Resin Adhesives
9. ASTM G21 - 15 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
C. Composite Panel Association (CPA)
1. ANSI A208.1-2009 Particleboard
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide large scale details of construction.
2. Indicate profiles of members, jointing, fastening, edge detailing, and cut-outs for
mechanical services, sinks, accessories and related items.
B. Samples
1. Submit three 300 mm by 300 mm samples of stone and finish for acceptance before
proceeding with Work.
2. Show details of joining and edging.
3. Indicate maximum range of stone variation colors and veining.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 12 3640 - Stone Countertops

1.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective coverings of suitable material for stone items. Take special
precautions at corners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Stone & Marble:
1. Furnish each type stone for this Project from one quarry.
2. Provide sound, hard, durable, and well seasoned stone of uniform strength, color and
texture, free of quarry sap, flaws, cracks, seams, starts, sand holes, iron pyrites, or other
mineral or organic defects which affect visual appearance or structural integrity.
3. Free from machine marks.
4. Inherent variations characteristic of quarry from which stone is obtained will be acceptable,
except inclusions will be limited to 1-1/2 inches in size for coarse grain stone; 1/2 inch in
size for fine grain stone and will be acceptable only if indicated on Owner’s
Representative’s samples.
5. Stones with cracks will be rejected.
6. Surface Finish: Polished, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
7. Standard: Comply with ASTM C503.
8. Color: Refer to Finish Legend.
9. Surface Finish: Polished.
10. Adhesives and Cements
a. Non-staining type as recommended by manufacturer of stone.
b. Waterproof, permanent material which will not induce mildew and fungus
growth.
11. Joint Sealants:
a. Type: One part silicone, tested and proven not to stain stone selected for this
Project.
b. Colors: Custom as selected by Owner’s Representative.
c. Primer: When required, type as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
12. Sealer: Clear, penetrating sealer of type recommended by stone supplier.
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1. Concealed backing sheet.
2. Decorative surfaces:
a. Flat components.
b. Post forming.
3. Chemical Resistant Surfaces
a. Flat components.

b. Post forming.
c. Resistance to reagents:
 Test with five 0.25 mil drops remaining on surface for 16 hours
followed by washing off with tap water, then cleaned with liquid
soap and water, dried with soft cotton cloth and then cleaned
with naphtha.
 No change in color, surface texture, and original protectability
remaining from test results of following reagents:
98% Acetic Acid Butyl Alcohol Acetone
90% Formic Acid-- Benzine Chloroform
28% Ammonium Hydroxide Xylene Carbon Tetrachloride
Zinc Chloride (Sat.) Toluene Cresol
Sodium Carbonate (Sat.) Gasoline Ether
Calcium Hypochlorite (Sat.) Kerosene Cottonseed Oil
Sodium Chloride (Sat.) Mineral Oil 40% Formaldehyde
Methyl Alcohol Ethyl Acetate Trichlorethylene
Ethyl Alcohol Amyl Acetate Monochlorobenzine
 Superficial effects only: Slight color change, spot, or residue
only with original protectability remaining from test results of
following reagents:
77% Sulfuric Acid 37% Hydrochloric Acid 85% Phenol
33% Sulfuric Acid 20% Nitric Acid Furfural
85% Phosphoric Acid 30% Nitric Acid Dioxane
 Minimum height of impact resistance: 300 mm.
C. Molded Resin:
1. Non-glare epoxy resin or furan resin compounded and cured for minimum physical
properties specified:
Flexural strength 70 MPa ASTM D790
Rockwell hardness 105 ASTM D785
Water absorption, 14 hours (weight) 0.01% ASTM D570
2. Material of uniform mixture throughout.

3. Stainless Steel: Type 304.
4. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold rolled, Class 1 finish, stretcher leveled.
5. Particle board: CPA A208.1, Grade 2-M-2.
6. Plywood: PS 1, Exterior type, veneer grade AC not less than five ply construction.
7. Hardwood Countertop: Solid maple, clear grade except where otherwise specified.
8. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Type I, tempered, fire retardant treated, smooth surface
one side.
9. Adhesive
a. For plastic laminate FS A-A-1936.
b. For wood products: ASTM D4690, un-extended urea resin or un-
extended melamine resin, phenol resin, or resorcinol resin.
c. For Field Joints:
 Epoxy type, resistant to chemicals as specified for plastic
laminate laboratory surfaces.
 Fungi resistant: ASTM G-21, rating of 0.
10. Fasteners:
a. Metals used for welding same metal as materials joined.
b. Use studs, bolts, spaces, threaded rods with nuts or screws suitable for
materials being joined with metal splice plates, channels or other
supporting shape.
D. Solid Polymer Material:
1. Filled Methyl Methacrylic Polymer.
2. Performance properties required:
Property Result Test
Elongation 0.3% min. ASTM D638
Hardness 90 Rockwell M ASTM D785
Gloss (600 Gordon) 5-20 NEMA LD3.1
Color stability No change NEMA LD3 except 200
hour
Abrasion resistance No loss of pattern NEMA LD3
Max wear depth 0.0762 mm (0.003
in) - 10000 cycles
Water absorption weight 24 hours 0.9 ASTM D-570
(5 max)
Izod impact 14 N·m/m ASTM D256
(0.25 ft-lb/in) (Method A)
Impact resistance No fracture NEMA LD-3 900 mm
(36") drop 1 kg
(2 lb.) ball
Boiling water surface No visible change NEMA LD3
resistance
High temperature Slight surface dulling NEMA LD3
resistance

3. Cast into sheet form and bowl form.
4. Color throughout with subtle veining through thickness.
5. Joint adhesive and sealer: Manufacturers silicone adhesive and sealant for joining methyl
Methacrylic polymer sheet.
6. Bio-based products will be preferred.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Assemble work at shop and deliver to job ready for installation.
B. Fabricate work square and to required lines.
C. Recess and conceal fasteners, connections and reinforcing.
D. Design construction and installation details to allow for expansion and contraction of
materials. Properly frame material with tight hairline joints held rigidly in place. Conceal
connections.
E. Comply with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for adhesive shelf life, pot life,
working life, mixing, spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient
temperature.
F. Provide cut-outs for sinks, mechanical services, washroom accessories and related items.
Holes shall be drilled from physical templates of all items. Polish edges as required.
G. Fabricate vanities with backsplash, end splashes and aprons to profiles indicated.
H. Fabricate stones to not less than 30 mm thickness. Unless indicated otherwise, provide
edge treatment of bull nose design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work
of this Section. Notify Owner’s Representative of any existing conditions which will
adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Securely install framing to substrate.
B. Install vanities at locations indicated level, square, true to line, rigid and secure.
C. Install in accordance with MIA recommendations for lavatories and countertops.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Keep installed work clean as work progresses.
B. Leave clean and free from blemishes.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable by
sealant manufacturer and stone fabricator.
D. Clean and repair surfaces soiled or otherwise damaged in connection with work of this
Section. Pay cost of replacing materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned or which
have been damaged by improper cleaning materials and techniques.
4.1 GENERAL
A. Toilet accessories which are specified to be supplied will be measured separately.
A. Toilet accessories will be measured by unit as defined in the bill of quantities.
5.1 GENERAL
1. Anchored to substrate.
2. Templates.
3. Back paint components.
4. Inserts and rough in frames.
5. Cleaning and protection until final handing


SECTION 12 5000 - FURNITURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes all items as per drawings and sheets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of
product provided under work of this Section:
1. Local/Regional Materials:
a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction and recovery.
b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing
facility.
c. Product Component(s): Where product components are sourced or
manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for
each component.
1.3 REFERENCES
Iron Castings
3. ASTM A48 / A48M - 03(2016) Standard Specification for Gray Iron
Castings
5. ASTM A153 / A153M - 16a Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-
6. ASTM A489 - 12 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes
7. ASTM A563 - 15 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
Dip Process
Zinc on Iron and Steel
11. ASTM C216 - 17 Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry
Units Made from Clay or Shale)
12. ASTM C615 / C615M - 11 Standard Specification for Granite Dimension
Stone
13. ASTM C1036 - 16 Standard Specification for Flat Glass
14. ASTM D638 - 14 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
15. ASTM D696 - 16 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous Silica
Dilatometer
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 12 5000 - FURNITURE


16. ASTM D790 - 17 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of

Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
Concrete Elements
19. ASTM F568 - 93 Standard Specification For Carbon And Alloy Steel
Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners
20. ASTM F836M - 16 Standard Specification for Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric
Nuts (Metric)
21. ASTM F1554 - 15e2 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55,
and 105-ksi Yield Strength
22. ASTM F1941 / F1941M - 16 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited
Coatings on Mechanical Fasteners, Inch and Metric
1. ANSI Z124.3-2005 Plastic lavatories
2. ANSI Z124.6-2007 Plastic Sinks
3. ANSI A208.2-2016 Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior
Applications
C. BS EN Euro codes
1. BS EN 942-2007 Timber in joinery — General requirements
2. BS EN 636:2012 Plywood. Specifications
D. British Standards
1. BS 1203:2001 Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic wood adhesives.
Classification and test method
2. BS 1088-1:2003 Marine Plywood
3. BS 1202-1:2002 Specification for nails. Steel nails
4. BS 4174:1972 Specification for self-tapping screws and metallic drive
screws
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: 10 years against manufacturing defects.
1. Seller warranties to replace, or at seller's option, repair any product or part
thereof which is found to be defective in material or workmanship for a
period of ten years from date buyer accepts products. All parts and labor
required under warranty provisions shall be supplied free of charge.
2. Transportation costs of returning the products to and from repair facility or
costs involved with contractor personnel traveling to buyer's facility for the
purpose of repairing products on site shall be borne by seller during 10 year
warranty period.
1.5 Spare Parts And Maintenance Products
1. Provide three (3) percent additional sets of each different hardware type and
finish.
2. Deliver to project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metals:
1. Ferrous Metals
a. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts)
complying with MFMA-4.
 Size of Channels: 41 by 41 mm unless otherwise indicated.
 Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M,
commercial steel, Type B, with Z275 coating; 2.8-mm
nominal thickness.
c. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron,
ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Fasteners
 General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 and
Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use, and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
 Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
 Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
 Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F
568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
 Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head
annealed stainless-steel bolts, with hex nuts, ASTM F 836M;
and where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group A1 and
Group A4.
 Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions
indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and where indicated, flat
washers.
 Hot-dip galvanized or provides mechanically deposited, zinc
coating where item being fastened is indicated to be
galvanized.
 Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
 Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
 Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
 Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.
 Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
 Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2. Steel And Iron Finishes

a. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with

ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM
A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
b. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might
interfere with paint adhesion.
c. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless
they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or
masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
d. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below:
 Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
 Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP
6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
 Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 9
Section "High-Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE
No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
 Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
e. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings."
f. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
3. Aluminum
a. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
b. Finishes:
 Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-
M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA 612 clear
anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal;
not less than 0.018 mm thick.
 Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA
2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride
system.
 Color: As shown on the drawings, or directed by Engineer
 Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard range.
 Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating
manufacturer for field application.
B. Wood:
1. Softwood shall be free from decay and insect attack, except pinhole borers,
with no knots wider than half the width of the section. Softwood shall
comply with BS EN 942 softwood species to be used in external locations are
to be recommended for the purpose.
2. Hardwood shall comply with BS EN 942. Hardwood to be used in internal
locations is to be recommended for the purpose.
3. Rigid sheets
a. Plywood: BS EN 636: Part 1, face grade for general use. Bonding is
to be to BS 1203, type WBP for external use and type MR or INT for
internal use.


b. Marine Quality Plywood: to BS 1088, plywood made from Gabon.

4. Fasteners
a. Nails: to BS 1202, Part 1, 2 or 3 generally, but non-ferrous types to
Parts 2 or 3 for external use.
b. Wood Screws: non-ferrous types for external use.
c. Self-Tapping Screws: to BS 4174.
d. Dowels: mild steel, 10 mm diameter, 100 mm long, galvanized after
fabrication.
e. Cramps: mild steel, 25 x 3 x 250 mm girth, turned up at one end and
twice drilled for 3 mm screws, fish-tailed at other end for building in
and galvanized after fabrication.
f. Plugs: either traditional hardwood plugs, shaped to twist and grip
when driven, or proprietary fiber or plastics plugs, or other approved
type.
5. Treatments, Adhesives And Finishes
a. Preservative Treatment: shall be (except coal tar creosote) obtained
from an approved manufacturer, to give suitable protection against
termites and other wood destroying organisms.
b. Adhesive for Joinery: shall comply with BS 1203, type WBP for
external use and type MR or INT for internal use. Obtain
manufacturer's confirmation that adhesive is compatible with
preservative treatment.
6. Preservative Treatment
a. Application is to be carried out after cutting and machining, but
before assembly, by a processor licensed by the treatment solution
manufacturer.
b. Solution strengths and treatment by pressure, vacuum or immersion
process are to be selected to achieve service life and to suit wood
treatability.
c. Moisture content of wood at time of treatment is to be as specified for
use in the work.
d. After treatment, allow wood to dry before use.
e. For each batch of wood, provide certificate of assurance that
treatment has been carried out as specified.
f. Re-treat all treated wood which is sawn along the length, ploughed,
thicknesses, planed or otherwise extensively processed.
g. Treat wood surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling with two
flood coats of solution recommended for the purpose by the treatment
solution manufacturer.
C. Solid brick:
1. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 10.34 MPa.
3. Maximum Initial Rate of Absorption (IRA): 4 kg /m2 /min.
D. Granite:

1. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.

2. Description: Uniform, fine, medium-grained, white, pink, gray, red, or black
stone without veining.
3. Cut: Vein (cut perpendicular to the plane of the veining) or Fleuri (cut
parallel to the plane of the veining) as directed by Engineer.
4. Orientation of Veining: Horizontal or Vertical or as indicated and directed
by Engineer.
5. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural
markings occur.
6. Finish: Polished or as indicated and match Architect's sample.
7. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics
relating to aesthetic effects.
8. Thickness: Not less than 20 mm unless otherwise indicated.
E. Corian
1. Cast, filled, acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite construction,
meeting ANSI Z124.3, and ANSI Z124.6.
2. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified.
3. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.8 mm shall be repairable by sanding or
polishing.
4. Material Thicknesses: 6 mm, 13 mm, 20 mm or as indicated and directed by
Engineer.
5. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.
6. Edge Treatments: As selected by Architect
7. Performance Characteristics:
PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST PROCEDURE

Tensile Strength Minimum 5000 psi ASTM D638
Flexural Strength Minimum 7000 psi ASTM D790
6
Flexural Modulus Minimum 1.0 x 10 ASTM D790
Elongation Minimum 0.3% ASTM D638
Strain at Break Minimum 0.8% ASTM D638
Thermal Expansion -6 ASTM D696
Maximum 3.5 x 10 in/in/°C
Color Stability Minimum 100 hours, No change NEMA LD3-3.10
F. High-pressure decorative laminate (HPL)

1. Use: Interior applications.
2. Conformance: NEMA LD 3.
3. Manufacturing Process:
a. Laminate phenolic resin-impregnated Kraft sheets with melamine
resin-impregnated decorative and overlay sheets
b. Perform lamination under a minimum pressure of 6900 kPa and at a
temperature of approximately 149 °C.
c. Sand pressed laminate to provide uniform thickness and to facilitate
adhesive bonding.


d. Contains no added urea-formaldehyde.

4. Fire Rating, ASTM E 84
5. Edge:
a. Solid edge.
6. Substrates:
a. Acceptable Substrates:
 Medium-density fiberboard (MDF), ANSI A208.2.
 High-density fiberboard (HDF).
7. Adhesives: Use for bonding high-pressure decorative laminate to substrates.
a. Polyvinyl acetate resin (PVA) adhesive.
8. Backing Sheets:
a. Kraft-paper core sheets impregnated with phenolic resin.
b. As necessary to balance assembly and prevent warping.
G. Decorative Glass Glazing
1. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide
glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
2. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass,
Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as
needed to comply with requirements indicated. Where heat-strengthened
glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-
treated float glass as needed to comply with requirements indicated. Where
fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
3. Back painted decorative glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I
(ultra-clear float).
4. Fabrication Process: By curtain head production line to assure uniform paint
coverage using an adhesion promoter to ensure paint adhesion to the glass.
Back painted decorative glass must have a secondary protective grey backing
paint to protect colored paint surface.
5. Decorative Glass Types
a. Decorative Glass: Back painted glass; annealed, safety backing film
or fully tempered, as per drawings and directed by Engineer. And
complying with other requirements specified.
b. Back Paint Color: Pure White, Black, Luminous Red, Luminous
Yellow, Turquoise Blue, Mocha, Metal Grey, Rich Aluminum,
Pastel Green, Deep Blue, or as per drawings and directed by
Engineer.
6. Decorative-Glass Fabrication
a. Edge Finishing: Fabricate finished edges to produce smooth,
polished edges without chips, scratches, or warps.
b. Finished Edge: Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glazed
lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs or as
per drawings and directed by Engineer.
c. Lite Treatment: Drilled, Notched, Cut out, Surface cut or as
indicated on Drawings with smooth, uniform edge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

A. Indoor Air Quality:
1. Temporary ventilation: Provide temporary ventilation as follows:
a. Ventilate products prior to installation. Remove from packaging and
ventilate in a secure, dry, well-ventilated space free from strong
contaminant sources and residues. Provide a temperature range of 15
°C minimum to 32 °C maximum continuously for minimum 72
hours. Do not ventilate within limits of Work unless otherwise
B. Resource Management:
1. Energy Efficiency: Verify equipment is properly installed, connected, and
adjusted. Verify that equipment is operating as specified.
2. Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement

A. All items shall be enumerated. Setting and fitting will be included.

5.1 GENERAL

FOR
DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 14 Conveying equipment

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 14 Conveying equipment
SECTION 14 9182 - TRASH CHUTES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies gravity trash chutes complete and ready for operation.
B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General,
Supplemental and Special conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete layout drawings of system, including detail drawings of load
stations, roof vent, discharge openings, riser anchoring and electrical riser.
B. Shop Drawings of Fabricated Equipment and Manufacturer's Literature and
Data: Submit as one package:
1. Gravity Chute
2. Roof Vents
3. Flushing Head/Ring
4. Gravity Chute Loading Stations
5. Discharge Openings with Automatic Fire Damper
6. Door Locks
C. Manufacturer’s certificate stating that the loading and discharge doors and
frames meet the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. for the fire
rating specified.
A. Criteria:
1. Manufacturer regularly and presently manufacturers the item submitted as
one of their principal products.
2. There is a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the
manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within
eight (8) hours of receipt of notification that service is requested.
3. Installer, or supplier of a service, has technical qualifications, experience,
and trained personnel and facilities to perform the specified work. A
minimum of three (3) years of experience in the installation of gravity chutes.
4. Manufacturer's system has been in satisfactory operation on two (2)
installations similar to this system for at least two (2) years. Provide names
of these facilities and contact information.
B. Product Criteria:
1. Multiple Units: When two (2) or more units of the same type or class of
materials or equipment are required, these units are products of one
manufacturer.
Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 14 9182 Trash chutes

2. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use
components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final
assembled product.
a. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the
same manufacturer, but component parts which are alike are the
products of a single manufacturer.
b. Components are compatible with each other and with the total
assembly for the intended service.
3. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable
trademark securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment or name or
trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently
marked on each item of equipment.
C. Design Criteria:
1. The information shown on the contract drawings is intended to establish
basic requirements of the system. Within these limitations, the Contractor is
responsible for the final design of the gravity chute and to make whatever
modifications of, and additions to the drawings, as may be required to fulfill
the performance requirements.
2. Contractor is responsible for coordination of chute drawings and installation
with all other building systems.
3. Space Conditions: Contractor shall pay special attention to existing structure
provided in prior phases of construction.
D. Transport trash in plastic bags.
E. Employee Instructions: Provide a qualified representative possessing complete
knowledge of system and equipment to train employees in operation and
maintenance of system. Training period shall be as follows:
1. Four (4) hours instructing maintenance personnel on the operation and
maintenance of system.
2. In addition to verbal instruction, furnish written instructions in triplicate
relative to care, adjustment, and operating of all parts of equipment in
independently bound folders. Written instructions shall include complete,
correct, and legible wiring diagrams, complete and comprehensive sequence
of operations, complete parts lists with descriptive literature and
identifications, diagrammatic cuts of equipment and parts.
1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish inspection and maintenance service on all chute equipment for a
period of one (1) year that system is turned over for beneficial use. This
service shall consist of examination by competent trained and qualified
mechanic; cleaning, oiling, greasing, adjustments and replacement of any
parts required to place equipment in proper working order, (except for parts
requiring replacement due to improper use, accidents or operator negligence).
Maintenance is to be performed monthly.
1.5 WARRANTY

A. All labor and materials furnished in connection with the Gravity chutes shall
be subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction". Upon receipt of notice
from the Owner or the Owner representative of any failure of any portion of
materials or workmanship furnished, the failure shall be corrected at no
additional cost to the government.
B. No device will be accepted that will not give perfect satisfaction without
excessive maintenance and attention. If it becomes evident during the
warranty period that the equipment is not functioning properly, or in
accordance with specification requirements, or, if in the opinion of the Owner
or the Owner representative, excessive maintenance and attention must be
employed to keep equipment operating, the Contractor shall remove
equipment and install a new device meeting all requirements as part of the
work until satisfactory operation on installation is obtained. Period of
warranty shall start a new from date of completion of new installation
performed in accordance with foregoing requirements.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80-2010 Fire Doors and Fire Windows
2. NFPA 82-2009 Incinerators, Waste and Linen Handling Systems and
Equipment
3. NFPA 90A-2012 Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A240 / A240M - 15b Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
and for General Applications
2. ASTM A463 / A463M - 15 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,
Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process
Dip Process
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. UL 555-2006 Safety Fire Dampers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRAVITY CHUTE
A. Risers:
1. Six 600 mm diameter tubes, constructed of 16 gauge aluminized steel
conforming to ASTM A463.
2. Chute parts extending above-roof shall conform to ASTM A653, galvanized
steel.
3. Provide slip type expansion joints in chute risers between floors, upper
section telescoping into section below.

4. Support chutes by frames and fasteners at each floor to prevent sound
transmission to the floor slab as recommended by manufacturer. Weld and
dress smooth connection joints between vertical shafts and horizontal intakes
with no projections that may catch or tear the trash bags.
5. Provide factory applied sound insulation with sprayed on sound deadening
material.
6. Gravity chute shall meet the NFPA 82 requirements.
7. Vent: Extend full chute diameter a minimum of 1300 mm above roof level.
Cap roof vent to prevent rain from entering chute and allow for the
circulation of air within the chute riser.
B. Provide Chute Fire Damper at Discharge Opening as indicated on drawings.
1. The base of the gravity chute shall terminate with sliding gate type discharge
opening with a fire damper that carries the UL (1-1/2 hour 120 °C) "B" label,
covering size, design and construction of gate, frame and closing mechanism.
Dampers shall conform to UL 555.
2. The base of the chute (Discharge Opening) shall terminate with a single 45
degree radius sweep section.
a. The 45 degree sweep shall be reinforced at the bottom by steel.
Support bottom of sweep with 50 mm diameter chromium plated
standard steel or stainless steel adjustable pedestal, with flange for
bolting to floor.
b. Door for the Discharge Opening shall be 610 mm wide by 760 mm
high, top hinged with hold open device and fusible link.
C. Provide Gravity Chute disinfecting and sanitizing device as indicated on
drawings:
1. Equip chute at with flushing spray heads designed to wash the inside of
chute. Equip chutes with 25 mm inside pipe size chrome plated brass
flushing spray head, at 1220 mm above the highest intake door, and with a 13
mm inside pipe size, chrome plate brass sprinkler head located at discharge
door at every second intake door.
2. Contractor shall provide all necessary fittings to water supply piping to
connect the disinfecting and sanitizing device to the plumbing system.
3. Equip bottom of chute with hinged access for cleaning and water removal.
2.2 GRAVITY CHUTE LOADING STATIONS
A. Fabricate loading station of 16 gauge stainless steel. Station shall consist of
the intake door mounted in a single face plate. The intake door shall have
pivot type hinges, and be located as indicated on drawings.
B. Intake doors shall carry the UL (1-1/2 hour 120 °C) "B" label, covering size,
design and construction of the door, frame, latching, and closing mechanism.
Fabricate door of stainless steel and provide self-closing and self-latching
devices. Door size shall be a minimum of 320 mm wide by 460 mm high,
bottom hinged with cylinder lock. Install door frame flush with finished wall.
1. Each intake door shall have an indicator showing when the door is locked.
2. Clearly letter on the intake door in letters approximately 25 mm high, the
word "TRASH". Raise or incise letters in door face in permanent manner.
Raised lettering shall be metal or plastic with metal attachment.
3. Provide cylinder locks, keyed the same, for all load stations. Furnish 15 keys
for each chute. Stamp the letters "TRASH CHUTE KEY" on each key tag to
identify location of use.
C. Provide intake and shroud doors with electric interlocking mechanism to
permit only one door in a riser to be opened at a time.
D. Access Door to be 320 mm by 320 mm, with an UL (1-1/2 hour 120 °C) "B"
label, located where indicated on drawings. Locate access door to service the
flushing ring.
1. Provide hand-operated latch release device.
2. Provide anchors for door frame of type to suit material of wall in which they
are installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Gravity Chute Loading Stations:
1. Set station flush with adjacent surface.
2. Attach face plate to supports with stainless steel screws.
B. Hangers:
1. Provide supports at each floor line and at the roof line.
C. Automatic Fire Dampers: Shall conform to UL 555 and NFPA 82.
D. Protection: Protect all finish parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearing
where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease
coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during
installation. Cover and protect equipment against dirt, water, and chemical or
mechanical injury. Clean all exposed surfaces and components at completion
of all work.
3.2 TESTS:
A. Demonstrate entire system will with fully loaded waste bags and that it
operates as specified. Demonstrate operation of fire damper at discharge
opening.
B. Resident Engineer shall witness the system testing and final inspection.

FOR
DIVISION 31: EARTHWORK
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 31 Earthwork

SECTION 31 2300 - EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers excavation requirements also the requirements for earth filling
underneath, around, and above foundations, as well where needed.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: Consists of satisfactory loosening, removing, loading, transporting,
depositing and compacting in final location, wet and dry materials, necessary to be
removed as indicated on the Plans.
B. Fill: placement of material in an excavation to final grade.
C. Backfill: refill of an excavation, previously removed.
D. Backfill Adjacent to Structure: backfill within a volume bounded by the exterior surface
of a structure or finish grade around a structure.
E. In-Place Density of Compacted Backfill: density determined in accordance with ASTM
D 6938.
F. Optimum Moisture Content: As referred to in these Specifications, optimum moisture
content is the moisture content, expressed in percent (by dry weight), corresponding to
the maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM D1557.
G. Maximum Density: density obtained in laboratory when testing in accordance with
ASTM D 1557.
H. Percent Relative Compaction: As referred to in these Specifications, percent relative
compaction is the required in-place dry density of the material, expressed as a
percentage of the maximum dry density of the same material determined by ASTM
D1557
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Samples of imported Soil Materials are required.
B. Submit analytical test for the import material, including laboratory data sheets,
description of sample collection methods, and any additional information pertinent to
assessing the potential for the import material to be contaminated by chemicals of
concern.
C. Submit chemical test analysis reports for all soils from approved soil-testing
laboratories.
D. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:
1. Geotextile.
2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.
3. Warning tapes.
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:
1. Geotextile: 300 by 300 mm.
2. Warning Tape: 300 mm long; of each color.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 31 2300 Excavation and fill

F. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
G. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill
and backfill as follows:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.
H. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth
moving begins.
1.4 REFERENCES
2. ASTM C150 / C150M - 16e1 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
3. ASTM D698 - 12e2 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
4. ASTM D1556 / D1556M - 15e1 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit
Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method
5. ASTM D1557 - 12e1 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-
m/m3))
6. ASTM D2167 - 15 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil
in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
7. ASTM D2487 - 11 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
8. ASTM D3740 - 12a Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for
Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in
Engineering Design and Construction
9. ASTM D6938 - 15 Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and
Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
1. BS 3882:2007 Specification for topsoil and requirements for use
A. Independent testing laboratory selected and paid by Contractor shall be retained to
perform construction testing on filling operations and sub-grade analysis as specified
in Soil Report and as stated herein. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
accurately establish locations for all utilities.
1. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to
ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

2. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
B. Initial Compaction Demonstration:
1. Adequacy of Compaction Equipment and Procedures: demonstrate adequacy of
compaction equipment and produces before exceeding the following amount of
earthwork quantities:
a. 750 m3 of Engineered fill.
C. Compaction Sequence Requirements: until specified degree of compaction on
previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform additional
earthwork or the same kind.
D. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction demonstrated at any time during
construction, provide confirmation tests.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor is responsible for verifying that Plans are representative of field
conditions.
B. All excavated materials, which are not required for fill and backfill, or which are
unsuitable for fill or backfill, shall be disposed by the Contractor, at their own
expense and responsibility, and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
C. If the Contractor uses import material that is, or is found to be, not in accordance
with the specifications, the Contractor shall remove all out-of-specification import
material. The Contractor shall verify, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that all out-
of-specification import material has been removed and any effects from its placement
at the site have been mitigated sufficiently. The subsequent disposal of the out-of-
specification import material shall be the sole responsibility and at the sole expense
of the Contractor. The Engineer shall not be liable for, nor will it pay, any additional
costs incurred by the Contractor for the characterization, removal, disposal or
replacement of the out-of-specification import material.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other
adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.
B. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify "Call before You Dig" for area where Project is
located before beginning earth moving operations.
E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Excavation or other digs unless otherwise indicated.

6. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless
F. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
G. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection
zones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Representative samples of materials to be used for Engineered fill shall be tested to
determine the soil classification, potential contaminants (for imported soil fill)
maximum density, optimum moisture content and particle size.
B. Fill material from on-site as specified in Soil Report and approved by the Engineer.
C. Fill material from off-site as specified in Soil Report and approved by the Engineer.
D. Cement-stabilized sand shall be a mix of Type I Portland Cement conforming to
ASTM C150 and Clean durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine
aggregates of ASTM C33 requirements. Cement-stabilized sand shall be considered a
separate construction item for bulk backfill.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing work:
1. Verify existing grades and conditions are as indicated on the Plans.
2. Should indicated conditions conflict with actual conditions, notify the
Engineer and await their directions before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Preparing Ground Surfaces for Fill.
2. After removal or clearing is complete, scarify entire areas that underlie fill
sections to a depth of 15 cm and until the surface is free of ruts, hummocks,
and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to
be used.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavation:
1. Excavate to sub-grade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may
include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract
Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal
of obstructions.
2. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory
soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of
permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 600 mm outside of concrete forms other than at footings.

b. 300 mm outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 150 mm outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast
against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against
rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments or as
e. 150 mm beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
f. 150 mm beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 600 mm wider
than pipe or minimum 1060 mm wide.
B. Classified Excavation:
1. Excavate to sub-grade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified
as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross
sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock
excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents.
Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.
2. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on
surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be
removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as
rock or unauthorized excavation. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted;
ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is
earth excavation.
3. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to
lines and sub-grade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 600 mm outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
b. 300 mm outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 150 mm outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast
against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against
rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
e. 150 mm beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
f. 150 mm beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 600 mm wider
than pipe or minimum 1060 mm wide
C. Methods
1. Identify all lines, elevations and grades necessary to construct building sub-
grades, utility pipeline installations, pavements, curb and gutter, bases,
walkways and roadways as shown in the plans and specifications.
2. Carefully protect bench marks, property corners, monuments or other reference
points.
3. Locate and identify all site utilities that have previously been installed and may
be in danger of damage by grading operations.
4. Locate and identify all existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from

damage.
5. Submit details of proposed methods of working which may cause nuisance,
damage or danger to people and/or property.
6. Trim excavations to required profiles and levels and remove all loose material.
7. Level and compact bottoms of excavations to approval.
8. Sides of excavations: Responsibility for upholding sides of excavations rests
with the Contractor.
D. Excavation Materials and Conditions
1. Assess the nature of the work and the materials to be excavated.
2. Take sole responsibility for your assessment of materials and conditions.
3. Materials and conditions are described in the factual geotechnical addendum
attached as part of the project documents. The Employer does not guarantee
that materials and conditions encountered in the site exploration will be found
on other parts of the site. Assess the nature of the work and the materials to be
excavated.
4. Materials arising from excavations are to remain the property of the Employer
unless specified or instructed to be removed from the site.
5. Ensure the bottom of the excavation is smooth, free from depressions,
lumps and protruding objects.
E. Topsoil for Preservation
1. Before beginning general excavation or filling, excavate topsoil from required
areas and keep separate from excavated subsoil.
F. Adjacent Excavations
1. Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle from the
horizontal of 45 degrees for dry stable soil or 30 degrees for wet clays or soils
below water table from the nearest formation level of another higher excavation
then all work within the lower excavation and backfilling thereto must be
completed before the higher excavation is made.
G. Obtain Instructions if :
1. Natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil is not obtained at depth shown
on the Drawings
2. Formation contains soft or hard spots or highly variable material.
H. Earthwork Support
1. Use as necessary to support sides of excavations and remove on completion
unless otherwise instructed.
2. In the event of any collapse occurring while excavations are open re-excavate
and reinstate such excavations and other work affected
I. Special Support
1. Use as necessary to uphold excavations against sides of adjoining buildings,
public footpaths, roads and the like and remove on completion unless otherwise
instructed

J. Unstable Ground
1. Inform the Engineer without delay if any newly excavated face will not remain
unsupported sufficiently long to allow necessary earthwork support to be
inserted.
2. If instability is likely to affect adjacent structures or roadways take appropriate
emergency action.
3. Responsibility for preventing instability rests with the Contractor.
K. Existing Foundations
1. Where old foundations, beds, drains etc. are encountered obtain instructions
before proceeding.
2. Break out old foundations, beds, drains etc., seal off drain ends, remove
contaminated earth and disinfect as instructed.
L. Unauthorised Excavations
1. Backfill any excavation taken wider than required with approved filling unless
otherwise instructed.
2. Backfill any excavation taken deeper than required with plain concrete unless
otherwise instructed.
3.4 DEWATERING
A. Keep excavations free from water.
B. Pumping: Do not disturb material in and around excavations by pumping operations, if
any.
C. Permanent drainage system is not to be used for disposal of water from excavations
without approval.
D. Sumps: Obtain approval of location of sumps, if any, and fill with approved material
when no longer required.
E. Furnish a self-jetting type well point dewatering system of adequate size and capacity to
lower and maintain the groundwater at the specified level. The system shall include
standby pumps and power source for continuous operation.
1. Dewatering system shall consist of well points, riser pipes, swing joints, header
lines, valves, pumps, discharge lines, and all other necessary fittings,
accessories and equipment for a complete operating well point system. Furnish
hole punches, sand backfill, and clay plugs as required by soil conditions.
G. Dewatering system will not affect the adjacent buildings. Assign a Soil Consultant b to
advice and issue a report showing the accurate design for dewatering system.
3.5 FILLING MATERIALS
A. Earth filling
1. Earth filling to be approved material arising from excavations or approved
imported filling material, free from harmful matter, organic materials and other
materials liable to decompose or chemically react, and capable of being
compacted as specified.
2. Earth filling for foundations and general filling is to pass a 3-inch U.S. standard

sieve and material passing a No. 40 U.S. standard sieve is to have a maximum
plasticity index of 6%. No piece is to have its largest dimension greater than
one-third the thickness of a compacted layer.
3. Structural Fill: Structural fill shall consist of a controlled fill placed in areas
indicated on the drawings.
4. Structural fill material shall consist of soils that conform to the physical
characteristics stated in the Geotechnical Report.
5. Flooding and Tamping of Backfill.
a. Use a minimum 25 millimetre diameter rigid pipe of suitable
length for jetting excavations.
b. Insert the jetting pipe into the backfill to within 1 metre of the
top of the pipe allowing the water jetting action to determine
the rate at which the jetting pipe is worked through the backfill.
c. Continue jetting until water rises above top surface of backfill
and begins to pond.
d. Tamp backfill with a backhoe mounted vibratory plate
compactor once surface water has sufficiently dried.
e. Place and compact additional specified backfill material to
maintain top surface of backfill at required elevation.
B. Samples and Tests
1. Submit 50 kg representative samples of filling materials to an approved
laboratory for tests as follows and submit results for approval:
a. For soils with less than 50% fines: sieve analysis and compaction
b. For soils with more than 50% fines: sieve analysis, Atterberg limits
and compaction
c. For all soils: test in accordance with ASTM D1557 (Method D) to
determine the optimum amount of water to be used with fill material to
obtain maximum dry density.
2. Tests are to be conducted for every source of filling materials and for every type
of filling material encountered and as required by the Engineer.
C. Approval
1. Sources and types of filling materials and moisture contents at which they may
be placed and compacted are to be those approved after receipt of laboratory
test results.
D. Field Density Tests
1. Field density tests on compacted soil are to be made for each layer of
compacted fill at an average of one test every:
a. 200 m2 beneath buildings areas
b. 400 m2 beneath roads and paved areas
c. 600 m2 beneath other areas

2. Minimum density required on soils when made in accordance with ASTM
D2167 Rubber Balloon Method or ASTM D1556 Sand-Cone Method is to be:
a. For backfill under foundations slabs within building area or under
roads, parking areas and paved areas: 95% of maximum dry density
b. Elsewhere such as landscaped areas: 90% of maximum dry density.
E. Topsoil
1. Top soil is to be to BS 3882, medium texture, neutral to slightly alkaline
reaction, free of stones, pests, weed seeds and foreign matter.
3.6 WORKMANSHIP
A. General
1. Remove from site imported filling materials deemed unsuitable by the
Engineer.
2. Remove surplus imported filling materials from site.
3. Place filling using approved methods to required dimensions, levels, lines and
profiles and to permit water to drain freely.
4. Do not use earthmoving equipment for compaction except where approved.
5. Do not use heavy steel or pneumatic rollers inside building areas after
construction of ground beams. Take special precautions to safeguard existing
structures when steel or pneumatic rollers are used.
6. Compact backfilling using approved compaction equipment suited to the type
of material. Compact around columns, foundation walls and small-restricted
areas using mechanical vibratory plates, tampers or hydraulic compactors.
B. Placing and Compacting Fill
1. Surfaces to receive filling are to be cleared and all vegetation removed off site
before filling is placed. Surfaces of ground are to be scarified and re-compacted
to at least 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557.
Procedure C. Compaction is to be to a depth of at least 200 mm below ground
surface. Hard or smooth surfaces are to be roughened before filling is placed.
Existing road surfaces and the like are to be broken up and removed or used as
part of fill.
2. Surfaces of ground with gradient greater than 1 in 5, which are to receive filling,
are to have horizontal benches cut to match depths of compacted layers of
filling.
3. Each layer of filling is to be moistened or dried to reach correct moisture
content for required dry density. Spread and compact each layer to at least 95%
of maximum dry density, unless otherwise specified, all as determined by
ASTM D1557-91-Procedure C. Each compacted layer is to be tested and
approved prior to placing subsequent layers.
4. Earth filling generally is to be selected fill spread and levelled in layers each
well consolidated with a suitable mechanical rammer.
5. Deposit earth filling in a manner not to endanger the partly finished structure or
sub-structure either by direct pressure or indirectly by overloading banks
contiguous to the operation or in any other manner.

6. Minor up filling and local adjustment of levels is to be selected fill spread and
levelled in 150 mm maximum layers each well consolidated by suitable
mechanical means.
7. Where difference in level between adjacent areas of filling exceeds 600 mm, cut
into edge of higher filling to form benches having a minimum width of 600 mm
and a height equivalent to the depth of a layer of compacted filling. Spread and
compact new filling to ensure maximum continuity with previous filling.
8. Protection of Formation
a. Do not allow construction traffic on completed filling until the level has
been raised not less than 150 mm above formation level by properly
compacted temporary protective filling
b. Remove temporary protective filling from site before beginning
permanent construction
c. Do not stockpile materials on newly filled areas without permission.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Topsoil for Preservation: Stockpile excavated topsoil required to carry out subsequent
top-soiling operations in temporary spoil heaps on site as instructed.
B. Surplus Topsoil: Remove surplus topsoil from site to a tip.
C. Remove from site to a tip, surplus excavated materials not required for filling, spreading,
and levelling or stockpiling.
4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid will be determined from drawings as directed by the
Engineer.
B. Excavation and backfill are measured GEOMETRICALLY according to the
dimensions on the drawings. Any excess excavation and back filling are not
considered as part of measurement.
C. Excavation will be net as the void which is to be occupied by the permanent
construction with no allowance for working space or other additions.
D. The volume of rock excavation will include the minimum undercutting of sub grade
as specified.
E. The volume of unsuitable material excavated will be measured separately from other
excavation work.
F. Disposal of material arising from excavation will be measured as equal as to the
volume measured as excavation or as part thereof.
A. Excavation will be measured in cubic meter (m3) stating the starting level and
indicating the depth in successive stages.
B. Trench excavation will be measured in cubic meter (m3).
C. Disposal of material will be measured by cubic meter (m3).
D. Filling will be measured by cubic meter (m3) as equal to the void to be filled.

2019
E. Sub base and base course will be measured in cubic meter (m3) computed from each
typical section as shown on the drawings and multiplied by the measured length.
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be in full compensation for excavation, hauling and placing materials,
for compaction including all labour, plant, equipment, tools, traffic control, certifying
and testing, quality assurance, and all other operations to perform the work, including
but not limited to the following ancillary works. (Ref. 5 02)
shall be placed at Contractor’s expense.
excavation or any other unauthorized operation.
D. Drilling, blasting, or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to
permit excavation of material encountered will not be classified and paid for as rock.
E. Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be
A. Excavation in all kinds of soil, unless otherwise noticed.
B. Holding and supporting sides of excavation.
C. Removing existing foundation.
D. Disposal of excess material in authorized tips.
E. Level and compact bottom of excavation.
F. Sub grade preparation will be considered as part of excavation and not to be paid for
as an extra.
G. Contracting an independent laboratory/Agency to perform the external quality
control.
H. Investigations and exploratory operations performed by the Contractor.
I. Stockpiling any excavation material for later re-use on site.
J. Dewatering the site and areas adjacent to the site.
K. Plain concrete arises due to excess excavation depth.
L. All tests made on compacted soil.
M. Manual and mechanical compaction and watering.

2019
FOR
DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 Exterior improvements

SECTION 32 1613.13 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Conditions of Particular Application, and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Cast-in Place Curb and Gutter
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials specifications and manufacturer’s data sheet
B. Representative samples of all materials to be used in the work in full size units of
each type.
C. Shop drawings showing patterns, colors and full range of variations expected
1.4 REFERENCES:
A. Egyptian Standard Specifications (ES)
1. ES 4756 - 2007 Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening)
2. ES 1289 - 2008 Concrete Curbs Units- Requirements and test methods
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. AASHTO No. M 33: 2011 Specifications for Joint filler
2. AASHTO M 182: (2005; R 2012) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth
Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
C. American Society of testing and materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A1064 / A1064M - 16 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire
3. ASTM C143 / C143M - 15a Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete
Concrete
5. ASTM C172 / C172M - 14a Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete
Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
8. ASTM C309 - 11 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete
9. ASTM C31 / C31M - 15ae1 Standard Practice for Making and Curing
Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 1613.13 Cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters

11. ASTM D1751 - 04(2013)e1 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion
Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding
and Resilient Bituminous Types)
12. ASTM D1752 - 04a(2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge
13. ASTM D5893 / D5893M - 10 Standard Specification for Cold Applied,
Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland
Cement Concrete Pavements
A. Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to approval
and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
B. The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product, meeting
grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Use of
the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results. The
Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure
proper operation and compliance with specifications
C. Slip Form Equipment
1. Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial use
on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled, crawler
mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the plastic
concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Concrete.
B. Test Reports: Field Quality Control.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Placing During Warm Weather
1. The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 30 °C except
where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall
be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. The
placing temperature shall not exceed 35 °C at any time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials for concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03 Section “Concrete”.
2.2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS
A. The cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters shall not present defects such as cracks,
distortion or stripping with the dimensions, section size, length and shape shown on
the drawings with fair and smooth finishing.
B. Compressive strength of concrete after 28 days shall not be less than 250kg/cm2, or as
per bill of quantities and drawings.
2.3 PROPERTIES
A. Air content
1. Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent based
on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.

B. Slump
1. The concrete slump shall be 50 mm plus or minus 25 mm 2 inches plus or
minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.
C. Reinforcement steel
1. Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M.
2.4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS
A. Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter
1. Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed
fiberboard.
2. Expansion joint filler, pre-molded
a. Expansion joint filler, pre-molded, shall conform to ASTM D1751 or
ASTM D1752, 13 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 JOINT SEALANTS
A. Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893/D5893M
2.6 FORM WORK
A. Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform
accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the
tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, of sufficient strength to
resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete.
B. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 50 mm nominal thickness, straight and free
from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a
nominal length of 3 m.
C. Radius bends may be formed with 19 mm boards, laminated to the required thickness.
Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded
braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Ends of steel forms
shall be interlocking and self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for
radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have a
nominal length of 3 m with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form.
D. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed
for use with steel forms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed sub-grades and sub-base surfaces for compliance with requirements
for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
3.2 PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE
A. Soil shall be manually or mechanically compacted uniformly to the sufficient density
(95% relative density).
B. Following, an appropriate sand base in thickness indicated shall be spread and
compacted to 95% relative density by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth
required to allow setting of pavers units.
3.3 FORM SETTING
A. Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions.

B. Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not
to exceed 1.2 m 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional
stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where
required to ensure rigidity in the forms.
C. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be
used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found defective after
form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired.
D. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed.
Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed,
except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
A. Formed curb and gutter
1. Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift.
2. Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.
B. Curb and gutter finishing
1. Approved slip-formed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand
placement.
C. Surface and thickness tolerances
1. Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 6 mm from the testing edge of a 3
m straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 6
mm.
3.5 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS
A. Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curb and
gutter.
B. Contraction joints
1. Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction joints in
abutting Portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that monolithic
sections between curb returns will not be less than 1.5 m nor greater than 4.5
m in length.
2. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed by means of
3 mm thick separators and of a section conforming to the cross section of the
curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed as soon as practicable after
concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint and
prior to finishing.
3. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in the top
portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous cut across the
curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of cut shall be at least
one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 3 mm in width.
C. Expansion joints
1. Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint
filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter.
2. Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite
expansion joints of abutting Portland cement concrete pavement, and shall be
of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement.
3. Where curb and gutter do not abut Portland cement concrete pavement,

expansion joints at least 13 mm in width shall be provided at intervals not
less than 10 meters or greater than 36 meters.
4. Expansion joints shall be provided in non-reinforced concrete gutter at
locations indicated.
5. Expansion joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the
concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After grouting has sufficiently set or hardened, curb surface shall be cleaned and
traces of cement or dust accumulations and foreign matter shall be completely
removed.
B. Repair or remove and replace curbs which may damaged during paving works on the
contractor responsibilities.
4.1 GENERAL
A. The quantities to be paid will be measured in place or will be determined from the
shop drawings as directed by the Engineer.
A. Curbs or the like will be measured by length (m).
5.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be in full compensation for the fabrication, delivery and
installation of precast concrete elements, including all labor, plant, equipment,
tools, traffic control, certifying and testing, quality assurance, and all other
operations to perform the work, including but not limited to the following
ancillary works.
B. Material which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused shall be replaced
at Contractor’s expense.
C. No payment will be made for quantities resulting from oversized or
unauthorized work or any other unauthorized operation.
D. Material or work which does not conform to specification requirements shall
be removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
A. The unit prices for curbs shall be deemed to include all formwork, bedding,
temporary supports, connections between units and cast-in-place concrete
bedding, fixing devices, and any reinforcement or handling devices, moulds,
hoisting, grouting and fixing.
B. All accessories and materials necessary for the manufacturing, finishing,
cleaning and storage of precast concrete units shall be deemed to be included
in the unit price rates.
C. Costs of corrections to other work affected by or resulting from performing
precast concrete work shall be included in the unit price rates.

D. Contracting an independent laboratory/Agency to perform the external and
source quality control.
E. Costs of all samples and tests shall be included in the unit price rates.
END OF SECTION 1613.13


SECTION 32 1713 - PARKING BUMPERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Precast concrete wheel stopper with yellow reflective cover strip, size (1800x138x100)mm.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Measurement: Precast concrete parking bumpers will be measured for payment as an
aggregate lump-sum unit, acceptably installed and completed.
B. Payment: Precast concrete parking bumpers will be paid for in aggregate at the
Contract Lump-sum price, as indicated in the Bid Schedule of the Bid Form.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society of testing and materials (ASTM)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples, for submittal requirements and procedures.
B. Shop Drawings of bumpers, including plan layout and installation details, for
approval.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' product data of precast bumpers, epoxy
adhesive, unit configuration and dimensions for approval.
A. Precast parking bumpers shall be manufactured for the intended purpose by a
company or firm specializing in the manufacture of precast concrete parking
associated accessory.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with pavement placement and parking striping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Parking Bumpers:
1. Provide precast concrete parking bumpers of half octagonal configuration
and dimensions indicated.
2. Each bumper shall be reinforced with two 16 mm deformed steel reinforcing
bars, minimum.
3. Each bumper to be installed on at-grade asphalt pavement shall be
manufactured with two holes to accommodate the installation rebar. Holes
shall be positioned 15 cm in from each end.
4. Bumpers to be installed on concrete slabs of parking structures shall be
manufactured without holes.
5. Precast Reinforced Concrete Mix: Minimum compressive strength of 350
kg/cm2 at 28 days, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 1713 - PARKING BUMPERS


6. Use rigid molds constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size,
and finish.
7. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
B. Adhesive for anchoring bumpers or wheel stops to pavement shall be an epoxy
adhesive manufactured for the purpose.
C. Steel Bars for Installation: Epoxy-coated rebar, 16 mm, conforming to applicable
requirements of Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
D. Cure units to develop concrete quality and to minimize appearance blemishes
including non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
E. Configuration
1. Nominal Size: 15 cm high, 20 cm wide, 180 cm long.
2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard cross section with sloped vertical faces,
square ends and drainage slots.
F. Accessories
1. Dowels: Steel, unfinished, 13 mm diameter, 60 cm long, pointed tip
conforming to ASTM A615.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Precast concrete bumpers shall be anchored and secured in position on at-grade
asphalt pavements, as indicated, with epoxy-coated rebar and an appropriate epoxy
adhesive as specified.
B. Precast concrete bumpers shall secure in position on at-grade concrete pavements, as
indicated, with an appropriate epoxy adhesive as specified.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 1713 - PARKING BUMPERS


SECTION 32 1716 - SPEED BUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Parking bumpers and speed bumps.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C531 - 00(2012) Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts,
Monolithic Surfacing, and Polymer Concretes
2. ASTM C642 - 13 Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids
in Hardened Concrete
3. ASTM C672 / C672M - 12 Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of
Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals
4. ASTM D412 - 15a Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension
5. ASTM D573 - 04(2015) Standard Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration in
an Air Oven
6. ASTM D395 - 14 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression
Set
7. ASTM D746 - 14 Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of
Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
8. ASTM D2240 - 15 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer
Hardness
9. ASTM D2370 - 98(2010) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of
Organic Coatings
10. ASTM D4060 - 14 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of
Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for all products proposed for use, describing physical
characteristics, sizes, patterns and method of installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned location plan and attachment details.
C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing
laboratory, showing conformance to specified quality standards. Test results shall
represent average results for production goods and shall be not over two (2) years
old.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Maintenance Data:
a. Submit manufacturer’s recommended cleaning and maintenance
data. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials and suggested schedule for cleaning.
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer:
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 1716 Speed bumps

a. Company with a minimum of two (2) years documented experience

in the installation of similar recycled rubber systems and approved
by the manufacturer.
A. Deliver materials to the installation site in the manufacturer’s original packaging.
B. Packaging shall contain manufacturer’s name, product color, identification number
and other related information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Rubber composite material: 100 percent rubber with polyurethane prepolymer binder,
compression molded; resistant to UV, moisture and oil; complying with the
following:
1. ASTM C642 Minimum density of 0.6 oz/cu.in. minimum.
2. ASTM D2240 Minimum Durometer hardness of 65A ± 7.
3. ASTM D412 Minimum 210 psi tensile strength of primary structural
components.
4. ASTM D395 Minimum compression deformation of 10 percent at 70 psi and
68 degrees F.
5. ASTM D746 Low temperature brittleness of -40 degrees F.
6. ASTM D573 Weathering for a minimum of 70 hours at 158 degrees F with
the following minimum results:
a. Hardness retained: 100 percent (± 5 percent).
b. Compressive strength: 100 percent (± 5 percent).
c. Tensile strength: 100 percent (± 5 percent).
d. Elongation retained: 100 percent (± 5 percent).
e. Hardness retained: 100 percent (± 5 percent).
B. Reflective Material: GNR Technologies “Reflect Guard” thermally embedded
reflective material, complying with the following:
1. ASTM D2370 Tensile strength, minimum 1,000 psi.
2. ASTM D2370 Elongation, 200 percent minimum.
3. ASTM D4060 Abrasion, maximum 20 mg loss.
C. Adhesive: GNR Technologies “PL Premium” urethane adhesive, non-toxic,
nonflammable, waterproof; complying with the following:
1. Viscosity: Tensile strength, minimum 1,000 psi, when tested to ASTM
D2370.
2. Solids: 95 percent ±2 percent.
3. Color : Light brown.
4. Working or Open Time: Up to one hour.
5. Weight per Gallon: 10.5 pounds.
6. Flash Point: 250 degrees F.
7. Freeze-Thaw Stability: Does not freeze.


8. Storage Stability: One year.

9. Shrinkage: None.
10. Maximum VOC: 100 grams per liter.
D. Stakes: GNR Technologies 14 inch length steel spikes, ½ inch diameter, capped;
coated with corrosion-resistant black paint.
E. Lag Bolts: 5 inch length steel bolts with polyethylene shields; coated with corrosion-
resistant black paint.
A. Parking bumpers shall be GNR Technologies, manufactured of 100 percent rubber,
ground and blended with polyurethane prepolymer
1. Resistant to warping, cracking, chipping and rotting.
2. Flexible and capable of conforming to irregularities in paving surface.
3. Finish: Black body with “Reflect Guard” applied reflective material.
a. Yellow reflective parallelogram stripes, or
b. Blue reflective parallelogram stripes, or
c. White reflective parallelogram stripes.
4. Sizes:
a. 4- ¼ inch by 6 inch by 48 inch. Total weight: 23 pounds, or
b. 4- ¼ inch by 6 inch by 72 inch. Total weight: 33 pounds.
B. Speed bumps shall be manufactured of 100 percent rubber from tires, blended with
polyurethane prepolymer.
1. Resistant to warping, cracking, chipping and rotting.
2. Flexible and capable of conforming to irregularities in paving surface.
3. Channel bottom: Continuous channel, minimum 1¼ inch x 1¼ inch, for
drainage, piping and cabling.
4. Finish: Black body with “Reflect Guard” applied reflective material.
5. Reflectors: Recessed imbedded cat-eye reflectors, centered in black stripes.
6. Sizes:
a. 2¼ inch by 12 inch by 48 inch. Total weight: 31 pounds, or
b. 2¼ inch by 12 inch by 72 inch. Total weight: 47 pounds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates are smooth and flat and ready to receive the Work.
B. Verify that pavement and ambient air temperature are within temperature range
recommended for proper curing of adhesive. Do not install with adhesive when
pavement is wet or rain is anticipated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and remove debris and dust from pavement surface and surrounding area.
B. Wash pavement with water and allow drying.
3.3 PARKING BUMPERS INSTALLATION


A. Installation on asphaltic or concrete paving: Attach loose bumpers to asphalt paving

with stakes. Drill ½ inch diameter holes through indicated marks on bumper,
penetrating bumper to reach substrate material. Drive 14 inch spikes or 12" lag bolt
with washer through bumper holes and into substrate until flush with top of bumper.
B. Installation on concrete paving: Adhere bumpers to concrete with PL Premium
adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Reposition and
adjust bumpers within one hour of adhesive application. Allow adhesive to cure
undisturbed for four (4) hours minimum.
3.4 SPEED BUMPS INSTALLATION
A. Installation on concrete paving: Attach loose speed bumps to concrete paving with
stakes. Drill ½ inch diameter holes through indicated marks on bumper, penetrating
bumper to reach substrate material. Drive 14 inch spikes or 12" lag bolt with washer
through bumper holes and into substrate until flush with top of speed bump.
B. Installation on concrete paving: Attach loose speed bumps to asphalt paving with lag
bolts. Drill holes through indicated marks on bumper; size of hole determined by
diameter of shield. Drill holes 1 inch longer than length of shield. Use 5 inch by ½
inch lag bolts with lead shields. Tighten lag bolts until securely fastened into
substrate and flush with top of speed bump.
A. Arrange for manufacturer to provide field service specialist at commencement of
installation to instruct installer in methods and to assure that project conditions are
satisfactory.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adhesive allows repositioning within the first hour after application. Immediately
after placement, adjust and reposition bumpers parallel to parking space and centered
in the space width.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Immediately after placement and adjustment, remove excessive adhesive.


SECTION 32 1723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labour, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for
pavement marking work indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Condition of pavement: Clean, dry and cured minimum amount of time as
recommended by manufacturer.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit manufacturer's literature to the Architect for approval. Literature shall show
compatibility of product proposed for use with paving surface to which product is to
be installed.
1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Contractor and subcontractor for work of this section shall be jointly responsible for
the coordination of the work specified herein, including but not limited to:
1. Fire Lanes: Coordinate with all governing authorities to determine exact
requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Fire lane marking, if
required, is part of the work of the base contract.
2. Special marking, if required, is part of the work of the base contract.
3. Colors: Coordinate color requirements with all governing authorities, use
only acceptable colors. Colors specified herein shall be used, if acceptable.
4. Notification: Notify the Architect of any required variation from the
drawings resulting from coordination.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect newly surfaces from damage by vehicles during the time required for
execution. Any damage to newly executed material due to the subcontractor's failure
to provide adequate protection shall be repaired by him at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.7 GUARANTEE
A. Any work found to be defective because of either poor workmanship or defective
materials which may be evident within a period of 120 days from acceptance for use
will be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Indications of defective work for the purpose of this guarantee include poor adhesion
to the pavement surfaces, checking, cracking, peeling and discoloration.
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 1723 Pavement markings


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Road marking material
1. Thermoplastic road marking material especially designed for solid figure
road and traffic marking based on Hydrocarbon resin
2. Chemical description
ITEM WEIGHT-%
Binder 12 - 20
Refined mineral-base oil 2-6
Fillers 30 - 50
Titanium dioxide 3-8
3. Physical data
ITEM PROPERTIES
Melting point (°C) 90 - 120
Density (g/cm³) 1.9 – 2.1
Solubility Soluble in aromatic hydrocarbons.
Insoluble in water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. New road surfaces will be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 11 days before
installation of materials. Dust, clay, silt and excess sand will be removed (by
sweeping) from the pavement to be marked before installation of materials
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Care should be taken in the initial installation and monitoring of speed humps to
minimize the risk of edge raveling and profile deformation exceeding established
tolerances
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 1723 Pavement markings

SECTION 32 3100 - FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fences.
2. Gates
1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
1.1 REFERENCES
A. American society for testing and materials (ASTM)
2. ASTM A392 - 11a Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link
Fence Fabric
3. ASTM A653 / A653M - 13 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
4. ASTM A817 - 12 Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for
Chain-Link Fence Fabric and Marcel led Tension Wire
5. ASTM A824 - 01(2012) Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel
Marcel led Tension Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence
6. ASTM C1107 / C1107M - 14 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
7. ASTM F567 - 14a Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence
8. ASTM F626 - 14 Standard Specification for Fence Fittings
9. ASTM F900 - 11 Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing
Gates
10. ASTM F1043 - 14 Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings
on Steel Industrial Fence Framework
11. ASTM F1083 - 13 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures
B. American Society For Civil Engineers
1. ASCE/SEI 7-10 :2013 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures
C. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI)
1. WLG 2445: 2012 Chain Link Fence Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line
Post and Line Post Spacing
Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 32 3100 - FENCES AND GATES

A. Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7:
1. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to CLFMI
WLG 2445, based on mesh size and pattern specified and on the following:
a. Wind Loads: As verified with Structural engineer, but not less than 140
km/h.
b. Exposure Category: B, unless indicated otherwise.
c. Fence Height: 3 m.
d. Material Group: IA, ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-
link fences and gates.
1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3. Gates and hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work. Show accessories, hardware, gate swing, and gate swing clearances.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For chain-link fences and gate framework indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, and gate, from manufacturer.
C. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals:
1. Gate hardware.
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown
on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by
field measurements.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer
edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 4.8 mm.
a. Mesh Size: 50 mm.
b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 365 gm/m2 with
zinc coating applied before weaving.
c. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving
process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
2.2 FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and
line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall
thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following:
1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Heavy Industrial Strength: Material Group IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40.
3. Horizontal Framework Members: Top and bottom rails complying with ASTM
F 1043.
a. Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter.
4. Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Paints, coatings, and primers shall be ready-mixed at the manufacturer's
plant and shall be delivered in sealed containers, labeled and identified.
Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly
manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paints and
finishes shall have Class A rating in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Materials without manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-
grade product will not be acceptable. Use products of same
manufacturer for succeeding coats.
b. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates
and service indicated.
2.4 TENSION WIRE
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 4.5 mm diameter, tension wire complying with ASTM A
817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating:
1. Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot-dip process, matching chain-link fabric
coating weight.
2.5 SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single and double swing gate
types, as indicated.
1. Gate Leaf Width: 185 cm, each leaf, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Gate Fabric Height: As indicated.
B. Pipe and Tubing:
1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective
coating and finish to match fence framing.
2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel.
3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.
C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D. Hardware:
1. Hinges: 180-degree outward swing, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for
padlocking accessible from both sides of gate.
2.6 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Post Caps: Provide for each post.
C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 15 cm long.
2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting bottom rails in
the fence line-to-line posts.
E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.
F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 50 mm shorter than full height of chain-link
fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post,
unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
G. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and
frames, complying with the following:
a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 2.7 mm diameter wire; galvanized coating
thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.
2.7 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining,
noncorrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout,
recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
2.8 WOOD FENCE

A. Dried Timbers: free of heart center; dried to 19 percent or less, utilizing computer-
controlled low-pressure steam system or microwave.
1. Dressing: Sanded 4 sides (S4S).
a. Nominal Size: 3x6.
b. Nominal Size: 3x8.
c. Nominal Size: 3x10.
B. Connectors and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel, suitable for
service.
C. Fabrication: Shop fabricates timbers to the greatest extent practical, including pre-
drilling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for a verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork,
pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise
permitted by Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 150
m or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system,
underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements
indicated.
1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.
3.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing
indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.
B. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete with mechanical anchors at indicated spacing into
firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and
hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrates
or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete
splatter.
a. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than
125 mm deep and 19 mm larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose
material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete
with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with

anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished
sloped to drain water away from post.
3. Mechanically Driven Posts: Drive into soil to depth of 30 inches. Protect post
top to prevent distortion.
C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and
terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of as indicated on
Drawings.
D. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with
0.120-inch-diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a
maximum of 60 cm o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching
fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:
1. Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric. Install top tension wire through
post cap loops. Install bottom tension wire within 150 mm of bottom of fabric
and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.
E. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment
of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved
runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail
at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing
manufacturer.
F. Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings.
G. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch
between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull
fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric
remains under tension after pulling force is released.
H. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and
gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 40 cm o.c.
I. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails.
Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180
degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to
minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 300 mm o.c. and to braces at 60
cm o.c.
J. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence
opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.
3.5 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure
for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware
using tamper resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for
anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp,
excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or
malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage
accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.7 WOOD FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Erect timbers true and plumb, and in accordance with approved shop drawings.
B. Repair or replace damaged timbers before Substantial Completion.
PART 5 ‐ BASIS OF PAYMENT

5.1 GENERAL
and protecting.


Arch. &amp; Struc. Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Arch. &amp; Struc. Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING

Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 Procurement and contracting requirements

Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 Procurement and contracting requirements

SECTION 00 0110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 0110 Table of contents

Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 0110 Table of contents

Uptown Cairo – Village Z3 00 0110 Table of contents

DIVISION 03: CONCRETE

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 Concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

6. Conduct test methods according to the following

Quality of Water, Solids, ppm AASHTO: T26

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

 31 days prior to delivery of  One time

Name, location,  31 days prior to delivery of  One time

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

 31 days prior to delivery of  One time

 31 days prior to delivery of  One time

Report of the following

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Reports and records on

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 3000 Cast-in-place concrete

SECTION 03 4500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 4500 Precast architectural concrete

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 4500 Precast architectural concrete

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Tests shall be performed by an independent testing

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 4500 Precast architectural concrete

b. The minimum sample size is to be approximately 300 mm x 300 mm

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 4500 Precast architectural concrete

 Non repairable damage incurred during construction

Uptown Cairo - Village Z3 03 4500 Precast architectural concrete

Arch. & Struc. Specifications

Arch. & Struc. Specifications